Legacy Premium (2024) - Car SUBARU - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Legacy Premium (2024) SUBARU

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner's Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner's Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owner's Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

"SUBARU" and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

© Copyright 2023 SUBARU CORPORATION

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Line drawing of a modern sedan car (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a modern SUV (no text or symbols present)

002250

1 Legacy
2 Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

Table of Contents

Introduction	1
Illustrated Index	13
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags	27	Chapter 1
Keys and Doors	117	Chapter 2
Instruments and Controls	171	Chapter 3
Climate Control	307	Chapter 4
Audio	325	Chapter 5
Interior Equipment	329	Chapter 6
Starting and Operating	351	Chapter 7
Driving Tips	447	Chapter 8
In Case of Emergency	483	Chapter 9
Appearance Care	509	Chapter 10
Maintenance and Service	517	Chapter 11
Specifications	565	Chapter 12
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects	581	Chapter 13
Index	599	Chapter 14

Introduction

● Warranties 2

Warranties for U.S.A. 2

Warranties for Canada 2

Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ....

● How to Use This Owner's Manual ....

Using Your Owner's Manual 2

Safety Warnings 3

Safety Symbol 4

Abbreviation List 4

● Vehicle Symbols 5

● Safety Precautions When Driving ....

Seatbelt and SRS Airbag.... 5

Child Safety.... 5

Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) ....

Drinking and Driving.... 7

Drugs and Driving 7

Driving When Tired or Sleepy 8

Modification of Your Vehicle 8

Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving 8

Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation

System 8

Driving with Pets.... 9

Tire Pressures.... 9

On-Road and Off-Road Driving 9

Attaching Accessories 9

Vehicle Operation....10

● General Information ......11

California Perchlorate Advisory 11

Noise from under the Vehicle 11

Event Data Recorder 11

Warranties

■ Warranties for U.S.A.

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties

• SUBARU Limited Warranties
- Federal Emission Control Systems Warranties
- California Emissions Control Systems Warranties

All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Read these warranties carefully.

■ Warranties for Canada

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties:

• SUBARU Limited Warranty
- Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Service Booklet". Read these warranties carefully.

■ Warranties except for U.S.A and Canada

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Read these warranties carefully.

How to Use This Owner's Manual

■ Using Your Owner's Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.

Introduction

This chapter informs you general information before driving.

Illustrated Index

This chapter informs you about the vehicle layout with illustrations.

Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and Doors

This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and to use the instruments and other switches

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior Equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and Operating

This chapter informs you how to start operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving Tips

This chapter informs you how to drive SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In Case of Emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if have a problem, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance Care

This chapter informs you how to keep SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service

This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the dimensions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer Information a Reporting Safety Defects

This chapter informs you about Tire information, Uniform tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects. Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that's if this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

For models with the EyeSight system For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

■ Safety Warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGS, CAUTIONs and NOTES in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your vehicle.

Safety Symbol

000013

You will find a circle with a slash through in this manual. This symbol means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen", depending upon the context.

■ Abbreviation List

You may find several abbreviations in t manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation	Meaning
ABS Anti-lock	brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR	Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD All-wheel drive
BSD	Blind Spot Detection
CVT	Continuously variable transmission
DRL Daytime	running light
EBD	Electronic brake force distribution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW	Gross axle weight
GAWR	Gross axle weight rating
GPS	Global positioning system
GVW	Gross vehicle weight
GVWR	Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent

Abbreviation	Meaning
LATCH	Lower anchors and tethers for children
LCA Lane Change Assist
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT	Methylcyclopentadienyl man-ganese tricarbonyl
OBD	On-board diagnostics
RAB	Reverse Automatic Braking system
RCTA	Rear Cross Traffic Alert
RON	Research octane number
SI-DRIVE	SUBARU Intelligent Drive
SRH	Steering Responsive Head-light
SRS	Supplemental restraint sys-tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS	Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem

Vehicle Symbols

There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to "Warning and Indicator Lights" P24.

Mark Name

	WARNING
	CAUTION
	Read these instructions carefully
	Wear eye protection
	Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid
	Keep children away
	Keep flames away
	Prevent explosions

Safety Precautions When Driving

■ Seatbelt and SRS Airbag

WARNING

• All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
• To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

- The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated in the proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.

• For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P47.
• For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)" P81.

■ Child Safety

WARNING

- Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will

- CONTINUED -

be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

• While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be seated in the REAR seat in a infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

• Seat children in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

• NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

• Always turn the child safety locks to the "LOCK" position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out. Refer to "Child Safety Locks" P150.
• Always lock the passengers' windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Refer to "Windows" P150.

• Never leave unattended children, adults or animals in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

• Help prevent children, adults or animals from locking themselves in the trunk. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small children.

• When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors. Also make certain that the trunk is closed.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.

• For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P47.
• For the child restraint system, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" P61.
• For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)" P81.

■ Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)

WARNING

• Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
  ● Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
• Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
• Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into a vehicle.
  ● Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
• If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully ope

- Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

■ Drinking and Driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if you drink just a little – it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal

the accident, injuring or killing yourself your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the severity of that injury.

Please don't drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects

all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your bloc is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.

■ Drugs and Driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers' and other persons' risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your

- CONTINUED -

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

■ Driving When Tired or Sleep

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers' and other persons' chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you are tired sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving with others.

■ Modification of Your Vehicle

WARNING

Do not remove the genuine SUBAR navigation and/or audio system. Doing so could cause the following functions to be inoperable.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

• Rear view image and help lines
• Vehicle settings
• Climate control
• Front seat heater and ventilation
• Clock

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified other than with genuine SUBARU parts and accessories. Other types of modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.

■ Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and lead to an accident. If you use a cell phone to talk or text, first pull off the road and park in a safe place. In some States/Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on a phone while driving, but only if the phone is hands-free.

■ Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation System

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract your attention from driving. Also, do not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss of attention to driving could lead to an accident. If you wish to operate the controls of the navigation system, first take the vehicle off the road and stop it in a safe location.

■ Driving with Pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be throw around inside the vehicle and hurt you of your passengers. Besides, the pets can hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harm which can be secured to the rear seat v a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which ca secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carrier's handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger's seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.

■ Tire Pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres sure of each tire and the spare (if equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. For detailed information, refer to "Tires and Wheels" P538.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

■ On-Road and Off-Road Driving

This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. -Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It also handles and maneuvers differently from other passenger cars. For this reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and precautions in order to prevent serious injury or death due to loss of control, rollover and other accidents. Refer to "On-Road and Off-Road Driving"

P452.

■ Attaching Accessories

WARNING

• Do not attach any accessories, labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stickers) to the windshield. Such items may obstruct your view.
• If it is necessary to attach an accessory (such as an electronic toll collection (ETC) device or security pass) to the windshield, consult your SUBARU dealer for details on the proper location.
• Do not connect any unauthorized accessories or devices to the data link connector (OBDII port). This connector should be used only with compatible diagnostic it devices for inspection and maintenance by an authorized service technician using authorized service tools. Connecting unauthorized devices, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, may adversely affect vehicle systems, including safety systems, or allow others to access information stored in your vehicle. The use of

unauthorized devices may also cause unexpected malfunctions, such as a drained battery, or damage vehicle systems. The manufacturer's warranty will not cover any part that malfunctions, fails, or is damaged due to the use of an unauthorized device with the data link connector.

■ Vehicle Operation

▼ Before leaving vehicle unattended

CAUTION

Always lock your vehicle and carry your access key fob with you. There is a risk for vehicle theft or unauthorized persons tampering with the vehicle or installing malicious electronic devices.

▼ Key number plate storage NOTE

- The key number is required when repairing the vehicle or making a spare access key fob. If you lose plate with these numbers stamped on it, you will not be able to spare access key fob. To prevent

from being stolen, do not leave it the vehicle and store it in a safe may place. Refer to "Keyless Access v Push-Button Start System" P119.

- If you lose your key, we recommend that you delete the lost access key fob registration to prevent theft. Only a SUBARU dealer can delete key fob registration. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer. Refer to "Key Replacement" P136.

▼ Vehicle modifications

WARNING

• Do not install parts, make custom adjustments or perform wiring or other operations that are not suitable for the vehicle.
• Do not connect accessories to the vehicle wiring or connectors unless they are genuine SUBARU products. SUBARU's vehicle warranty does not cover any malfunctions resulting from connecting the vehicle to products other than those specified.

that may be illegal to modify the vehicle by installing parts other than those reported by SUBARU

it in to the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport, and Tourism. Consult your SUBARU dealer about the kinds of parts (tires, wheels, mufflers, etc.) you can legally install on your vehicle.

Device installation

WARNING

Connecting devices that are not intended to be used in the vehicle or in a particular connector can adversely affect the vehicle system or cause the auxiliary battery to discharge. It may also cause personal information leaks or unauthorized remote operation of vehicle features, resulting in unforeseen complications. Any complication caused by connecting a device other than one intended to be used in the vehicle is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. SUBARU also bears no responsibility for any such complication.

- The vehicle trouble diagnosis connector should only be used to connect the vehicle data link connector (OBDII) for inspection and maintenance purposes.

- Use the USB port only for data communication with your vehicle and for device charging.

▼ Suspicious device handling

WARNING

If you find an unrecognized device on your vehicle, consult your SUBARU dealer immediately.

Any problem or safety risk due to the connection of an unauthorized device is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. SUBARU also bears no responsibility for any such cause.

▼ Deleting personal information from vehicle

CAUTION

When transferring ownership of your vehicle, delete the personal information registered in the vehicle by performing a Factory Data Reset. For details about the Factory Data Reset, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

Note that certain personal information inputted in the Head Unit and the phone number of any paired device will remain in vehicle data logs even after the Factory Data Reset. These data logs are strictly for quality assurance purposes and not viewable by any subsequent purchaser. To have those logs deleted permanently from the vehicle, please contact your SUBARU dealer

the

General Information

■ California Perchlorate Advisory

Certain vehicle components such as air-ction bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless entry transmitter batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

■ Noise from under the Vehicle NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. This noise is caused by the operation of the fuel evaporation leakage checking system and the operation is normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15 minutes.

■ Event Data Recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag

- CONTINUED -

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the designed to record data related to vehiclespecial equipment, can read the information and safety systems for a short time if they have access to the vehicle or period of time, typically 30 seconds or less the EDR. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the

Illustrated Index

● Exterior 14
● Interior 16
● Instrument Panel.... 19
● Steering Wheel.... 20
● Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches 21

● Combination Meter.... 22
U.S.-Spec. Models 22
Except U.S.-Spec. Models....23

● Warning and Indicator Lights......

Exterior

1 2 3 4 5 14 13 11 10 9 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 002251

1 Engine hood (page 523)
2 Headlights (page 260, 554)
3 Turn signal lights (page 270, 554)
4 Windshield wipers (page 272)
5 Moonroof (page 167)
6 Roof rails (page 463)
7 Door locks (page 142)
8 Outside mirrors (page 299)
9 Tire pressure (page 540)
10 Flat tires (page 488)
11 Tire chains (page 459)
12 Towing hook (left side) (Subaru Outback Wilderness) (page 497)
13 Fog lights (page 269, 554)
14 Tie-down hooks (page 497)
15 Towing hook (right side) (page 497)

1 2 3 11 8 6 5 4 1 2 3 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 002141

1 Rear window defogger (page 275)
2 Fuel filler lid and cap (page 355)
3 Child safety locks (page 150)
4 Tie-down holes (page 497)
5 Lights (page 260, 554)
6 Turn signal lights (page 270, 554)
7 Towing hook (right side) (Subaru Outback Wilderness) (page 497)
8 Trunk lid (page 153)
9 Rear gate (page 156)
10 Rear window wiper (page 274)
11 Towing hook (left side) (page 497)

Interior

1 2 2 6 5 4 3 001827

1 Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 72)

U.S.-spec. models:

5 lower anchorages

- Except U.S.-spec. models:

4 lower anchorages

2 Seatbelts (page 47)
3 Center console (page 333)
4 Accessory power outlet (page 336)
5 Front seats (page 28)
6 Rear seats (page 41)

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to various device interfaces and controls

1 Cup holder (page 334)
2 Select lever (page 375)
3 USB power supply (page 338)
4 Accessory power outlet (page 336)
5 Glove box (page 333)
6 Dual 7.0-inch display models* 1 (page 242)/Climate control (page 310)/Audie*
7 11.6-inch display models* 1 (page 218)/Climate control (page 312)/AudioNavigation system ^2
8 Rear seat heater switches (page 39)
9 USB power supply (page 338)
*1: Center information display
*2: For details about how to use the audio and navigation system (if equipped), refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Diagram of car interior with labeled compartments and a zoomed-in inset showing internal structure

1 Moonroof switch (page 167)
2 Door interlock switch (page 330)
3 Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
4 Map light switches (page 330)

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK: Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK.

Instrument Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 10 13 12 11 9 8 7 002128

1 Power window switches (page 150)
2 Remote control mirror switch (page 300)
3 Seat position memory buttons (page 34)
4 Combination meter (page 179)
5 Hazard warning flasher switch (page 178)
6 Camera for Driver Monitoring System (page 434)
7 Front view monitor switch (page 405)
8 Electronic parking brake switch (page 394)
9 Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 303)
10 Hood release knob (page 523)
11 Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch (page 166)
12 Illumination brightness control dial (page 181)
13 Trunk lid opener button (page 154)/Power rear gate button (page 157)

Steering Wheel

1 2 3 4 4 10 9 1 8 7 6 5 002129

1 Audio control switches* 1
2 Talk switch for voice command system*
3 Cruise control switches* 2
4 Shift paddles (page 378)
5 SI-DRIVE switch (page 380)
6 Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 303)
7 SRS airbag (page 81)
8 Horn (page 304)
9 Hands-free phone switch* 1
10 Control switches for combination meter display (color LCD) (page 208)
*1: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches

11 10 9 8 5 4 2 1 3 7 6 001809

1 Windshield wiper (page 271)
2 Mist (page 272)
3 Windshield washer (page 273)
4 Rear window wiper and washer switch (page 274)
5 Wiper intermittent time control switch (page 273)
6 Wiper control lever (page 272)
7 Light control switch (page 260)
8 Front fog light switch (page 269)
9 Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 261)
10 Headlight flasher High/Low beam change (page 263)
11 Turn signal lever (page 270)

Combination Meter

■ U.S.-Spec. Models

1 2 3 4 5 扣 MPG AVG 0.8 MPG mi O MPH 3.0 3 mi P 8 7 6 ABS PARK BRAKE 002144

1 Tachometer (page 179)
2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page 203)
3 Combination meter display (color LCD) (page 207)
4 Trip meter and odometer (page 179)
5 Speedometer (page 179)
6 Fuel gauge (page 180)
7 Digital speed screen (page 215)
8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page 181)

■ Except U.S.-Spec. Models

1 2 3 4 5 扣 1/100km AVG 99.9 km/h km O km/h P 3.4 km/h 8 7 6 3DOE 002177

1 Tachometer (page 179)
2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page 203)
3 Combination meter display (color LCD) (page 207)
4 Trip meter and odometer (page 179)
5 Speedometer (page 179)
6 Fuel gauge (page 180)
7 Digital speed screen (page 215)
8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page 181)

Warning and Indicator Lights

Mark Name Page
(KRWD)	Seatbelt warning light	183
(ACDS)	Front passenger's seatbelt warning light	183
	Rear seatbelt warning light	185
(SBZC)	SRS airbag system warning light	186
	CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light	188
(GSHC)	Charge warning light	189
	Oil pressure warning light	189
[THWR]	Engine low oil level warning light	189
AT OIL TEMP	AT OIL TEMP warning light	189
ABS/(ABS)	warning light 191

Mark Name Page

Mark Name Page
BRAKE / (1)	Brake system warning light	192
PARK / (P)	Electronic parking brake indicator light	193
	Door open indicator 194
	Engine hood open warning light	195
	Low fuel warning light	194
AWD	All-Wheel Drive warning light	195
	Power steering warning light	195
(AVH)	Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light	194
	Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light	196
OFF	Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light	197

Mark Name Page
	Access key warning indicator (if equipped)	197
	Security indicator light	202
[SYKD]	Turn signal indicator lights	203
	High beam indicator light	203
	High beam assist indicator	203
	Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light	204
	LED headlight warning light	204
[8S4W]	Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light	204
	Steering Responsive Headlight warning light	204
	Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)	204
	X-MODE indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	205
	Hill descent control indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	205
[DOE]	Headlight indicator light	204
	Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)	189
	Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light	187
	Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light	187
	Windshield washer fluid warning light	195
	Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light	204
	Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)	205
	Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)	204

Mark Name Page
	Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator light	205
[ZAC7]	BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)	206
	BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)	206
	Intelligent (I) mode indicator (if equipped)	203
	Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator (if equipped)	203
[306X]	Icy road surface warning indicator	206
[R26ZZ]	RAB warning indicator (if equipped)	206
	RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)	206
[2XBH]	Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator (if equipped)	207
	Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green) (if equipped)	206
	Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow) (if equipped)	207

Mark Name Page
	Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light (if equipped)	207
	Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped)	207

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbag

1-1. Front Seats.... 28

Manual Seat (If Equipped) 31

Power Seat (If Equipped) 32

Head Restraint Adjustment ....37

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped) ....

Front Seat Heater 39

Rear Seat Heater....39

1-3. Seat Ventilation (If Equipped) ....

1-4. Rear Seats 41

Reclining the Seatback (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)....42

Folding Down the Rear Seatback 42

Head Restraint Adjustment 45

Armrest 47

1-5. Seatbelts.... 47

Seatbelt Safety Tips....47 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ....48

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) 48

Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ....49

Fastening the Seatbelt 49

Seatbelt Maintenance....55

1-6. Seatbelt Extender 55

1-7. Seatbelt Pretensioners 57

Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner ....58

Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt Pretensioners ....59

System Monitors....59

System Servicing....59

Precautions against Vehicle Modification ....60

1-8. Rear Seat Reminder 60

1-9. Child Restraint Systems 61

Safety Precautions 61

Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems....63

Where to Place a Child Restraint System ......

Choosing a Child Restraint System ....66 Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt....66

Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion ....70 Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ....72 Top Tether Anchorages ....77

1-10. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag).... 81 pue

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System 81

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System for Accessories and Any Objects ....3

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System and Children....85

Components 88

SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag 90

SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag 104

SRS Airbag System Monitors 111

SRS Airbag System Servicing 112

Precautions against Vehicle Modification...... 113

How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer concerning Modifications for Persons with Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced Airbag System 114

1-1. Front Seats

WARNING

• Never adjust the seat while driving, as personal injury or loss vehicle control may occur.
• Before adjusting the seat, ensure nothing is blocking the adjusting mechanism.
• After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to ensure the seat is securely locked. If it is not, it may move suddenly or the seat-belt may not operate properly.
• Do not put objects under the front seats. They may interfere with front seat locking mechanism and cause an accident.
• Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should always be used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not in the upright position and a collision occurs, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

• The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in the proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injury. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control, and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat

Line drawing of two children seated in a car seat, one wearing a seatbelt and the other with a belt (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seat-belt, whichever is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. Se-

cure ALL types of child systems in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" P61.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat using a seatbelt device, with no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

Diagram of a hand holding a circular object with a diagonal line, no text or symbols present

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seat back. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap is sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

Do not let rear passengers rest their seat between the front seatback and seat cushion. Doing so may interfere with the proper operation of the following systems and could result in serious injury.

Occupant detection system ing SRS side airbag

• SRS seat cushion airbag
- Front seat heater (if equipped)
- Front seat ventilation (if equipped)
• Power seat (if equipped)

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat with a hand extending to the seat, no text or symbols present.

WARNING

Do not press your feet onto the instrument panel. Doing so may prevent the occupant detection function of the SRS airbag system from functioning correctly, and may result in serious injury or death in the event of an accident.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair with headrests, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do put cushions or any other material between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the floor next to stacked boxes, with a no-allowed symbol in the background (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

■ Manual Seat (If Equipped)

▼ Forward and backward adjustment

101520

1. Sit in the seat to adjust.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat the desired position, and then release the lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth make sure that it is securely locked place.

▼ Reclining the seatback

101736

1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever.
   to2. Make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position in an spring back upward with force when pulling up the lever. While operating the lever to return the seatback, hold the seatback lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

▼ Seat cushion height adjustment (driver's seat)

2 1 101737

1 Push the lever down to lower the seat. 2 Pull the lever up to raise the seat.

You can adjust the height of the seat moving the seat cushion adjustment let up or down.

■ Power Seat (If Equipped)

▼ Driver's seat (2-way lumbar support models)

5 4 3 2 1 102936

1 Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat cushion height.

2 Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.
3 Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
4 Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.
5 Lumbar support control switch To increase lower back support, push the front side of the switch. To decrease lower back support, push the rear side of the switch.

▼ Driver's seat (4-way lumbar support models)

5 4 3 2 1 102921

1 Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat cushion height.

2 Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.

3 Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.

4 Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

5 Lumbar support control switch To increase lower back support, push the front side of the switch. To decrease lower back support, push the rear side of the switch.

To adjust the lumbar support height, push the upper or lower side of the switch.

▼ Front passenger's seat (if equippe

4 3 2 1 102320

1 Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward.
2 Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the contro switch.
3 Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
4 Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

d) Thigh extension (driver's seat - if equipped)

CAUTION

When the thigh extension is pulled out to its fullest, do not put weigh the top of it. Doing so could break the part.

1 102491

The seat front length can be adjusted. Pull up the lever "1" to adjust the length and release the lever to lock it.

▼ Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function (if equipped)

WARNING

• To avoid loss of vehicle control personal injury, never perform the following operations while driving.
• Adjusting the seat
• Selecting a registered seat position
• Before adjusting the seat or selecting a registered seat position, make sure that cargo or the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
• The memory adjustment of the seat position is finished. Be sure to confirm that the select lever is in the "P" position, and the parking brake is applied, when adjusting the seat position. Do not drive until the utilizing of the seat position is complete.
• When any unusual conditions or malfunctions occur during the memory adjustment of the seat position, stop the memory ad-
  or

justment of the seat position by performing any of the following procedures.

• Operate any of the power seat switches.
• Press the "SET" button.
• Press button "1" or "2".
• Operate the outside mirror control switch.

Register the seat position with button "1" or each of the key fobs.

The following memory positions can be registered.

• Forward/backward position of the seat
  • Angle of the seatback
  9 Angle of the seat cushion
• Height of the seat
  • Angle of the outside mirrors
  Angle of the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side when the reverse tilt-down operates.

NOTE

The seat position can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P237.

▽ Registration of memory position with button "1" or "2"

1. Adjust the seat and outside mirror positions under the following conditions.

2. The parking brake is applied.

3. The ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
4. The select lever is in the "P" position.

or SET 1 2 102421

1. Register the adjusted positions by either of the following procedures.

2. Press the "SET" button, then press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

3. While pressing and holding the "SET" button, press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seat position and outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will be registered.

NOTE

If a new position is registered for the same button, the previously registered memory position is deleted.

▽ Registration of the reverse tilt-down mirror angle with button "1" or "2"

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the "R" position, then the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will move to the reverse tilt-down position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side. For details about the settings, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" P300.
3. Move the select lever to the "P" position, then the outside mirror angle will return to its original position.

4. Register the adjusted positions by either of the following procedures.

5. Press the "SET" button, then press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

6. While pressing and holding the "SET" button, press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seat position and outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will be registered.

NOTE

• The outside mirror angle will return to its original position approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position other than "R" position.
• The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the front passenger's side mirror. The setting of the driver's side mirror operation can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

▽ Registration of memory position with an access key fob (if equipped)

1. Adjust the memory position under the following conditions.

- The parking brake is applied.

• The ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
• The select lever is in the "P" position.

SET 102422

1. Hold the access key fob and press and hold the "SET" button. Then press the "a" button of the access key fob.

A chirp will sound once, and the memory position is registered.

fNOTE

When registering the seat position, carry the access key that you want to register with you. If you are carrying 2 or more access keys, registration may not be possible.

▽ Registration of the reverse tilt down mirror angle with the k fob

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the "R" position, then the outside mirror angle will move to the reverse tilt-down position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For details about the settings, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" or P300.
3. Move the select lever to the "P" position, then the outside mirror angle will return to its original position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF"/"LOCK" position.
5. Hold the access key fob and press an hold the "SET" button, then press the "3" button of the access key fob.
   A chirp will sound once, and the reverse tilt-down mirror angle will be registered.

NOTE

The outside mirror angle will return to its original position approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position of than "R" position.
- The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the first passenger's side mirror. The sett of the driver's side mirror operat can be changed by a SUBARU der. Contact your SUBARU dealer details.
- The system stores the adjusted mirror angle for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch turned to the "OFF" position. Refer the mirror angle while the memory function is available.

∇ Utilizing of memory position registered with button "1" or "2"

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button to retrieve your registered memory position. If the seat position is not optimum for you, it may adversely affect your driving and may reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt. That could result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

ther nt g on al- or 102423

is. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" gis- position.
- Put the select lever is in the "P" position and apply the parking brake. Then press button "1" or "2".

A chirp will sound and the seat and angle of the outside mirrors moves to the registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the "R" position, the outside mirror will move to the registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

- If the vehicle battery is removed, the registered memory position data will not be deleted.

• When the button "1" or "2" is pressed within 45 seconds after the driver's door is opened, the registered memory position can be retrieved even if the ignition switch in the "LOCK" or "OFF" position.
• If buttons "1" and "2" are pressed the same time, execution of seat position retrieval may not be possible.
• When the retrieved position is the same as the current seat position chirp will sound twice.

∇ Utilizing of the seat position registered with access key fob

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

Line drawing of a mobile phone control panel with navigation buttons and a star dial (no text or symbols)

1. Unlock the driver's door by pressing the "☐" button or gripping the door

handle.

the. Open the driver's door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the position, the outside mirror will move to registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

- If the registered seat position can be retrieved after performing the previous procedures, try the following procedures.

(1) Press the "SET" button on the driver's door.

(2) Press the "☐" button on the access key fob or touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors.

(3) Perform the prior procedures again.

- If the keyless access function is disabled, the seat position cannot be retrieved by gripping the driver's door handle. However, the seat position can still be retrieved by pressi the "?" button on the access key fob. For information about how to enable/disable the keyless access function, refer to "Disabling Keyless Access Function" P131.

- If a new position is registered for the same access key fob, the previously registered seat position is deleted.

the If you are carrying 2 or more access keys, seat position retrieval may not "R" be possible.

∇ Clearing the registered seat position with access key fob

1. Close the driver's door.

2. While holding the access key fob an pressing the "SET" button, press the

"button on the access key fob."

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat position will be cleared.

NOTE

After deleting the seat position, wait for a few moments before registering a new seat position.

■ Head Restraint Adjustment

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Also, never install the head restraints backwards.

- CONTINUED -

Doing so will prevent the head restraints from functioning as intended. Therefore, when the head restraints are removed, all head restraints must be reinstalled properly to protect vehic occupants.

• The vehicle should not be operated until the head restraints are installed in their proper positions.
• The front seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the front seats only. The rear seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the rear seats only. Do not attempt to install the front seat head restraints into the rear seats, or the rear seat head restraints into the front seats.

Both the driver's seat and front passenger's seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjustable in the following ways.

▼ Head restraint height adjustment

1 2 101915

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

thpo raise:

he Pull the head restraint up.

^d To lower:

Push the head restraint down while presing the release button on the top of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a dashed line indicating measurement or alignment (no text or symbols)

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.

NOTE

It is not possible to remove or install the head restraint without reclining the front seatback. Reclining the front seat-back and then remove or install the head restraint.

▼ Head restraint angle adjustment

Diagram of a mechanical component with curved arrows indicating motion, no text or symbols present

The angle of the head restraint can be adjusted in several steps. While maintaining a suitable driving posture, adjust the head restraint to a position where the bar of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the preferred position. A click will be audible when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward as it can go. The head restraint will automatically return to the fully upright position. Then, adjust the head restraint again to the preferred angle.

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equippe

The seat heater operates when the igni switch is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

• Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
• People with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the se heater for a long period of tim. When using the heater, always sure to warn the persons concerned.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
• When the seat is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat he

NOTE

- Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine

ed) running can cause battery discharge.

- When using for a long period of time on we recommend setting the heater to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for only quick heating at the start of the function usage

■ Front Seat Heater

Adjust the front seat heater function on the center information display. Refer to "Front Seat Heater" P319.

NOTE

afThe front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

■ Rear Seat Heater

CAUTION

the Do not open and close the center console lid while operating the rear seat heater switch. There is the risk of fingers being caught in the lid.

heater.

1 2 3 102424

Rear seat heater switches

1 Front passenger's side
2 Indicator lights
3 Driver's side

Press the rear seat heater switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.

graph TD
    A["HIGH"] --> B["LOW"]
    B --> C["OFF"]
    C --> A

HIGH:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting "HIGH" mode will cause the s to heat up quicker.

NOTE

Only the front seat heater switches retain the previous switch position even if the vehicle has restarted. T rear seat switch will reset.

4-3. Seat Ventilation (If Equipped)

The seat ventilation are equipped in the front seats.

^e The seat ventilation operate when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

• Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
• When cleaning the seat, do not use organic solvents, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
• If water or liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth immediately.

NOTE

• Use of the seat ventilation for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
• The seat ventilation function cannot be used simultaneously with the front seat heater.

- When using for a long period of time we recommend setting the seat ventilation to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for only quick cooling at the start of the function usage.

Adjust the seat ventilation function on the center information display. Refer to "Front Seat Ventilation" P320.

ime4. Rear Seats

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, wearing a seatbelt and tie (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. Do not place cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. By doing so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the ground next to a box, with a no-smoking symbol in the background (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback as it could tumble forward and inspire passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

■ Reclining the Seatback (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat using a seatbelt device, with no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo area cover, observe the following precautions.

• Make sure hands are not pinched between the headrest and the cargo area cover when rear seat is reclined.
• Move the front cover of the cargo area cover backward so that the cover is not damaged by the reclined seatback. Refer to "Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness - If Equipped)" P343.

of 102896

Adjust the seatback to the desired position while pulling the lever.

After adjusting the seatback, release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

■ Folding Down the Rear Seat-back

WARNING

• When folding down the seatback, check that there are no passengers or objects on the rear seat. Not doing so creates a risk of injury or property damage.
• Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area or trunk. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
• Secure all objects and especially long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden steering maneuver or acceleration.
• When you return the seatback to its original position, shake it slightly to confirm that it is securely in place. If it is not securely fixed in place, it may suddenly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, both could cause serious injury or death.

Diagram showing a mechanical component with a circular symbol and an arrow indicating rotation (no text or labels)

1 102477

1 Striker

WARNING

When the seatback is returned to original position, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. Failure to do may lead to serious injury or an accident because the proper seat-belt operation will be affected.

• The seatbelt should not be caught in the seatback and it should be fully visible.
• The seatbelt should not pass behind the striker for the seat-back.

CAUTION

For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, the rear seatback may fold down quickly due to the inte spring. Hold the seatback while p ing the release button to slow it down.

so▼ Folding down the rear seatback (Legacy)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a magnified inset showing a downward arrow (no text or symbols)

Release button

its

g 1 102426

1 Release lever (if equipped)

1. Lower the head restraints.

- CONTINUED -

1. Folding the seatback by performing either of the following procedures.

2. Push the release button.

3. Pull the release lever.

▼ Folding down the rear seatback (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat area, showing no text or symbols.

Release button

Diagram showing car interior panel with labeled ports and a magnified inset highlighting a device component.

Release lever

1. Lower the head restraints.

2. Folding the seatback by performing either of the following procedures.

3. Push the release button.

4. Pull the release lever.

▼ Return the rear seatback

Diagram showing a person's seatbelt being lifted by a hand, with arrows indicating force direction (no text or symbols)

WARNING

When returning the seatback to its original position, observe the following precaution.

Failure to do so may damage the seatbelt, and possibly result in a serious injury.

- Pull the seatbelt out towards the vehicle exterior so that it will not be caught between the seatback and the trim.

1

2

102459

Lock release button

1 Unlocked
2 Locked
A Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place and ensure that the unlocking marker on the lock release button is no longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to original position, check that the unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. Also, shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely in place. If seatback is not securely in place, seatback may suddenly fold down

the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, which could cause serious injury or death.

■ Head Restraint Adjustment

Both the rear window side seats and the rear center seat are equipped with head restraints.

WARNING

• Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Therefore, when you remove the head restraints, you must reinstall all head restraints to protect vehicle occupants.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in the proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in event of a crash.

The front seat head restraints are the designed to be installed into the in

front seats only. The rear seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the rear seats only. Do not attempt to install the front seat head restraints into the rear seats, or the rear seat head restraints into the front seats.

▼ Rear window side seating position

1 2 102899

1 Head restraint
2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes are located on the top of the seatback the head restraint locks.

The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears. When the seats are not occupied, lower the head restraints to improve rearward visibility.

Diagram showing a car seatbelt mechanism with labeled parts and an inset view of the seatbelt component.

NOTE

For Legacy, it is not possible to remove or install the head restraint without folding down the rear seatback. Fold down the rear seatback and then re-

move or install the head restraint.

Rear center seating position

at until 1 2 101588

1 When not used (retracted position) 2 When used (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended be used in the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position.

1 2 102901

1 Head restraint 2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks.

When the rear center seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.

Armrest

Line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly with a black arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols)

To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest's top edge.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury and vehicle damage, passengers must never sit on the center armrest.

1-5. Seatbelts

Seatbelt Safety Tips

WARNING

• All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
• All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
• Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use single belt for two or more persons – even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

• Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

• Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt whichever is appropriate for the child's height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint systems in the REAR seats at all times.
  NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
  According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating

- CONTINUED -

positions than in the front seat positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" P61.

This vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record whether the seatbelt is in use by the front passenger when an SRS frontal, side or curtain airbag deploys.

▼ Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suitable for this vehicle. Refer to "Child Restraint Systems" P61.

▼ Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt cross the face or neck, move the child closer the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the chi waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child's back.

▼ Expectant mothers

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, holding an earbell (no text or symbols present)

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

The driver's seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

■ Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

Each passenger's seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ELR has an additional locking mode, "Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode", intended to secure a child restraint system.

The ALR mode functions as follows.

When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled and the ELR mode is restored.

When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

For instructions on how to install the child restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to "Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt" P66.

When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor is restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

■ Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime

Refer to "Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime" P183.

■ Fastening the Seatbelt

WARNING

• Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
• Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
• Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

- Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

▼ Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver's seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger's seat: Adjust the seat-back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twist

3. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.

4. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the belt retract slightly after giving strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

e m t- eat 100102

ted. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

et a 100103

1. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.
2. Place the lap belt as low as possible the hips, not on the waist.

Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

Diagram showing a car interior with a car seatbelt and a close-up of a person inside the seatbelt (no text or symbols)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

To raise:

Push and hold the upper part of the anchor and slide the anchor up.

To lower:

Push and hold the upper part of the anchor and slide the anchor down.

Pull down the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. on

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck ma result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Illustration of a hand holding a small object with a numbered arrow and number 102492, no text or symbols present.

1 Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

▼ Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt on Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twist
3. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
4. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the belt retract slightly after giving strong pull on it, then pull it out s again.

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt, showing hands and a belt (no text or symbols)

The Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

ed. let 100103

slowlyTo tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.

1. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Line drawing of a hand holding a small object, with no visible text or symbols

1 Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

▼ Rear center seatbelt on Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1 2 3 4 102436

1 Center seatbelt tongue plate
2 Anchor tongue plate
it 3 Anchor buckle
4 Center seatbelt buckle

the 101735

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-bing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the anchor tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat, wearing a seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the anchor tongue plate

not fastened to the anchor buckle the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

Diagram of a car seatbelt switch with a magnified inset showing the internal component (no text or symbols present)

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling.

1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate from the slot in the recess by pulling the anchor tongue plate.

on in 102438

1. Pass the seatbelt through the belt guide.

Diagram showing hand operating a device with two labeled buttons and directional arrows indicating action

1. Make sure that the ▼ mark on the anchor tongue plate and the ▲ mark on the buckle face outwards.

Illustration of hands using a device to adjust a component, showing a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

1. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click sounds.
2. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
3. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, give it a strong pull and let it retract slightly, then pull it out slowly again.

Line drawing of a person wearing a seatbelt and adjusting the seat (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle until it clicks.
   

Illustration of a person adjusting a belt buckle, showing a hand and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

1. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the

waist.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure on a patient's neck with a catheter and arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1 Button
1. Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted into a seatbelt, showing the grip and seat (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert a tongue plate or other hard pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in. The anchor tongue plate will then disconnect from the buckle.
   

Line drawing of a mechanical component with internal structure and label 102493 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while rolling up. Neatly store the tongue p in the recess and then insert the anchor tongue plate into the slot.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical buckle assembly (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the tongue plate can hi against the trim, causing damage the trim.

• Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly.
• Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neatly stored.

Seatbelt Maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tear damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.

CAUTION

• Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid.
• Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating properly.

1-6. Seatbelt Extender

and self the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the tongue plate to engage with the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt extender is available from your SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only order one particularly designed for your vehicle. See your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with a belt buckle (no text or symbols)

The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and it can be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.

For the safety of others, the extender should be removed after each use, especially if the next person using the seatbelt does not need one.

WARNING

Be sure to observe the following when using the seatbelt extender.

Failure to follow these instructions and warnings could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and result in more serious injury or deal in the event of a collision.

• Never use the seatbelt extender with a child restraint system, as may not securely hold the restraint system in place during an accident, significantly increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
• Never use the extender when the belt itself is long enough to permit it to be buckled properly. If removal of heavy clothing is that is needed to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly, remove the heavy clothing and do not use the extender.
• Never leave the seatbelt extender's tongue plate engaged with the seatbelt buckle when not in use. Doing so may prevent the airbag system from functioning properly.
• Never connect the seatbelt exten- der to the passenger seatbelt

buckle when the passenger seat is empty; doing so may prevents the airbag system from functioning properly.

• Do not use the extender if the buckle of the extender rests over the abdomen.
• Do not let someone else use the extender. Use of an extender when it is not needed could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and result in more serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

- Use the extender only for the front seatbelts and only for the model for which it was originally provided. Never use the extender for the rear seatbelts or for a different model.

• Before you fasten a seatbelt extender, make sure that the seatbelt extender is not twisted. A twisted seatbelt extender can increase the risk of a severe injury in an accident.
• Do not use more than one seatbelt extender at a time. Doing so could decrease the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in an

accident.

- Do not use a seatbelt extender that has been used in an accident or damaged.

Line drawing of a hand holding a seatbelt with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

102946

WARNING

- Make sure that the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light is on when you use a seatbelt extender in the front passenger's seat. The front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator must also be off. If it is on, the front passenger's SRS airbag will not deploy in a collision, which could result in death or serious injury. Refer to "Front

Passenger's Frontal Airbag ON and OFF Indicator Lights" P187.

- The following conditions may cause the SRS frontal airbag system to detect that the driver and front passenger are wearing seatbelts, which prevents the SRS frontal airbag system from operating correctly.

• The tongue plates of the driver and front passenger seatbelt extenders are inserted into the seatbelt buckles, but the respective extenders and seatbelts are not connected.
• Leaving the tongue plate of the extender inserted into the seatbelt buckle when not in use.

These conditions may prevent the seatbelt warning light and warning alarm from operating correctly. They may also prevent the SRS frontal airbags from operating correctly in a collision, which can result in injury or death. When you use a seatbelt extender, always attach it to the seatbelt buckle and seatbelt tongue plate correctly.

PRESS 102964

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt buckle so that the "PRESS" marks on the buckle-release buttons of the extender and the seatbelt are both facing the same direction, as shown in the illustration. You will hear a click when the tongue plate locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-release button on the extender, not on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

1-7. Seatbelt Pretensioners

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner.

• Driver's seatbelt
• Front passenger's seatbelt
• Rear passenger's seatbelt (window-side)

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal and side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

• To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to "Seatbelts" P47.
• Do not modify, remove or strike the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of

seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult your SUBARU dealer.

- When discarding seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

• Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor impact or in rear impacts.
• Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In event that a pretensioner is activated, the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt preterm sioners should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

• If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

• If the seatbelt retractor assembly surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

• When you sell your vehicle, we up you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with seatbelt pretensioners. Also, notify the buy of the contents in this section.

■ Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner

NOTE

This section is applicable to the following components.
- Front passenger's seatbelt the Rear passenger's seatbelt (window- side)

y al- er 100121

prThe pretensioner sensor also serves as follows.
al● Front impact sensor

• Side impact sensor
  geFront door impact sensor
• Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or side collisions or rollover accidents, any seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The rear passenger's seatbelt (window-side) pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision.

The front passenger's seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision. The adaptive force limiter will select a reducing load to suit the body size of the occupant as detected by the occupant detection system sensors.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

■ Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt Pretensioners NOTE

This section is applicable to the following components.

- Driver's seatbelt

1 2 101572

1 Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder belt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter)
2 Lap belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner, which located at the base of the center pillar. The shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap be pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of frontal collision force is detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively.

The driver's seatbelt pretensioner include a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on occupant in the event of a collision.

The adaptive force limiter will select a reducing load to suit the body size of occupant as detected by the occupant detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

■ System Monitors

As diagnostic system continually monitors like the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. For details, refer to "SRS Airbag System Monitors" -P111.

■ System Servicing

WARNING

• When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
• Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors a control modules, refer to "Components" OF P88.

If you need service or repair in the areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle damaged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

■ Precautions against Vehicle Modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followi modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners.

and• Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

• Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
• Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle e placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.

1-8. Rear Seat Reminder

This function prompts the driver to confirm the presence of passengers and cargo in the rear.

This function will be activated when the rear doors are opened and closed.

It alerts the driver by warning messages on the combination meter display (color LCD) and beeps when the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "OFF" position.

Reminder, Look In Rear Seat 102605

NOTE

• This function does not directly detect passengers and cargo in the rear seat.
• This function detects the opening and closing of the rear doors. In this

situation, there is the possibility that the following phenomenon may occur.

• It may alert the driver even if are no passengers or cargo in rear seat.

• It may not alert the driver even there are passengers and cargo in the rear seat.

• This function can be set to on or by the "Car settings". For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6 inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

• The ON/OFF setting will not be changed even if the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• The ON/OFF setting will be returned to the default setting if the battery removed.

h4t9. Child Restraint Systems

■ Safety Precautions there

the if off - 101656

Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child's age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those described in "Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower

and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)" P72).

Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraint systems are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children I restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

A 1 2 102459

Lock release button
1 Unlocked
2 Locked
A Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

• Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
• Do not leave children in the car unattended. High interior temperatures may cause heat stroke and dehydration that result in serious injury or death.

Illustration of a child and an adult sitting in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Illustration of two children interacting with a bicycle, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child his or her lap or in his or her arm while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child (or infant) from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

children should be properly re- strained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

■ Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems

WARNING

• Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.
• Do not use a seatbelt extender. If a seatbelt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seatbelt will not securely hold the child restraint system. Use of a seatbelt extender could cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.
• Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

- Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not tight and secure, the danger of a child suffering personal injury in event of an accident may be increased.

■ Where to Place a Child Restraint System

The following descriptions are SUBARU's recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

WARNING

Several types of child restraint systems may conceal the buckle of the neighboring seat. If the occupant of the neighboring seat cannot correctly fasten the seat belt, that person must move to a different seat. If the seatbelt can not be correctly fastened, there is the risk of serious injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

held your the If the child restraint system can- not be correctly installed because it contacts the driver's seat, move the child restraint system to a different seat. If it cannot be installed in a different seat (other than the driver's seat), adjust the front seat so that contact does not occur.

B C B A 100127

A: Front passenger's seat

You should not install a child restraint system (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passenger's airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions

Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.

● Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seatbelts
- Lower anchorages (bars)
• Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating positio (U.S.-spec. models)

In this position, the following equipment provided for installing a child restraint system.

• ALR/ELR seatbelts
• Lower anchorages (bars)
• Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

The rear center seat includes lower anchorages, and the lower anchorages on the center side of the rear right seat can be used to install a child restraint system. When a child restraint system is installed in the rear center seat using the lower

anchorages, do not sit in the rear right seat.

If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child restraint system should be moved to a window seat position of the rear seat.

C: Rear seat, center seating position (other models)

isn this position, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.

• ALR/ELR seatbelts
• Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

When you install a child restraint system in the rear seat's center seating position, raise the center head restraint.

Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side seating positions may be used for a seat in the center seating position if a child restraint system manufacturer's instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as far apart as those in this vehicle. If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you should install the child restraint system in rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

- Even with advanced airbags, children can be seriously injured by the airbag. Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploy with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are no restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint systems in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint system which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. According to accident statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

• Do not use lower anchorages (bars) for a seat in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced as far apart as those in this vehicle.
• Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

Illustration of a car interior showing a person seated in a vehicle gear (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- SINCE THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-

GER'S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

• Do not allow children to lean their heads or any other parts of their bodies against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags deploy even if children are seated in the child restraint system, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
• To secure the child restraint system, be sure to comply with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Not doing so could result in death or serious injury to children in a sudden stop or accident.

■ Choosing a Child Restraint System

Line drawings of three different car seats (no text or symbols)

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the child's age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system, the manufacturer's statement of compliance in the document attached to the system. Also it is important for you to measure that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

NOTE

Some sizes of child restraint systems may not fit the vehicle seat. Before purchasing a child restraint system, check whether it fits on the vehicle

■ Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-belt

CAUTION

• When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.
• When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, set both seatbacks to the original position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained, which may result in death or serious injuries in the event of sudden stop, sudden steering maneuver

or an accident.

▼ Installing a rearward facing child restraint system seat.

WARNING

• NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

• Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

• Place the child restraint system in the 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle rear seating position. until you hear a click.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system in the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to "Where to Place a Child Restraint System" P63.

100503

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to lift a car seatbelt, showing mechanical components and motion direction (no text or symbols)

1. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
2. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode recommended by the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the child restraint system, perform the following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Medical illustration showing a shoulder joint with arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols present)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. It should not be possible to move the child restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seatbelt path.
2. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, showing the seatbelt being inserted (no text or symbols present)

1. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seat-belt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

▼ Installing a forward facing child restraint system

WARNING

- NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

- Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a central upward arrow and two base supports (no text or symbols)

1. If the child restraint system makes contact with the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed, raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint system still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head Restraint Adjustment" P45.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness). Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop

or a sharp turn.

1. For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness models, adjust the seat-back to the upright position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system on the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to "Where to Place a Child Restraint System" P63.

101933

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

- When a child restraint system is installed in the rear center seating position of an Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, pass the rear center seatbelt through the belt guide properly. For details, refer to "Rear center seatbelt on Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness" P52.

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with hand insertion and belt shift (no text or symbols)

1. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

2. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) to the Automatic Locking Refractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. It should not be possible to move the child restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seatbelt path.

2. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Line drawing of a car interior with steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Legacy 101533

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top Tether Anchorages" P77.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with an inset showing the insertion of a seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seat-belt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

Remember that the head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position (retracted position). Therefore, when the rear center seat is occupied (including when a child restraint system is installed) next time, be sure to raise the head restraint to the extended position.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

■ Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, no text or symbols present

Booster seat

Line drawing of a child sitting in a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Booster cushion

WARNING

Before installing a booster seat/cushion, be sure to confirm that seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could res

1. Adjust the head restraint as follows.

For booster seat:

Diagram of a mechanical component with a black arrow indicating upward motion, no text or symbols present

Raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the booster seat still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head Restraint Adjustment" P45.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness). Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

For booster cushion:

Raise the head restraint to the extended position. Do not remove the head restraint.

1. For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness models, adjust the seat-back to the upright position.

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat with a close-up inset showing the seat being lifted (no text or symbols present)

1. Place the booster seat/cushion in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat/cushion.

2. If there is a gap between the booster seat/cushion and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.

-5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat/cushion and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. For booster seat/cushion with a belt guide,

- CONTINUED -

use the seatbelt through the belt guide. 6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child's hips.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seatbelt with a close-up inset showing the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. To remove the booster seat/cushion, press the release button on the seat-belt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

- Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.

- Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child's back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the rise or severity of injury to the child

• The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
• Place the lap belt as low as possible on the child's hips. A high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious injury or death.
• Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

■ Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)

d.▼ Lower and tether anchorages

Diagram illustrating car seat assembly steps with magnified views of internal components and a numbered label '102488'

Legacy

101534

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

WARNING

• Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause death of serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.
• When installing a child restraint system using LATCH anchors with the rear seatbelt fastened, ensure that the rear seatbelt does

not become caught in the child restraint system or the lower LATCH anchorages.

NOTE

The seatbelt warning system of the r seats detects if any of the seats are occupied by a passenger. Installing a child restraint system in the rear sea ing area, using the LATCH anchors, may result in the activation of the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt pr to installing the child restraint system will avoid activating the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. For details, refer to "Rear passenger's seats" P185.

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the dedicated anchorages provided on the vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

rear

Anchor, Tether. LATCH The next generation of child safety.

101210

Four vehicle is equipped with five lower anchorages (bars) (U.S.-spec. models) four lower anchorages (bars) (other mod rels) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorages) for accommodating such child restraint systems.

▼ Lower anchorages

Line drawing of a car backrest with four vertical slots and black arrows indicating fasteners or buttons (no text or symbols)

U.S.-spec. models

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

There are a total of 5 lower anchorages the rear seat. The second lower anchorage from the right side is used for both right seat and center seat. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

Line drawing of a car backrest with seatbelt clips and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Other models

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

Two lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system in the rear seat window-side seating positions. Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side seating positions may be used for a seat the center seating position if a child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors as far apart as those in this vehicle. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

▽ Tether anchorages

Diagram of car rear seatbelt system with labeled components including seatbelt, seatbelt switch, and internal compartment view

inTOP TETHER

102905

Legacy

as 1 For right seat
2 For center seat
seat3 For left seat

1 2 3 102906

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1 For left seat
2 For center seat
3 For right seat

The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration. For details,

refer to "Top Tether Anchorages" P77

To install a child restraint system using lower and tether anchorages

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely locked into place.

- Check that the red colored unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. For details, refer to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback" P42.

m 102907

For U.S.-spec. models

102908

Other models

1. You will find ⚙” marks at the bottoms of the rear seatback. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).

- CONTINUED -

Each lower anchorage is located behind the cover of seatback bottom.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not he tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with directional arrow and magnified detail view labeled 102447

Peel off the anchorage cover completely from the selected side of the rear seatback to expose the anchorages (bars) to be used for installation of the child restraint

system.

If it is hard to install the child restraint system because the anchorage cover returns to the original position, press the anchorage cover to the seat cushion until is flat.

Diagram of a mechanical component with an upward arrow and base, no text or symbols present

1. If the child restraint system makes contact with the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed, raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint system still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head Restraint Adjustment" P45.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness). Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with a magnified inset showing the detail (no text or symbols)

1. For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness models, adjust the seat-back to the upright position.
2. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at

"⑤ marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a hand insertion step, showing no text or symbols

1. If your child restraint system is a flexible attachment type (which uses tether belts), push the child restraint system into the seat cushion and pull both left and right lower tether belts to secure the child restraint system by taking up the slack in the belt.
2. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located on the rear shelf (Legacy)/behind the rear seat (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top Tether Anchorages" P77.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion. It should not be possible to move the child restraint system up more than 1 in (2.5 cm).
2. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installation.

SUBARU recommends that you check with a certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For more information, and to locate the closest inspection location in the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, check with Transport Canada.

■ Top Tether Anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceeds as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or available.

▼ Tether anchorage location

Legacy

1 2 3 TOP TETHER 102905

1 For right seat
2 For center seat
3 For left seat

Three tether anchorages are installed on the rear shelf behind the rear seat head restraint. Open the cover flap to use each anchorage.

▼ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1 2 3 102906

1 For left seat
2 For center seat
3 For right seat

Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, center and left positions, are already installed on the back side of the rear seatback.

▼ To hook the top tether

CAUTION

• Always raise the head restraint when mounting a child restraint system with a top tether. Failure to do so may prevent the top tether from being fastened tightly.
• If the head restraint is removed, store the head restraint in the trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).
• Do not place the head restraint the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or sharp turn.

Legacy

1 2 102909

1 When installing in the window-side seating position
2 When installing in the rear center seating position

1. Raise the head restraint at the seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed with the seatbelt or lower anchorages.

Diagram of a car interior showing a door handle and vent, with no text or symbols present.

1. Open the cover flaps to use the anchorages.
2. Pass the top tether between the heat restraint and seatback.

Line drawing of a car interior with handle and seat, showing structural components (no text or symbols)

1. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate

- CONTINUED -

upper anchorage.

1. Tighten the top tether securely.

SUBARU recommends that you check with a certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For more information, and to locate the clos inspection location in the U.S., refer to National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, check with Transport Canada.

∇ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1 2 102910

1 When installing in the window-side seating position
2 When installing in the rear center seating position

1. Raise the head restraint at the seatingration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, position where the child restraint system is to be installed with the seatbelt or lower anchorages.
2. Adjust the seatback to the upright position.
3. Pass the top tether between the head restraint and seatback.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with a hook and mounting bracket, showing no text or symbols.

1. Attach the top tether hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
2. Tighten the top tether securely.

SUBARU recommends that you check with a certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For more information, and to locate the closest inspection location in the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

1-10. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle's seatbelts.

This vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system which consists of eight airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

• Driver's and front passenger's frontal airbags
• Driver's and front passenger's side airbags
• Front passenger's seat cushion airbags
• Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers)
• Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt Pretensioners" P57.

■ General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System

WARNING

- To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. Used in combination with the seatbelts, the SRS airbag offers vehicle occupants the best possible protection in the event of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P47.

- The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags are designed only to be a supplement to the prima protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also

important to wear a seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car steering wheel, with a belt and directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

WARNING

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in the proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injury. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control, and the front

- CONTINUED -

passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a bandage, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- Do not sit or lean close to either front door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.

- Since this vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or lean close to the front or rear door on either side. Do not put body parts out of the window. The SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact, rollover or an offset frontal collision. However, the force of its deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.

- Do not sit or lean close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear seatbelts to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant who is not seated in the proper position. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor

injuries, such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms, because of the SRS airbag deployment force.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and visor, seated in a car (no text or symbols)

SRS

WARNING

- Keep arms away from either door or its internal trim. Vehicle occupants could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment. - Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

CAUTION

• When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
• A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

• When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with SRS airbags. Also, notify the buyer of the applicable section in this Owner's Manual.
• If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to "If Your Vehicle is

Involved in an Accident" P506.

■ General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System for Accessories and Any Objects

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

ge e the 102210

WARNING

• Do not put any objects (including straps or cords) over the steering wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard.
• These objects could be entangled with the steering wheel, preventing the SRS frontal airbag, etc. from operating properly.
• If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
• Do not put any objects under the driver's side of the instrument panel. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
• The key must not be attached to heavy, sharp or hard accessories, or another key. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

Diagram showing a car interior with a vehicle, steering wheel, and a person silhouette (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the windshield or fit an extra-wide mirror over the inside rear view mirror the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.

Line drawing of a car interior seat with a cylindrical device on the side (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side if airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle's occupants and cause injuries.
• Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a repillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

Line drawing of a hanger with handle and frame, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat book. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deployment of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by preventing deployment of the cur-

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Do not put any kind of clothes or other objects over the driver's seat and front passenger's seat-back and do not attach labels or stickers to the driver's seat and front passenger's seat surface on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing

protection available to the occupant of the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

- Do not install a seat cover unless it is a genuine SUBARU seat cover exclusively designed for use with the SRS airbag. Even when using a genuine SUBARU seat cover, the SRS side airbag system may not function normally if the seat cover is not installed correctly.

■ General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System and Children

Illustration of two children sitting in a car seat, one using a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

100082

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if there are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) are in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint systems (including forward facing child restraint systems) in the REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys-

- CONTINUED -

tem, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" P61.

Illustration of a person lying in a car seat with gear, no text or symbols present

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Illustration of two children interacting near a vehicle, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger's seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Illustration of a child and an adult sitting in a car seat, viewed from behind (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat, holding a pull-up device (no text or symbols present)

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and carrying a large bag, standing beside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Never allow a child to do the following.

- Kneel on any passenger's seat

facing the side window.

• Wrap his/her arms around the front seat seatback.
• Put his/her head, arms or other parts of the body out of the window.

In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag.

- Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, children should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.

■ Components

1 2 3 4 5 6 3 102474

1 Driver's SRS frontal airbag
2 Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag
3 SRS side airbag

4 SRS curtain airbag
5 SRS seat cushion airbag
6 SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

Driver's SRS frontal airbag: in the center portion of the steering wheel An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located on the pad of the airbag.

Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag: near the top of the dashboard An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located on the right corner of the dashboard.

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each front seat cushion which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat) "SRS AIRBAG" marks are located at the top of each center pillar.

SRS seat cushion airbag: in the center console side of the front passenger's seat cushion that bears an "SRS AIRBAG" label

SRS knee airbag: under the steering column

An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the door of the airbag.

16 8266 15 23 27 2 21 2018 1 4 30 14 11 22 29 13 10 17 19 12 9 19 28 19 25 247 3 5 102478

1 Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)

2 Frontal airbag module (driver's side)

3 Frontal airbag module (front passenger's side)

4 Front impact sensor (left-hand side)

5 Front impact sensor (right-hand side)

6 Side airbag module (driver's side)

7 Side airbag module (front passenger's side)

8 Side impact sensor (center pillar left-hand side)

9 Side impact sensor (center pillar right-hand side)

10 Airbag wiring

11 Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (driver's side)

12 Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (front passenger's side)

13 Side impact sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side)

14 Side impact sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side)

15 Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16 Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17 Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger side)

18 Knee airbag module (driver's side)

19 Front passenger's occupant detection system sensor

20 Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights

21 SRS airbag system warning light

22 Side impact sensor (under the rear center seat)

23 Side impact sensor (front door left-hand side)

24 Side impact sensor (front door right-hand side)

25 Seat cushion airbag module (front passenger's side)

26 Lap belt pretensioner (driver's side)

27 Driver's seat position sensor

28 Passenger's seat position sensor

29 Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger's side)

30 Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver's side)

- CONTINUED -

SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver's SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well whether or not to activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

WARNING EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS • Unknown can be what or something required by the air bag • The back end to the outlet place for children • Few put a moving child end in the front • Always use bed seats and seat margins • See owner's manual for more information about air bags AVERTISSEMENT MÈME AVEC DES COURBNS COMPLIÉES INTELIENTS • Use others cannot die back so limiting them or complete • Use temporary births and I went in place for some items. • Use parents inside a road or bridge outside the car. • They allow their conditions do not affect at times dispense on remote your orders • Use a manual for appropriate your life plan amplique management as suit the necessary profile. 102286

This vehicle has warning labels on the driver's and front passenger's sun visors beginning with the phrase "EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS" and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase "Even with Advanced Air Bags". Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBAR advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system.

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU SRS curtain airbag system that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer to "Components" P88.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy.

• SRS frontal airbag for driver
- SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
- SRS seat cushion airbag for front passenger
- SRS curtain airbag*1
• SRS knee airbag for driver

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-pelts by reducing the impact to the occupant's head, chest and knees.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's chest and waist.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's

head.

NOTE

The SRS side airbag and seatbelt p tensioner are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys tem.

▼ Driver's SRS frontal airbag

The driver's SRS frontal airbag uses a stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

102451

SRS airbag system warning light

Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

▼ Front passenger's SRS frontal air-bag

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

dual 1 102171

1 Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even when the driver's SRS front airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passenger's seatbelt pretensioner operates with the driver's seatbelt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt Pretensioners" P57.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

• Do not apply any strong impact the front passenger's seat such as by kicking.
• Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front sea back and seat cushion.
• Do not spill liquid on the front passenger's seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately.
• Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger's seat.
• Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger's

seat.

• Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger's seat.
• Do not place any objects (books, etc.) around the front passenger's seat.
• Do not use the front passenger's seat with the head restraint removed.
• Do not leave any articles on the front passenger's seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.
• Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery.
• Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
• Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Manual Seat" P31 (models equipped with manual seats only).

102451

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger's occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passenger's seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger's SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

▼ Passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307091

Dual 7.0-inch display models

ON 📁 Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

OFF Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

PASSenger AIR BAG OFF ON 307090

11.6-inch display models
ON: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

Refer to "Front Passenger's Frontal Airba ON and OFF Indicator Lights" P187.

▼ Occupant detection system

Line drawing of a car seat with a triangular load diagram and labeled seat number 102171 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1 Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat gails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS seat cushion airbag should be deployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger se or subject it to severe impact. Oth wise, the SRS airbag system warning light may illuminate to indicate malfunction of the front passenger

occupant detection system. In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell phones, laptops, portable music players, or electronic games, especially when connected to the accessory power outlet and placed on the front passenger's seat or used by the person sitting in the front passenger's seat, may affect the operation of the occupant detection system. If either of the following situations occurs when using an electronic device in the vehicle, at first try to relocate that device to avoid its creating any interference.

• The SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.
• The front passenger's frontal air-bag ON and OFF indicator lights operate erratically.

If the device continues to cause interference, the use of that device in the vehicle should be discontinued.

102451

SRS airbag system warning light

If the front passenger's seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability the system to determine deployment. Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the se dry naturally and then check the SRS airbag system warning light.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307091

Dual 7.0-inch display models

ON 🎨️ Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

PASSSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307090

11.6-inch display models

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

If the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights do not work properly even when the front passenger's seat is dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger's seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307091

Dual 7.0-inch display models

ON 📁: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

OFF: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

PASSenger AIR BAG OFF ON 307090

11.6-inch display models

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger's seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly.

When the OFF indicator light turns off and the ON indicator light illuminates, the front passenger's frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passenger's seat.

▼ Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is not activated

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger's seat:

• The seat is empty.
• The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an infant or a child is restrained in it. WARNING that follows.)
• The front passenger's occupant detection system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SRS FRON-TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passenger's seat may be killed or severely

- CONTINUED -

injured should the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may increase the load on the front passenger's seat, activating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by an infant.

• Do not place any article on the seat other than the infant in the child restraint system.
• Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system.
• Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seat-back.
• Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.
• Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback.

If the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light illuminates and the OFF indicator light turns off even when an infant or small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 2 2 307091

Dual 7.0-inch display models

ON 🚗 Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

OFF Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

a PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307090

11.6-inch display models

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint manufacturer's recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in "Child Restraint Systems" P61, correctly install the child restraint system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and make sure that the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light turns off and the OFF indicator

light illuminates.

If still the ON indicator light remains illuminated while the OFF indicator light turns off, take the following actions.

• Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
• Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
• Ensure that there is no article left in seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator light still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator light turns off after taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the chi restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passenger's seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupant's seating posture. Children should always weargar's seat.

seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre. When the seat is occupied by an adult. spective of whether the airbag is dead. When certain items (e.g. jug of water) tivated or activated. If the front passen are placed on the seat. ger's SRS frontal airbag is activated

(the ON indicator light remains illuminated while the OFF indicator light turns off), take the following actions. When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may lessen the load on the front passenger's seat, deactivating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult. This may result in a personal injury.
light turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on
• Do not squeeze any article between the front passenger's seat and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. This may lift the seat cushion. • Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the

Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

▼ Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passen-

If the passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light illuminates and the ON indicator light turns off even when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an a

g ns n- adult PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307090

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307091

Dual 7.0-inch display models

ON 📁: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

OFF: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

11.6-inch display models

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger's seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

If the OFF indicator light remains illuminated while the ON indicator light remains off, take the following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion, seat cover, extra seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger's seat, or should sit in a rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicator lights turn off for 2 seconds.
   Now, the ON indicator light should illuminate while the OFF indicator light remains off.

upf the OFF indicator light still remains illuminated while the ON indicator light remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

▼ Operation

A 1 2

B

102643

A Driver's side
B Passenger's side
1 SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2 After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver's vision is not obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag and system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag depending on the characteristic of item(s) or person on the front passenger's seat monitored by the front passenger's occu-pant detection sensors. For this reason, only the driver's SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver's module or both driver's and front passenger's modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

• The front impact sensors
- The impact sensors in the airbag control module

On the driver's side, the SRS knee airb also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag

The driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the driver's SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag.

▼ After deployment

After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the drive vision is not obstructed and the driver's ability to maintain control of the vehicle not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver's and front passenger's seat pretensioners operate at the same time. When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden fairly loud inflation noise will be heard a some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

▼ Example of the type of accident

The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are de- Signed as follows.

• To deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision
• To function on a one-time-only basis
  The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are not designed as follows.
• To deploy in most lesser frontal impacts ^*1

To deploy in most side or rear impacts and or in most rollover accidents*

*1: Because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.
2: Because deployment of only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags would not protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of accident in which driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy

Line drawing of a car approaching a surface with a broken edge, showing impact or damage (no text or symbols)

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or bo driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

the ▽ Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

Two cartoon illustrations showing a car collision with an explosion, one emitting a flame and the other falling off (no text or symbols)

Only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as, when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

1

4

Two cars with arrows indicating collision or movement, no text or symbols present

2

Diagram of a car being struck by a truck, showing impact and motion direction (no text or symbols)

5

Top-down line drawing of a car accident scene with two cars and a broken trunk (no text or symbols)

3

101418

1 The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole.
2 The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.
3 The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.
4 The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.
5 The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) are not designed to deploy in most cases. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof SRS seat cushion airbag operation

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision and damage, showing top-down collision of a car with impact indicated by arrows.

The driver's and front passenger's SRS

- If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed frontal collision

1 2 1 4 101395

1 First impact
2 Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the driver's and/or front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession,

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and wheel assembly (no text or symbols)

1 Passenger's side

WARNING

The SRS seat cushion airbag is designed not to deploy when the seatbelt for the corresponding seat is not fastened. For safety, all persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts.

The SRS seat cushion airbags are designed to deploy simultaneously when the SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details

- CONTINUED -

about the operating conditions, refer to "SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Seat Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag" P90.

The front passenger's SRS seat cushion airbag is designed not to deploy in either the following conditions.

• The front passenger's seatbelt is not fastened (even when the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light illuminates while the OFF indicator light remains off).
• The front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light is off while the OFF indicator light illuminates.

NOTE

When the front passenger's SRS from airbag is deactivated by the occupant detection system, the front passenger's SRS seat cushion airbag is also deactivated.

■ SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag

Illustration of a person driving a car with steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

▼ SRS side airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the d side of each front seat seatback, which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark.

sin a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door pan and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates on for front seat occupants.

▼ SRS curtain airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's head and chest.

▼ Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The following airbags deploy indepen-

dently of each other since each has its impact sensor.

• Driver's SRS side airbag
• Front passenger's SRS side airbag
• SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
• SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the driver's and front passenger SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel.

For the locations of the sensors and control modules, refer to "Components" P88.

▼ After deployment

After the deployment, the SRS side airb immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the dep ment. This smoke does not indicate a in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hand right after deployment. Doing so cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result deployment.

After deployment, do not touch a part of the SRS curtain airbag stem (from the front pillar to the of the roof side over the rear s. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot result of deployment.

▼ Example of the type of accident The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed as follows:

- To deploy in the event of an accident is involving a moderate to severe side is impact collision

- To function on a one-time-only basis The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in the following cases:

fire In most lesser side impact

- In most frontal or most rear impacts (because the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag deployment would not protect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state.

my SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag vs-deployment depend on the level of force packperienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That se level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy

1

Top-down line drawing of a car collision with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

101369

1 A severe side impact near the front seat.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy

1

Top-down line drawing of a car with two cars and a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

2

Two cartoon-style car heads with expressive faces, one standing and one lying on the ground (no text or symbols)

3

Line drawing of a car with a crack and impact on the ground (no text or symbols)

4

Simple line drawing of a car with a warning sign above it (no text or symbols present)

101789

1 The vehicle is involved in a severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3 The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or the skidding vehicle's tires hit a curbstone laterally.
4 An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy

1 2 3 102055

1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy

Simple line drawing of two cars with a broken trunk and impact lines (no text or symbols)

Top-down line drawing of two cars with cracks and a traffic sign, no text or symbols present

4

Simple line drawing of a car with a collision or explosion symbol (no text or labels)

Two vehicle head diagrams showing front and side views with no text or symbols

1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.
2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity the passenger compartment.
3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.
5 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the ro

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side and airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side and airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy

Simple line drawing of a car collision with visible cracks and impact (no text or symbols)

2

Line drawing of two cars in a collision, showing impact with no text or symbols

Simple line drawing of a car with a lightning bolt striking the side (no text or symbols)

4

Line drawing of a person riding a motorcyclist beside a car, with no text or symbols present.

101480

1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.
2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.
3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases

1 2 3 102056

1 The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2 The vehicle is struck from behind.
3 The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases.

2 1 A B 101410

1 First impact
2 Second impact
A SRS curtain airbag
B SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag depots only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

■ SRS Airbag System Monitors

102451

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including seatbelt pretensioners) with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

The following components are monitored by the SRS airbag system warning light

- Front impact sensor

• Right-hand side
• Left-hand side

● Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)

- Frontal airbag module

• Driver's side

• Front passenger's side

• Knee airbag module

• Driver's side
• Seat cushion airbag module
• Front passenger's side

• Side impact sensor

• Center pillar left-hand side
  – Center pillar right-hand side

• Forward of rear wheel house left-hand side
• Forward of rear wheel house right hand side
• Front door left-hand side
• Front door right-hand side
• Under the rear center seat

- Side airbag module

• Driver's side
• Front passenger's side

- Curtain airbag module

• Right-hand side
• Left-hand side

- Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter

• Driver's side
• Front passenger's side

- Lap belt pretensioner

– Driver's side

• Seatbelt buckle switch
  Front passenger's side
• Front passenger's occupant detection system sensor
• Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights
• All related wiring
• Rear seatbelt pretensioner

- Driver's side

- Passenger's side

• Seat position sensor
• Driver's side
• Passenger's side

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and consult a SUBARU dealer. Unless a technician checks and repairs the system as needed, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may result in injury.

• Flashing or flickering of the warning light
• No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position
• Continuous illumination of the warning light
• Illumination of the warning light while driving

■ SRS Airbag System Servicing

WARNING

• When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
• The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in an indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

• Under the center of the instrument panel
- On both the right and left sides the front of the vehicle
• Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
- Bottom of the steering column and nearby areas
- Top of the dashboard on front passenger's side and nearby areas
• Each front seat and nearby area
• Inside each center pillar
• Inside each front door
- In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear
- Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each

side

• Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the comments of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

at The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which of the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags did not deploy

- The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a poi over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

- The center pillar, front door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.

• The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.

- The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed.

Precautions against Vehicle Modification

WARNING

- To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modification should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system.

This includes following modifications.

• Installation of custom steering wheels
• Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard
• Installation of custom seats
• Replacement of seat fabric or leather
• Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat
• Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
- Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
- Modifications on or inside the front door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement or sound insulation
- The impact sensors, which detect the pressure of an impact, are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trims, such as the addition of door speakers for example. Any modifications to the doors will create a risk of airbag system becoming inoperative or unintended airbag deployment.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

• Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.
• Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
• Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for ind dual vehicle models in this Over's Manual.
• Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protector etc.) other than genuine SUBARL accessory parts to the side body

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if y want to install any accessory parts on he vehicle.

■ How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer concerning Modifications for Persons with Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced Airbag System

Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Advocacy Department One Subaru Drive

P.O. Box 9103

Camden, NJ 08101-9877

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

subaru Hawaii

2850-A Pukoloa St.,

Honolulu, HI 96819

877-215-0338

Shen's Corporation dba Prestige Automobiles

491 East Marine Corps Drive,

Dededo, Guam 96929

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,

Puerto Rico

787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc.

Consumer Support Department

560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 4J7

1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are

in such an area, please contact the

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Keys and Doors

2-1. Keys.... 119

Key Number Plate.... 119

2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped) 119

Safety Precautions.... 120

Locking and Unlocking with "Keyless Access" Entry Function.... 124

Unlock Using PIN Code Access 128

Power Saving Function.... 130

Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ...... |131

Disabling Keyless Access Function 131

Selecting Audible Signal Operation 134

Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation..... 134

Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator 134

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly 134

Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob 134

Replacing Access Key Fob 134

Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System.... 134

2-3. Immobilizer.... 136

Security Indicator Light.... 136

Key Replacement.... 136

Certification for Immobilizer System.... 136

2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System 137

Locking the Doors 139

Unlocking the Doors 139

Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy) 139

Unlocking the Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).... 139

Setting Audible Signal Operation 139

Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ..... 140

Vehicle Finder Function.... 140

Sounding a Panic Alarm.... 140

Replacing the Battery.... 140

Replacing Lost Transmitters.... 140

Certification for Remote Keyless Entry System... 141

2-5. Door Locks 1422

Locking and Unlocking from the Outside..... 142

Locking and Unlocking from the Inside ..... 243

Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking 144"

Key Lock-In Prevention Function.... 145 ^w

Battery Drainage Reduction Function 145

2-6. Alarm System 146

Alarm System Operation 146

Arming the System 147

Disarming the System 148

Alarm System Setting.... 149

If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm System 149

Valet Mode 149

2-7. Child Safety Locks 150

2-8. Windows....150

Power Window Operation 151

Initialization of Power Window (Windows with One-Touch Auto Up and Down Function).... 153

2-9. Trunk Lid (Legacy) 153

To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from Outside 154

To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside 154

Internal Trunk Lid Release Handle 154

Keys and Doors

2-10. Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback

Wilderness).... 156

Manual Rear Gate 156

Power Rear Gate (If Equipped) 157

2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped) .....167

Moonroof Switches 167

Sunshade.... 168

2-1. Keys

NOTE

For models with "keyless access w push-button start system", refer to "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" P119.

1 1 2 3 203628

1 Master keys
2 Valet key
3 Key number plate

Two types of keys are provided for your vehicle:

Master key and valet key.

The master key fit all locks on your ver

• Ignition switch
• Driver's door
• Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

NOTE

Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be co-trolled with the buttons on the key, detailed information, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" P137.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder of key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine.

■ Key Number Plate

The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set. Wn down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. T number is needed to make a replacee key if you lose your key or lock it inside vehicle. Refer to "Key Replacement" P136.

2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped)

The following access key fobs are provided with the vehicle.

For

Diagram showing two car door lockers with labeled buttons and a separate terminal block labeled 2

203629

1 Access key fobs
2 Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button start system allows you to perform the following functions when you are carrying the access key fob.

• Locking and unlocking of the doors, fuel filler lid and rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
  • Opening the trunk (Legacy)
• Starting and stopping the engine. For detailed information, refer to "Starting

- CONTINUED -

and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)" P363.

- Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm System" P146.

NOTE

• Locking and unlocking by the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on access key fob. For detailed information, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" P137.
• Carefully store the key number plate supplied with the access key fob is necessary for vehicle repair and additional registration of access key fobs. For details, refer to "Key Replacement" P136.

An emergency key is attached to each access key fob.

o the 1 2 202500

te 1 Release button If Emergency key d. While pressing the release button of the y. access key fob, take out the emergency key.

The emergency key is used for the following operations.

- Locking and unlocking the driver's door - Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE

The glove box can be kept locked by you leave your vehicle and the access key fob (with the emergency key removed) at a parking facility.

■ Safety Precautions

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, before using the keyless access with push-button start system, refer to "Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start system" mentioned later, and contact the electronic medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the electronic medical equipment.

"Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start sys- tem"

- The keyless access with push-button start system uses radio waves of the following frequency* in addition to the radio waves used for the remote keyless entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown in the following illustrations.

*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

Technical diagram showing car interior and exterior views with numbered components, likely for safety or maintenance instructions.

Legacy
1 Antennas

Technical diagram showing cross-sectional views of a car with labeled components and structural details

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness
1 Antennas

CAUTION

• Never leave or store the access key fob inside the vehicle or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the push-button ignition switch may not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the access key fob.

• The access key fob contains electronic components. Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunctions.

• It is recommended to have access key fob battery replaced at an authorized SUBARU dealer to avoid the risk of damage.

• Do not get the access key wet. If the access key fob wet, wipe it off immediately and let it dry completely.
• Do not apply strong impacts the access key fob.
• Never leave the access key fob in direct sunlight or anywhere that may become hot,

the

fob

gets
- If the access key job is dropped, the integrated emergency key inside may become loose. Be careful not to lose the emergency key
- When traveling in an airplane, do not press the button of the access key fob. If any button of access key fob is pressed, radio

such as on the dashboard. may damage the battery or cause circuit malfunctions.

• Do not wash the access key fob in an ultrasonic washer.
• Do not leave the access key fob in humid or dusty locations. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
• Keep the access key fob away from magnetic sources.
• Do not leave the access key fob near a personal computer or home electrical appliance.
• Do not leave the access key fob near a battery charger or any electrical accessories.
• Do not apply metallic window tint or attach metallic objects to the windows.
• Do not fit non genuine accessories or parts.

waves are emitted and may affect the operation of the airplane. In a bag, take measures to prevent the buttons from being pressed accidentally.

NOTE

• The operational/non-operational setting for the keyless access function can be changed. For the setting procedure, refer to "Disabling Keyless Access Function" P131.
• For detailed information about the operation method for the push-button ignition switch while the keyless access function is switched to the non-operational mode, refer to "Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P502.
• The keyless access with push-button start system uses weak radio waves. The status of the access key fob and environmental conditions may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine.
  he - When operating near a facility where strong radio waves are

transmitted, such as a broadcast charged, replace it with a new one. initialization is completed.

station and power transmission lines.

• When products that transmit radio waves are used, such as an access key fob or a remote transmitter key of another vehicle.
• When carrying the access key of your vehicle together with the access key fob or the remote transmitter of another vehicle.
• When the access key fob is placed near wireless communication equipment such as a cell phone.
• When the access key fob is placed near a metallic object.
• When metallic accessories are attached to the access key fob.
• When carrying the access key for with an electronic appliance such as a laptop computer.
• When the battery of the access key fob is discharged.

- The access key fob is always communicating with the vehicle and is continuously using the battery. Although the life of the battery va depending on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 y If the battery becomes fully dis-

• If an access key fob is lost, it is recommended that all of the remaining access key fobs be reregistered. For reregistration of an access key fob, contact a SUBARU dealer.
• For a spare access key fob, contact SUBARU dealer.
  felp to 7 access key fobs can be registered for one vehicle.
• Do not leave the access key fob in the storage spaces inside the vehicle, such as the door pocket, dashboard or inside the corner of the cargo area. Vibrations may damage the key fob or turn on the switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
• After the vehicle battery is discharged or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may be required to start the engine. In this case, perform the following procedure to initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position. For details, refer to "Switching Power Status" P177.

(2) Open and close the driver's door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.

years. When the steering is locked, the

Do not leave the access key fob in the following places.

• On the instrument panel
• On the floor
  a- Inside the glove box
• Inside the door trim pocket
• On the rear seat
• On the rear shelf (Legacy)
• Inside the trunk (Legacy)
• In the cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

If you do, the following situations may occur.

• The access key fob is mistakenly locked inside the vehicle.
• A false warning issues although no malfunction actually occurs.
• No warning issues even when a malfunction occurs.

■ Locking and Unlocking with "Keyless Access" Entry Function

When the access key fob is carried within the operating range, the doors, the fuel filler lid, the trunk (Legacy) and the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) can be locked/unlocked just by touching the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked with the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" P137.

▼ Operating ranges

1 2 2 1 2 202469

Legacy

1 Antennas
2 Operating range (approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm))

1 2 2 2 203642

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1 Antennas
2 Operating range (approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm))

1 202501

1 LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either .dt is not possible to lock the doors access key fob.

the operating ranges of the front doors, the LED indicator on the access key fob flashes. When the keyless access functions are disabled, the LED indicator does not flash unless a button on the access key fob is pressed.

NOTE

• If the access key fob is placed too close to the vehicle body, the key-less access functions may not operate properly. If it does not operate properly, repeat the operation from farther away.
• If the access key fob is placed near the ground or in an elevated location from the ground, even if it is in that indicated operating range, the key-less access function may not operate properly.
• When the access key fob is within the operating range, it is possible anyone, even someone who is not carrying the access key fob, to operate the keyless access function. Note that the keyless access function can be operated only by the door handle, door lock sensor, rear gate opener button or rear lock button in the operating range in which the access key fob is detected.

rear gate and fuel filler lid using keyless access function when the access key fob is inside the veh. However, depending on the status the access key fob and the environmental conditions, the access key fob may be locked inside the ve Before locking the vehicle, make sure that you have the access k fob.
When the battery of the access ke fob is discharged, or when opera it in a location with strong radio waves or noise (e.g., near a radi
tower, power plant, broadcast station or an area where wireless element is used), or while talking of cell phone, the operating ranges may be reduced, or the keyless access function may not operate. In such a case, perform the procedure described in "Locking and Unlocking" P502.
The doors may lock or unlock wh the car is being washed or expo to a significant amount of water touches the door handle while th key fob is still in the operating

How to lock and unlock

is possible to perform the following erations when you are carrying the

the Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel filler lid.
cle Unlock the trunk lid (Legacy).
- Unlock and lock the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).

NOTE

• It is not possible to lock the doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid using the keyless access function when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Refer to "Switching Power Status" P177.
• If the door handle is gripped with ^6 a gloved hand, the door lock may not uip be released.
• If the door lock sensor is touched three times or more repeatedly, the system will ignore the sensor operation.
• When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not complete. After performing the locking procedure, it is recommended to pull the rear door handle to confirm that the doors have been locked.

• If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the door (or the rear gate) are not properly closed.

• An electronic chirp sounds five times.

• The hazard warning flashers flash five times.

• It is possible to lock the doors e when one of the doors is open. performing the locking procedure, close the opened door or rear g lock it.

• Within 3 seconds after locking the doors and the rear gate using the keyless access function, it is not possible to unlock doors and/or the rear gate using the keyless access function.
• When locking, be sure to carry the access key fob to prevent locking the access key fob in the vehicle.
• The setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230. Also, the setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

Locking with the door lock sensor ven After te to e he s 1 1 203633

1 Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all doors (for Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness including the rear gate) and touch the door lock sensor on the door handle. All doors including the rear gate and the fuel filler will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp w sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

NOTE

After touching the door lock sensor to lock all of the doors (including the rear gate), if you touch the door lock sensor once more to attempt the lock operation without first unlocking the doors, nothing will happen, even if the door lock sensor is touched. In this case,

perform the unlocking operation once first. You can then touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors.

▼ Locking with the rear lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Diagram showing a person cleaning a car's side panel with directional arrows and a magnified inset highlighting the component '1'.

lid Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all doors including the rear gate and press the rear lock button. The rear gate, the fuel filler lid and all doors will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

▼ Locking with the power rear lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness – if equipped)

1 203614

1 Power rear gate lock button

Carry the access key fob, and press the power rear gate lock button. It will close automatically, and the rear gate, all doors and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also hazard warning flashers will flash once, and an electronic chirp will sound once.

gate ▽ Unlocking

Diagram illustrating car cleaning process with worker using tool on front panel and magnified detail showing hand holding device

Carry the access key fob, and touch the sensor behind the door handle.

• When the driver's door handle is gripped, only the driver's door and the fuel filler lid will be unlocked.
• When the front passenger's door handle is gripped, all doors (for Outback), the Subaru Outback Wilderness, including the rear gate) and the fuel filler lid will unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

▽ Opening rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

204297

1 Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate will be unlocked and opened. Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

▽ Opening trunk (Legacy)

203632

1 Trunk opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the trunk opener button. The trunk will open. An electronic chirp will sound twice and hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

NOTE

Under the following conditions, the trunk can be opened without the key fob.

- The trunk lock/unlock setting is on. - All doors are unlocked.

The trunk lock/unlock setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Conta your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.

▼ Door unlock selection function

When the door is unlocked using the keyless access function, only the doors that were set and the fuel filler lid can unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the following methods.

• The setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230.
• The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

■ Unlock Using PIN Code Access

the 203632

ct Trunk opener button (Legacy)

be 1 203634

1 Rear lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

While all doors (for Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, including the rear gate) are locked, you can unlock the doors (including rear gate) without a key by performing the following procedure.

● Legacy: press the trunk opener button
- Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness: press the rear lock button

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-digit security code (PIN code) is registered.

▼ Registration for a PIN code

Steps Operation Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the ignition switch. —
2 Close all doors (including trunk/rear gate). —
3		Press and hold the button on the access key fob, then press and hold the trunk opener button (Legacy)/rear lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) until a chirp sounds intermittently.	—
4 Press the “button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds
5		Input the PIN code using the trunk opener button (Legacy)/rear lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) within 30 seconds after the chirp sound of step 4. For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following procedure.	Within 30 seconds
		(1) Press the button three times.
		(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
		(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
		(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
		(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6		Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts sounding intermittently.	—
7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.			—

NOTE
Press the “☐” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the “☐” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

NOTE

• Press the trunk opener button/rear lock button ten times to enter "0
• Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft.
• If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not been changed deleted. If the PIN code has been changed or deleted, reregister a PIN code.
• If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the "☐" or "→" button on the access key fob. Then start over from the step 1.
• To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register "00000" to "99999" or "12345" as a PIN cod
• Do not register your vehicle license plate number or simple numbers such as "11122" or "12121" as a PIN code. Doing so will increase risk of vehicle theft.
• When you try to register "22222", the registered PIN code will be delete. You cannot unlock the doors by Code Access until a new code is registered.

• After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the PIN code.

• The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is disabled by operating the acute key fob.

• Reregister the PIN code in the following case.

- When you forget the PIN code

or - When you want to change the code

new Unlocking

Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 described in "Registration".

NOTE

- You cannot unlock by PIN Code Access in the following cases.

- When the access key fob is within the operating ranges

- When the ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON" position

- If you make an operation error du theing the unlocking procedure, start over with the unlocking procedure

after waiting for 5 seconds or lon ed To protect your vehicle from theft,

PINbuzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes are entered five times continuously. If this occurs, you can

unlock the doors by PIN Code A he cess for 5 minutes.

■ Power Saving Function

To protect the access key fob battery and the vehicle battery, the keyless access function will be disabled as follows.

• When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry system have not been used for 2 weeks or longer while all doors are locked.
• When the access key fob has been left in the operating range for 10 minutes or longer while all doors are locked.

▼ Recovery from power saving mode

When one of the following operations is performed, the keyless access function will be recovered.

- Unlock by gripping the door handle (only when the sensors on the front the passenger's door are not disabled) or pressing the rear gate opener button on the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk opener button on the trunk lid (Legacy).

-Lock or unlock by the remote keyless a entry system.

• Open a door and then close it.
• Turn the push-button ignition switch to ot the "ON" position.

■ Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob

This function stops the access key fob from receiving signals and helps minimize the battery consumption of the access key fob.

1. Press the "?" button twice while holding the 🔒" button.

1 202501

1 LED indicator

1. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks times to notify that the setting is complete.

When the access key fob is in the power save mode, the keyless access function and push-button start system will not be available.

To cancel the power save mode, press of the buttons on the access key fob.

■ Disabling Keyless Access Function

If you have an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, perform the procedure "By operating the driver's door" P133 to disable the keyless access function. If you perform the procedure "By operating the access key fob" P131, the operation of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by the radio waves from the transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used for a long time, or when you choose not use the keyless access function, the keyless access function can be disabled.

NOTE

4 If the access key is kept in or near the vehicle, the system becomes active and both the vehicle and access key batteries' energy be consumed. If this occurs frequently or continuously, both the vehicle and access key batteries can become fully drained.

one The locking and unlocking function

by the remote keyless entry system is not disabled.

- To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the procedure described in "Starting Engine" P503.

▼ Disabling functions

By operating the access key fob To disable the keyless access function by operating the access key fob, register a PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details about registering a PIN code, refer to "Unlock Using PIN Code Access" P12s. 1. Open the driver's door.

ed ot to y- comes will 203610

1. Rotate the lock lever forward.

Line drawing of a car key with control buttons and navigation icons (no text or symbols)

1. Press and hold the " " button and " " button on the access key fob simultaneously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the function will be disabled.

∇ By operating the driver's door

Line drawing of a car interior with a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

To disable the keyless access function operating the driver's door, perform the following procedures.

Steps	Operation Time Status
1 Sit in the driver's seat, and close the door. — Close
2 Push “ 📄 on the power door locking switch. — Close
3	Open the driver's door.	Within 5 sec.	Close→Open
4	Push “ 📄 on the power door locking switch twice.	Within 5 sec.	Open
5	Close and open the driver's door twice.	Within 10 sec.	Open→Close→Open→Close→Open
6	Push “ 📄 on the power door locking switch twice while the door is open.	Within 10 sec.	Open
7	Close and open the driver's door once.	Within 10 sec.	Open→Close→Open
8 Close the door.		Within 5 sec.	Open→Close

byA chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.

▼ Enabling functions

When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, a chirp sound be heard, and the functions are enabled

NOTE

• The keyless access function will be enabled only if you perform the procedure in the same manner you disabled the function (for example, when disabling by operating the driver's door, the function will not be enabled even if you operate the access key fob).

• Press the push-button ignition switch if you do not know the procedure in which the keyless access function was disabled.

• When disabling by operating the driver's door: A chirp will not heard.

• When disabling by operating the access key fob: A chirp will be heard.

■ Selecting Audible Signal Operation

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the do are locked or unlocked. If desired, you turn the audible signal off by operating center information display. For details,

refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" will P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
Furthermore, the volume setting of the audible signal can also be changed by SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation

Using the hazard warning flasher, the system will give you a visible signal which the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230. The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

e■ Warning Chimes and Warning e Indicator

The keyless access with push-button start system is equipped with a warning chime and the access key warning indicator in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft. For details, refer to "Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" P197.

■ When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

Refer to "Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P502.

■ Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob

Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" P562.

■ Replacing Access Key Fob

Access key fobs can be replaced at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

■ Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

• U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AKB

FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-2

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

- Canada-spec. models - Type 1

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicle's immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. If engine start is attempted with an unregistered access key fob or key, the engine will not start. Even if the engine does start, it will stop after a few seconds. This system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft guarantee.

CAUTION

• Do not place the key under dire sunlight or anywhere it may be come hot.
• Do not get the key wet. If the gets wet, wipe it dry with a immediately.
• Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

- To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the following security precautions:

• Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.
• Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and the mo roof, and lock the doors (all models) and rear gate (Outbac Subaru Outback Wilderness).
• Do not leave spare keys or a record of your key number in vehicle.
• The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

■ Security Indicator Light

Refer to "Security Indicator Light" P202.

■ Key Replacement

Your key number plate will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. The many new key must be registered for use with your vehicle's immobilizer system before it can be used. The maximum number of keys that can be registered for use with one vehicle is as follows.
- Four (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")
- Seven (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

One key that has already been registered is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key's ID code /still remains in the memory of the vehicle's immobilizer system. For security reasons, the lost key's ID code should be erased from the memory. To erase the lost key's ID code, all keys that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration and erasing the lost key's ID code, contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Certification for Immobilizer System

• For models with "keyless access with push-button start system": Refer to "Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" P134.
  or
• For models without "keyless access with push-button start system": - U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-3

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

- Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

• Do not expose the remote tran mitter to severe shocks, such those experienced as a result dropping or throwing.
  askeys
• Do not take the remote transmitter apart except when replacing the battery.
  and Do
• Do not get the remote transmitte wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
• When you carry the remote transmitter on an airplane, do not press the button of the remote transmitter while in the airplane. When any button of the remote transmitter is pressed, radio waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry the remote transmitter in a bag on an airplane, take measures to prevent the buttons of the remote transmitter from being pressed.

1 2 3 4 202502

Access key fob

1 Lock/arm button
2 Unlock/disarm button
3 Trunk lid opener (Legacy)/Rear gate unlock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
4 PANIC button

1 2 3 4 PANIC 202238

Transmitter

1 Lock/arm button
2 Unlock/disarm button
3 Trunk lid opener (Legacy)/Rear gate unlock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

4 PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the following functions.

• Locking and unlocking the doors, rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) and fuel filler lid
• Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)
• Sounding a panic alarm
• Arming and disarming the alarm system. For details, refer to "Alarm System" P146.

The operable distance of the remote key less entry system is approximately 30 fe

(10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environmental conditions. The system's operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE

• For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in any position other than the "OFF" position.
• For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.
• The hazard warning flashers will flash once or twice when the access key fob/transmitter button is pressed in the following cases.
• When locking the doors
• When unlocking the doors
• When unlocking the rear gate

If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230. The

setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBAR dealer for details.

■ Locking the Doors

Press the 🔒" button to lock all doors, re-gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) and fuel filler lid. An electron chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are fully closed, the following will occur to all you that the doors (or the rear gate) are properly closed.

• An electronic chirp sounds five times.
• The hazard warning flashers flash five times.

When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will occu

• An electronic chirp sounds once.
• The hazard warning flashers flash once.

■ Unlocking the Doors

Press the "button to unlock the driver's door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. To unlock all do and the rear gate, briefly press the "button again within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and second presses of the ^7 button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.

■ Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)

Press and hold the "button to operate track lid. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers v flash twice.

This operation setting can be changed SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Unlocking the Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Press the "→" button to unlock the rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

This operation setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Setting Audible Signal Operation

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

If desired, you can turn the audible signal off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models). Furthermore, the volume setting of the audible signal can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

Perform the following steps to deactivate the audible signal. Take the same steps to restore the function.

Line drawing of a car interior with a hand cursor pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols)

Steps		Operation Time
1 Sit		in the driver's seat. —
2		Close all doors and the rear gate.	—
3	(1)	Press and hold on the power locking switch.	Within 10 sec. it
	(2)	Insert the key into the ignition switch and pull out at least 6 times.
4		Open and close the driver's door.	- Within 10 sec.

The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate completion of the setting. Your SUBARU dealer can perform the above procedure for you.

■ Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation

Using the hazard warning flasher, the system will give you a visible signal when the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models). The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Vehicle Finder Function

Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the "💡" button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicle's horn to sound once and its hazard warning flashers to flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too short when you press the "button three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the remote transmitter.

■ Sounding a Panic Alarm

To activate the alarm, press the "PANIC" button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the remote transmitter. If a button on the remote transmitter is not pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.

■ Replacing the Battery

Refer to "Replacing Battery" P561.

■ Replacing Lost Transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you should re-program all of your transmitters for security reasons. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters programmed into the remote keyless entry system.

■ Certification for Remote Key- Canada-spec. models less Entry System - Type 1

• U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G496

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

■ Locking and Unlocking from the Outside

NOTE

If you unlock the driver's door with a key (including an emergency key) and open the door while the alarm system

armed, the alarm system is triggered and the vehicle's horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

• Press any button on the access key fob (except when the access key fob battery is discharged).
• Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" position.

• Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures.

• Grip the front door handle.

• Press the rear gate opener but ton.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

- Press any button on the remote transmitter (except when the transmitter battery is discharged).

• Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
  For details about the alarm system, refer to "Alarm System" P146.
  How to lock and unlock the vehicle using the key

is y fob 1 2 202957

1 Rotate the key toward the front to lock. 2 Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock
In this case, only the driver's side door locked or unlocked.

NOTE

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":
The emergency key is directional. If key cannot be inserted, change the

withdirection that the grooved side is facing hand insert it again.

▼ How to lock the vehicle without using the key

To lock the door from outside without the key, the following methods are available.

▼ Locking using lock lever

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt insertion and component insertion, with numbered parts and a magnified inset view.

1 Rotate the lock lever forward.
2 Close the door.

in this way, only the door that was operated will be locked.

the

▼ Locking using power door locking switch

1 2 202959

1 Press the 🔒 side of the power door locking switch.*

2 Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking switch, refer to "How to operate the power door locking switches" P144.

In this case, all closed doors, the fuel lid and the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) are locked at the same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside without the

■ Locking and Unlocking from the Inside

▼ How to use the lock lever

1 2 202960

1 Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock. 2 Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) are closed before starting to drive.

WARNING

• Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.
  Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraint systems, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.
  It also helps prevent passengers from falling out by preventing a door from being accidentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.
• Do not pull the front door handle from inside while driving. The door could open even if it is locked.

CAUTION

Do not pull the front inside door handle while operating the door lock. There is a risk that it will not be possible to open or lock the front doors.

▼ How to operate the power door locking switches

All doors, the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) and fuel filler lid can be locked and unlocked by pressing either side of the power door locking switches located on the driver's side and the front passenger's side doors.

1 2 202961

1 Lock
2 Unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the po door locking switches.

■ Automatic Door Locking/Un-locking

All doors and the fuel filler lid are automatically locked or unlocked under the following conditions.

- For automatic door locking

• When the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory default setting).
• When the select lever is shifted into a position other than the "P" position.

- For automatic door unlocking

• When the driver's door is open (factory default setting).
• When the ignition switch is turned to OFF.
• When the select lever is shifted into the "P" position.

NOTE

• The automatic door lock and unlock setting can be changed with the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

• When locking the door by the power door locking switches, automatic door locking will not operate.

• When unlocking the door by the power door locking switches, automatic door unlocking will not operate.

• If the system detects a strong enough impact to deploy the airbags, all doors may be automatically unlocked. For further details, refer to "Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved in an Accident" P507.
• When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock all the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked to from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the Key lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator “” will appear and the warning chime will also sound.

■ Key Lock-In Prevention Function

Under the following conditions, all the doors will not lock when the power door locking switch is pushed with a front door open.

• The key is still in the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

NOTE

• When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before losing the doors.
• When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked the key lock-in prevention warning indicator “=” will appear and the warning chime will also sound.
• The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as “operational”. This function’s operational/

non-operational setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. C tact a SUBARU dealer for details

▼ Non-operation of key lock-in prevention function

When the system is set so that it does operate, the doors are locked by the following operation.

• If the lock lever is turned to the front ("LOCK") position with the driver's door open and the driver's door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the driver's door is locked.
  If the spare key is used to lock the driver's door from the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked.

m Battery Drainage Reduction Function

Under various conditions, lights inside the vehicle will automatically turn off to reduce the risk of discharging the battery.

▼ Battery drainage reduction function for various conditions

This function will enter standby mode under the following conditions:

• The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")
• The key is removed from the ignition

key cylinder (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

If the following actions are not performed within 20 minutes, while the function is in standby mode, any room lights that are on will automatically turn off.

Turning or off lights

- Map light- Dome light- Ignition switch light*- Cargo area light*- Trunk light*- Rear gate light*- Door courtesy light*- Vanity mirror light

e Actions ce

- Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position.- Open or close the doors, including the rear gate.*- Open or close the doors, including the trunk*- Push the unlock button on the access key fob or transmitter.- Hold the front door handle and unlock it while holding the access key fob.*- Insert the key into the keyhole of the ignition switch?*- Come close to the vehicle that the front door was locked while holding the access key fob (if OFF delay timer setting for period of time is not off).*- Push the panic button on the access key fob or transmitter.

*1: Models with "keyless access with push-button start system"
*2: Models without "keyless access with push-

- CONTINUED -

button start system"
*3: Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness
*4: Legacy
*5: If equipped
Perform the action in the above table to illuminate the lights again when the battle drainage reduction function is active.

NOTE

• The battery drainage reduction function cannot be turned off.
• If the battery drainage reduction function is in operation when a d is open, the target room light will be illuminated.
• To protect the battery from battery drainage, make sure that all doors including the rear gate, are completely closed when leaving the vehicle

2-6. Alarm System

The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The ho ry sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle.

-For models with "keyless access wi push-button start system":

The system can be armed or disarmed with the keyless access function or acc key fob.

The system will not be activated when push-button ignition switch is in the "AC" or "ON" position.

for models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

The system can be armed or disarmed with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle's alarm system has been \$ for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Alarm System Operation

When the alarm system is armed, it is triggered by the opening any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the following alarms when triggered.

The vehicle's horn will sound for 30 seconds.
- The hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 seconds.

any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood remains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger the illumination of the following interior lights.

- Map lights (illuminates only when the door interlock switch is in the "DOOR" position)

• Dome light (illuminates only when the dome light switch is in the "DOOR" position)
• Cargo area light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) (illuminates only when the cargo area light switch is in the "DOOR" position)

The notifications regarding the map lights, dome light and cargo area light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) are deactivated as the factory setting. SUBARU dealer can activate the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Arming the System

The alarm system becomes armed when the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if equipped) and turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is locked.
4. Lock the doors using any of the following methods.
5. Locking using the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System"

P137.

• Locking using the keyless access function (if equipped). For details, refer to "Locking with the door lock sensor" P126.
• Locking using the power door locking switch. For details, refer to "Locking using power door locking switch" P143.
• Locking using the rear lock button. For details, refer to "Locking with rear lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)" P126.
• Locking using the power rear gate lock button. For details, refer to "Locking with the power rear gate lock button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness – if equipped) P127.

the

graph TD
    A["Circle 1"] --> C["Lock Icon"]
    B["Circle 2"] --> C
    C --> D["Key Symbol"]
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Security indicator light

NOTE

• All doors, the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy) and fuel filler lid will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and the security indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
• If any of the doors or the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times and the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are

- CONTINUED -

not properly closed. When you close the door, doors will automatically lock and the system will automatically arm in 30 seconds.

1. Approximately 30 seconds later, the system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state, the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.

NOTE

- The system can be armed even if the windows and/or moonroof are open. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system.

- The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer

- If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, system will not switch to the su lance state.

- Doors (including the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are unlocked using the access key fob/remote transmitter.

- Doors (including the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback

Wilderness)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are unlocked using the keyless access function (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

• Any door (including the rear (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) and engine hood) opened.
• The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position (models with out "keyless access with push-button start system").
• Push-button ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

Disarming the System

Perform either of the following procedure

• Briefly press a button (for less than 2 seconds) on the access key fob/remo transmitter.

• Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

• Grip the front door handle.

• Press the rear gate opener button (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).

• Press the trunk opener button (Legacy).

• Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light will then change slowly (once approximately every 3 seconds from twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the alarm system has been disarmed.

^o ▼ Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system without using the access key fob/remote transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ON" position with a registered key/access key fob.

teNOTE

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", if the access key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in "Switching Power Status" P503. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" P562.

■ Alarm System Setting

To change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Disarming the System" P148.
2. Sit in the driver's seat and shut all doors, the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness), the trunk lid (Legacy) and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
4. Hold down "☐" of the driver's power door locking switch, open the driver's door within the following 1 second, at wait 10 seconds without releasing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows.

Setting status	Combination meter display (color LCD)	Horn
Activate	AL ON	Once
Deactivate	AL OFF	Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer.

■ If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm System

▼ To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

• Press any button on the access key fob/remote transmitter.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• Turn the push-button ignition to the "ACC" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If the immobilizer transponder is not registered, the alarm will not stop.

■ Valet Mode

When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to deactivation mode. Refer to "Alarm System Setting" P149. The security indica-

tor light will continue to flash once every 3 seconds, indicating that the system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to activation mode. Refer to "Alarm System Setting" P149.

2-7. Child Safety Locks

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks the "LOCK" position when children sit on the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out.

LOG 203623

Each rear door has a child safety lock. When the child safety lock lever is in the "LOCK" position, the door cannot be opened from inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.

2-8. Windows

WARNING

toTo avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception.

• When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's body parts or any other objects from being caught in the window.
• Always lock the passengers' windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.
• Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety reasons and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.

NOTE

- If the power window system detects resistance, an impact or abnormality, the window operation may be automatically stopped to prevent

further jamming, entrapment or malfunction.

• The closing window slides down slightly and stops.
• The opening window stops sliding down.

- The power window system may detect resistance, an impact or an abnormality in the following cases.

• A substantial sized object is caught between the window and the window frame.
• A foreign object is caught between the window and the window frame.
• The vehicle drives over a deep pothole.

- The window cannot be closed for a few seconds after the window is automatically stopped by the system.

■ Power Window Operation

▼ Power window switches

- Driver's side power window switches:

1 2 3 4 5 202962

1 For front left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
2 For front right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
3 For rear left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature (if equipped))
4 For rear right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature (if equipped))
5 Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster on the driver side door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

- Passenger's side power window switches:

Line drawing of a car interior with curved surfaces and a small rectangular component (no text or symbols)

Each passenger's window can be controlled by the power window switch loca on the door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

▼ Operating the window

1 2 3 4 202972

With one-touch auto up and down feature

1 Automatically close*
2 Close
3 Open
4 Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the switch to the opposite side.

1 2 202973

Without one-touch auto up and down feature

1 Close

2 Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

• Continuously operating a switch in the same direction after the wind is fully closed or fully opened.
• Continuously operating three or more switches all at once in the same direction after the windows are fully closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described above may cause the power window breaker to operate making it impossible to open or close the window. Be so initialize the power windows. Refer to "Initialization of Power Window (Windows with One-Touch Auto Up and Down Function)" P153.

▼ Anti-entrapment function (windows with one-touch auto up and down function)

While closing the window automatically, the window senses a substantial enough object trapped between the window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while wind opening automatically, the window will stop.

CAUTION

• Never attempt to test the power window operation using body parts.
  w• If an object is caught just before the window fully closes, the system may not operate properly.

NOTE

- If a window detects an impact similar to that caused by trapping an object Lock Unlock

w (for example, when the vehicle en-When the lock switch is in the lock position, sible counters a deep pothole), the anti-the rear passenger's window switches on sure intrapment function may operate. | the driver side door and the passengers' too You cannot close the window for awindow switches cannot be operated.

few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.

▼ Off delay function (windows with one-touch auto up and down function)

The windows can be operated for approximately 40 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "OFF" position. If a front door is opened within 40 seconds, the off delay function is canceled.

▼isLocking the passengers' windows

203438

Lock

Final Unlock object When the lock switch is in the lock position, the rear passenger's window switches on the driver side door and the passengers' awindow switches cannot be operated.

When the indicator on the window switches does not illuminate, the window switch cannot be operated.

■ Initialization of Power Window (Windows with One-Touch Auto Up and Down Function)

If the one-touch auto up and down func or off delay function does not operate properly, operate each window according to the following procedure in order to initialize the power window system.

1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
3. Open the window completely and then press and hold down the power window switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then pull and hold the power window switch for approximately 1 second.

2-9. Trunk Lid (Legacy)

WARNING

• To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the trunk lid closed while the engine is running.
  Check that the trunk is completely closed before driving. If it is not, it may suddenly open, which could lead to an accident.
• Help prevent children, adults or animals from locking themselves in the trunk. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small children.
• When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors. Also make certain that the trunk is closed.

CAUTION

• Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the trunk lid.
• Before opening and closing the trunk, carefully check your surroundings to make sure it will strike any people or objects.
• When loading and unloading car go, be careful not to come in contact with the hot engine exhaust gas or the exhaust pipe, because they could burn you.
• Be careful when opening the trunk in a strong wind. The trunk lid could open or close suddenly and cause injuries.
• Make sure that the trunk is completely open when using it. If it is not, the trunk lid may suddenly drop and cause serious injury.
• Remove snow and ice from the trunk lid before opening it. Not doing so could cause the trunk lid to fall after it is opened.
• Do not push the trunk lid forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.

- Under the following conditions, the trunk lid may close unexpectedly, striking people or objects its path:

• Parking on a slope, with the rear of the vehicle lower than its front. In this case, make sure the trunk lid is fully open and secure before loading or unloading cargo.
• Installing parts or accessories that place excess weight on the trunk lid. Install only gen urine SUBARU parts and accessories.
• Loading baggage or other heavy items by throwing or otherwise forcefully loading them into the trunk. Always load cargo with care.

NOTE

Avoid keeping the trunk lid open for more than a few hours. Doing so ma drain the vehicle battery.

entry system. For details, refer to the following section.

in For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Opening trunk (Legacy)" P128, or "Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)" P139.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)" P139.

To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down until the latch engages.

NOTE

• Do not leave your valuables in the trunk when you leave your vehicle

• Under the following conditions, the trunk can be opened without the access key fob.

• The trunk lock/unlock setting set to on.

• All doors are unlocked.

the trunk lock/unlock setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Conta your SUBARU dealer to change the

setting.

■ To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from Outside

The trunk lid can be opened using the keyless access function or remote keyless

■ To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Press and hold the trunk lid opener button for more than 1 second.

■ Internal Trunk Lid Release Handle

is The internal trunk lid release handle is a device designed to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. In the event children or adults become locked inside the trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The handle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.

202504

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk pull the yellow handle as indicated by the arrow on the handle. This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the The handle is made of material that remains luminescent for approximately an hour in the dark trunk space after it is exposed to ambient light even for a short time.

WARNING

Never allow any child to get in the trunk and play with the release handle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child inside the trunk and the child op the lid using the release handle, child could fall out and be killed seriously injured.

CAUTION

• Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The handle lid, may be damaged.
• Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten straps or ropes to secure your cargo in the trunk. Such use may result in damage the handle.
• Load the trunk so that cargo cannot strike the release handle. If the cargo hits the handle while the vehicle is being driven, the handle may be pulled and the trunk lid may open. That may cause cargo to fall out of the trunk, which could create a traffic safety hazard.

▼ Inspection

Perform the following steps at least twice a year to check the release handle for correct operation.

1. Open the trunk lid.

ns he or ng k 203696

1. To lock it, press the latch with the of screwdriver shaft until it clicks.

Simple line drawing of a U-shaped object with a shaded central area, no text or symbols present.

This places the latch in the locked position.

Diagram of a pelvic region with solid and dashed outlines, no text or symbols present

1. Move the release handle, from outside the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to check if the latch is released.

If the latch is not released, contact your SUBARU dealer.

In that case, use the key to release the latch, then close the trunk lid.

Also, if the movement of the release handle feels restricted or not entirely smooth during operation, or the handle and/or handle base is cracked, contact your SUBARU dealer.

2-10. Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

CAUTION

When loading and unloading cargo, be careful not to come in contact with the hot engine exhaust gas or the exhaust pipe, because they could burn you.

NOTE

Avoid keeping the rear gate open for more than a few hours. Doing so may drain the vehicle battery.

Manual Rear Gate

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using any of the following systems.

• Power door locking switch: Refer to "Locking and Unlocking from the Inside" P143.
• Keyless access with the push-button start system (if equipped): Refer to "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" P119.
• Remote keyless entry system: Refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" P137.

To open:

Line drawing of a car interior showing the rear window and side door, with an inset close-up highlighting the front panel (no text or symbols)

Rear gate opener button

1. Unlock the rear gate.
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener button. The rear gate will open slight
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slow

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be opened due a discharged vehicle battery, a malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you can unlock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to "Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) - If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened" P504.

To close:

Technical line drawing of a car intake structure showing a downward arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down holding the convenient grip.

WARNING

- To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate closed while the engine is running.

- Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also do not close the rear gate by pulling the grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.

CAUTION

- Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open. - Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo.

■ Power Rear Gate (If Equipped)

WARNING

- When operating the power rear gate, observe the following precautions. Ignoring the precau-

- CONTINUED -

tions may result in an injury (e.g., anyone's body is hit against the rear gate or is caught in the rear gate, etc.)

• Make sure there are no people around the rear gate.

• Never let anyone get close to the rear gate.

• When closing the rear gate, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the rear gate. Otherwise, serious personal injury may be caused by entrapment.

• After opening the rear gate on a slope by using the power rear gate feature, the rear gate may close. Make sure that the rear gate has stopped completely after opening it.
• When leaving the vehicle, always carry the key for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power rear gate.
• The driver should be aware of pay careful attention to his/her responsibilities.

e.g., Use the power rear gate only when the area around the rear gate is clearly visible and when you have checked that there is a danger of people being caught the gate.

CAUTION

• When closing the rear gate after opening it, make sure to use the power rear gate. If you close the rear gate manually with extra force, the power rear gate may be damaged.
• Do not install any accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts on the rear gate. If the weight of rear gate increases excessively, the rear gate stay cannot support the rear gate sufficiently when opening the rear gate. Also, the power rear gate may not function properly may malfunction.

The power rear gate operates only when all of the following conditions are satisfied.

The vehicle is stopped completely. The outside temperature is within a range from -22^ to 140^ (from -30^ )

to 60°C).

- The ignition switch is in the "OFF" or "ACC" position. Or, the ignition switch is no in the "ON" position and the select lever n is in the "P" position.

We recommend using the power rear gate function in most circumstances instead of manual operation.

NOTE

the The rear gate may not move the smoothly when the battery power becomes low.

• Do not press the power rear gate button repeatedly while the power rear gate is operating. Otherwise, the system may ignore the button operation in order to avoid being damaged.
• If the vehicle starts to move while the power rear gate is operating, the system sounds a buzzer and closes the rear gate automatically. At this time, if the system detects jamming, it will deactivate the power rear gate and the rear gate will not be closed. If this occurs, close the rear gate manually. For details, refer to "Manual Rear Gate" P156.
• If you try to open the rear gate using the power rear gate function immediately after closing the rear gate

using the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sound and the rear gate will not open. Wait for while before trying to open the rear gate via the power rear gate function.

- If either of the operating conditions has not been satisfied while operating the power rear gate, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate will be deactivated. In this case, the rear gate may stop opening or closing suddenly.

▼ Operation

NOTE

• The rear gate will remain unlocked. P even after closing it. Always lock the rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
• If you cannot open/close the rear gate by performing the operation described here, a short electronic chirp will sound three times (beep, beep, beep). In this case, perform the initialization of the power rear gate. Refer to "Initialization of power rear gate" P164.

∇ By the power rear gate button (other than the buttons on the a rear gate)

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Power rear gate button on the instrument panel

202639

Power rear gate button on the access key fob

To open the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate button when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate will open automatically. Then an electronic chirp and the hazard warning flashers will operate as follows:

• When operating the power rear gate button on the instrument panel: sounds and flashes twice.
• When operating the power rear gate button on the access key fob: sounds and flashes four times.

NOTE

- If you cannot open the rear gate by operating the power rear gate button on the instrument panel, then it may

- CONTINUED -

be locked by using the keyless access function or the remote keyless entry system. Unlock the doors using the keyless access function or the remote keyless entry system before pressing the power rear gate button again.

- The factory setting (default setting) of the operation for the "x" button on the access key fob or the transmitter is pressing and holding. This setting can be changed to non-operation or pressing twice at SUBARU dealers. For more details, NO contact a SUBARU dealer.

To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press the power rear gate button while the rear gate is being opened. That an electronic chirp will sound twice and hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close.

You can open the rear gate by pressing power rear gate button briefly while the rear gate is being closed.

Pure diagram of a curved mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

203451

NOTE

The rear gate cannot be paused when is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) rad from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to open the

To close the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate button. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you briefly press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

∇ By the buttons on the rear gate

NOTE

After performing the following procedures, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

en it range on pen. 204298

Rear gate opener button

1 2 203672

Power rear gate button on the inside of the rear gate

1 Power rear gate lock button
2 Power rear gate button

To open the rear gate:

1. For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", carry the access key fob. For models without "keyless access with push-button star system", unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener button when the rear gate is closed.

The rear gate will open automatically.

To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press either of the following button while the rear gate is being opened.

- Rear gate opener button

- Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close. You can open the rear gate by pressing the pow rear gate button briefly while the rear g is being closed.

edge 203451

NOTE

The rear gate cannot be paused which is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to

To close the rear gate:

Briefly press either of the following buttons.
- Rear gate opener button

- Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

To Lock the doors using the power rea gate lock button:

Carry the access key fob, and press the power rear gate lock button. All doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler lid are locked, and the rear gate will be closed. Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and an electronic chirp will sound once.

NOTE

• By pushing the power rear gate lock button for more than 2 seconds, all doors are locked, however, the auto closing function of the rear gate will be canceled.
• If any of the doors is not fully closed, the electronic chirp sounds five en times to alert you that the doors are range properly closed.

n ▽ By manual operation

open the rear gate:

Lift up the rear gate, when the rear gate is at the midway position. The rear gate will open automatically.

To close the rear gate:

Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate

- CONTINUED -

is opened. The rear gate will close automatically.

NOTE

• If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may not operate automatically open or close.
• When leaving the vehicle, make sure that all doors and the rear gate are completely locked.

▼ Memory function

The preferred rear gate height can be registered.

▽ Registration of the rear gate height

To register the rear gate height, perform the following procedures.

1. Open the rear gate and stop it at the preferable height.

t n re are 1 203617

1 Power rear gate button
2. Press and hold the power rear gate button to register the height. An electronic chirp sounds and the hazard warning flashes for confirmation.

The rear gate will stop at the registered position when the memory function is or

NOTE

• Register the rear gate height to turn on the "Power Rear Gate Memory" ^2 automatically. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230.
• To change the registered height, perform the registering procedure again.
• It is possible to register the height from approximately 2 in (5 cm) or

more from the completely closed position.

∇ Deactivation of the memory function

Deactivate the memory function to open the rear gate fully. Perform either of the following operation to deactivate the memory function.

• Deactivate the "Power Rear Gate Memory" function on the center information display (CID). Refer to "Car settings" P230.
• Register the position of the rear gate at the fully open position.

∇ Utilizing the memorized rear gate height

To open the rear gate and stop it at the registered height, perform the following procedure.

1. Check that "Power Rear Gate Memory" is on. Refer to "Car settings" P230.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear gate button.

NOTE

The rear gate will open to the position that is stored in the memory function even if the rear gate is opened by the reverse function.

▼ Reverse function

WARNING

• Do not let parts of your body caught when operating the reverse function. If the reverse function does not operate for some reason, this may lead to serious injury or accidents.
• The reverse function may not operate if foreign objects are caught in the rear gate just be it closes completely. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.
• The reverse function may not operate depending on the object shape and the manner in which was caught. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.

CAUTION

• If the reverse function is operated 3 times consecutively, automatic opening and closing of the power rear gate function will be canceled and the rear gate will stop opening or closing suddenly.

However, the rear gate may open or close depending on the rear gate height when automatic operation is ceased. Be careful that the rear gate does not hit anyone's head or face, etc. and that fingers and baggage, etc. are not caught in it.

- Take care not to damage the touch sensors. Otherwise, the reverse function may cease to operate.

If, while opening or closing using power rear gate, the rear gate catches persons baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically open.

Line drawing of a car's rear window frame with labeled component (no text or symbols beyond part number)

1 Touch sensor

Such sensors are attached on the left and right edges of the rear gate. If the touch to sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc. while closing by the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3 times and the rear gate will open automatically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using the reverse function, it will be opened fully or to the height registered in the memory function.

▼ Rear gate drop prevention function If, while fully opened via the power rear gate function, the rear gate is lowered by the weight of snow and such, an electronic

- CONTINUED -

chirp will sound and the rear gate drop prevention function will apply braking to the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid closure of the rear gate.

NOTE

• If there is snow on the rear gate, use the power rear gate function after removing the snow.
• If you close the rear gate manually just after the rear gate is fully open using the power rear gate function the rear gate drop prevention function will detect a rapid closure of rear gate and apply braking to the rear gate. In this case, this is no malfunction.

▼ Selecting audible signal operation

Using an electronic chirp, the power rear gate will give you an audible signal before starting its operation. If desired, the audible signal can be turned off by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", you can also turn the audible signal off by operating center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230.

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal also works as the audible signal settings 1. for the "remote keyless entry system" and the "keyless access with push-button start system". However, for the electronic chirp such as that caused by "Reverse function P163 or "Rear gate drop prevention function" P163, it cannot be set as non-operational.

▼ Initialization of power rear gate If the power rear gate detects some abnormality while operating, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate 1. Operation will be automatically stopped in either opening or closing position. In this case, the system needs to be initialized in the following order to restart the function properly.

If the power rear gate is closed,

Line drawing of a car rear view with a close-up inset showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Keep pressing the rear gate opener button until it is unlocked (for approximately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear gate.

Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed.

1. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.

If the power rear gate is opened

1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed. In If the rear gate will not close completely, keep pressing the rear gate opener button for approximately 5 seconds and pull down the rear gate.

2. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.

CAUTION

If the power rear gate function does not operate properly, have your vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

▼ Hands-free Power Rear Gate function

The Hands-free Power Rear Gate function enables the rear gate to be opened automatically by holding a hand over the rear emblem.

This function can be deactivated using Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch. Refer to "Hands-free Power Rear Gate switch" or P166.

CAUTION

• Do not remove the rear emblem decorate it or the area around. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the Hands-free Power Re Gate function.
• Be careful of the Hands-free Power Rear Gate if an access key fob is placed near the vehicle. If a person or physical object comes in close proximity to the rear emblem, the Hands-free Power Rear Gate may open suddenly resulting in damage to the rear gate or personal injury. The can occur even if the person v approaches the emblem is not carrying the access key fob.

To open the rear gate via the function, perform the following steps.

Diagram illustrating car safety instructions with hand gestures and motion arrows, labeled with vehicle number 204207

func: When the ignition switch is in the OFF Rear position, carry the access key fob.

1. Move your hand slowly toward the rear emblem and hold it there until a electronic chirp sounds.
   hicle. Immediately after the electronic chirp sounds, move your hand away.
2. The rear gate will open automatically

Diagram illustrating car seatbelting and steering mechanism, showing hand positioning and wheel movement with a person in a boat.

NOTE

• It is possible to open the rear gate k F moving close to the rear emblem.
• The Hands-free Power Rear Gate function will not operate when the rear gate has already been opened.

• If any of the following are performed before automatically opening the power rear gate, the operation will be canceled.

• Moving your hand or arm away from the rear emblem before the electronic chirp starts to sound.

• Not moving your hand or arm away from the rear emblem even after the electronic chirp starts to sound.
• Touching the rear emblem

- CONTINUED -

- Turn off the Hands-free Power Rear Gate function when washing the vehicle or removing snow from the vehicle. The Hands-free Power Rear Gate may suddenly open if an access key fob is placed near the vehicle.

Take the access key fob out of the operation range or turn off the function when you do not want to activate the Hands-free Power Rear Gate function. Refer to "Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch" P166.

- The Hands-free Power Rear Gate function may not operate properly in the following conditions.

• In heavy rain
• The rear gate is very dirty.
• The vehicle is covering by snow.
• Hands and arms may not be detected because of clothing.
• The system of the vehicle cannot detect the access key fob.

In those cases, push the rear gate opener button to open.

▼ Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch

OFF 203650

1

2

202412

- Touching the rear emblem or holding your hand over the rear emblem | Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch status

during automatic opening does not stop the automatic opening. 1 Inactive 2 Active

Pressing the Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch deactivates the Hands-free Power Rear Gate function.

2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone's hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must conform to the following instructions without exception.

• Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one's hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.
• Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety (models without "keyless access with push-button start system") and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.

- Never try to check the anti-en-trapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.

CAUTION

• Do not sit on the edge of the moonroof.
• Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
• The anti-entrapment function does not operate when the moonroof is being tilted down. Be to confirm that it is safe to before tilting the moonroof do
• If the moonroof does not close have the system checked by SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.

The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

Moonroof Switches

▼ Tilting moonroof

open 204284

The tilting up function will only operate when the moonroof is fully closed. The laying down function will only operate when the moonroof is tilted.

To tilt up the moonroof:

Press and hold the moonroof switch.

To lay down the moonroof:

Slide and hold the moonroof switch forward.

CAUTION

Release the switch after the moon-roof has been tilted or has been laid down completely. Pressing the

- CONTINUED -

switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTE

One-touch operation does not take place when the moonroof is lowered. Press the switch continuously to lov the moonroof.

▼ Sliding moonroof

2 M 1 204285

1 Open
2 Close

To open the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and he backward, the moonroof will open, then stop slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Slide the moonroof switch again to fully open the moonroof.

To close the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and h to the close side, the moonroof will fully close.

To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the moonroof switch either way.

After washing the vehicle or after it rain wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compartment.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with moonroof fully opened.

▼ Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial enough object trapped between its glass and the vehicle's roof during closure, it automatically moves to the open side and stop. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on moonroof even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

Sunshade

the 204286

The sunshade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade also moves back.

-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Instruments and Controls

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System) 174
Key Positions 174
Key Reminder Chime 175
Ignition Switch Light.... 175
3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System) 176
Safety Precautions.... 176
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 176
Switching Power Status 177
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly 178
3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher.... 178
3-4. Meters and Gauges 179
Speedometer 179
Tachometer.... 179
Odometer 179
Double Trip Meter 180
Fuel Gauge....180
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 181
Combination Meter Settings.... 181
3-5. Illumination Brightness Control 181
Auto Dimmer Cancel Function 182
3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights 183
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime 183
SRS Airbag System Warning Light 186
Front Passenger's Frontal Airbag ON and OFF Indicator Lights 187
CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator Light 188

Charge Warning Light 189

Oil Pressure Warning Light 189

Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light 189

AT OIL TEMP Warning Light 189

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (U.S.-Spec. Models).... 189

ABS Warning Light.... 191

Brake System Warning Light 192

Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light.... 193

Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light 1924

Low Fuel Warning Light 194

Door Open Indicator.... 194

Engine Hood Open Warning Light 1\$5

Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light 195

All-Wheel Drive Warning Light 195

Power Steering Warning Light 195

Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator Light 196

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light .... ^0_in 197

Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped).... 197

Security Indicator Light 202

SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If Equipped) 203

Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator.... 203

Turn Signal Indicator Lights 203

High Beam Indicator Light 203

High Beam Assist Indicator 203

Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning Light 204

LED Headlight Warning Light 204

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator Light 204

Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light ..... 204

Headlight Indicator Light.... 204

Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped)..... 204

Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow) 204

Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light 204

Auto Start Stop Indicator Light (Green) .....205

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator Light 205

X-MODE Indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) 205

Hill Descent Control Indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).... 205

BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped).....206

BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped)......206

Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator 206

RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)...... 206

RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) 206

Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator Light (Green) (If Equipped)....206

Driver Monitoring System Warning Light (Yellow) (If Equipped)....207

Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light (If Equipped)....207

Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop Indicator Light (If Equipped)....207

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator (If Equipped)....207

3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) ..... 207 Basic Operation.....208

Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen.... 209

Warning Screen.... 209

Meter Information Screen 209

Telltale Screen 211

Basic Screens.... 212

Digital Speed Screen 215

3-8. Center Information Display (CID) .....216

Features 216

Welcome Screen 216

Good-Bye Screen 217

Interruption Screen 217

Touch Screen Operations 217

11.6-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) 218

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) ..... 242

3-9. Clock 256

Setting the Clock Manually 256

Setting the Clock Automatically.... 257

Time Zone (Models with Navigation System)..... 258

Daylight Saving Time (Models with Navigation System) 258

3-10. Valet Mode 259

Activation of Valet Mode.... 259

Deactivation of Valet Mode 260

3-11. Light Control Switch 260

Headlights 261

High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) 263

Headlight Flasher 264

High Beam Assist Function 264

Daytime Running Light System 267

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ..... 2673-18. Mirrors.....277
3-13. Headlight Beam Leveler 269 Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function)
3-14. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped)...... 269 (If Equipped) ...... 277 Auto Damping Mirror/Compose with Home link
3-15. Turn Signal Lever 270 Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink (If Equipped) 277 One-Touch Lane Changer 270 Smart Rearview Mirror/Compass with
3-16. Wiper and Washer 271 Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches 272 Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) 274 Smart Rearview Mirror/Compass With HomeLink® (Outback) (If Equipped) 2 Outside Mirrors 299 3-19. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel 3-20. Heated Steering Wheel System
3-17. Defogger and Deicer.... 275 3-20. Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped)
3-19. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel 302

3-20. Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped) 303 ^5
3-21. Horn....304

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

WARNING

• Never turn the ignition switch to "LOCK" while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes much greater effort than usual to steer.
• Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or other. Children could operate the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder key case to either key. If it bang

against your knees or hands while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine. Also, if the key is attached to a holder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch.

a

PUSH LOCK ACC ON START

303406

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

- Keep the ignition switch in the or "LOCK" position when the engine d is not running.

- Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position can cause the battery to go dead. - If the ignition switch will not move away from the "LOCK" position to the "ACC" position, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

■ Key Positions

Position	Description
LOCK	The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.
ACC	In this position the electrical accessories (audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.
ON	This is the normal operating position after starting the engine.
START	The engine is started in this position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the "START" position while the engine is running.

PACK LOCK ACC OK 301690

NOTE

• To turn the key from the "ACC" to "LOCK" position, the select lever must be in the "P" position and the key must be pushed in and turned.
• If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once (th security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key again and turn it to the "START" position again to restart the engine.

• The engine may not start in the following cases:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with concentric circles and a key inserted (no text or symbols)

- The key grip is touching an the key or a metallic key holder.

(the ain 301692

- The key is near another key contains an immobilizer trans-

ponder.

- The key is near or touching another transmitter.

■ Key Reminder Chime

The reminder chime sounds when the driver's door is opened and the ignition switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position;

The chime stops under the following conditions.

• The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The key is removed from the ignition switch.
  • The driver's door is closed.

■ Ignition Switch Light

For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when driver's door is opened or when the driver's door is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and gradually turns off under the following conditions.

• The driver's door is closed.
• The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light gradually turns off under the following conditions.

• The ignition switch is turned to the "ON position.
• The doors are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

■ Safety Precautions
Refer to "Safety Precautions" P120.
■ Operating Range for Push-Button Start System

1 2 303546

Legacy
1 Antennas
2 Operating range

1 2 305340

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness
1 Antennas
2 Operating range

NOTE

• If the access key fob is not detected within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch and the engine start cannot be operated.
• Even when the access key fob is outside the vehicle, if it is placed too close to the glass, it may be possible to switch the power or to start the engine.
• Do not leave the access key fob in the following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button ignition switch and the en-

gine start.

• On the instrument panel
• On the floor
• Inside the glove box
• Inside the door trim pocket
• On the rear seat
• On the rear shelf (Legacy)
• Inside the trunk (Legacy)
• At the corner of the cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

- When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the access key fob battery discharged, perform the procedure described in "Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P502. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" P562.

■ Switching Power Status

1 ENGINE START STOP 2 306052

1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch

The power status is switched every time the push-button ignition switch is pressed. Carry the access key fob, and sit in driver's seat.

1. Make sure the select lever is in the position.
2. Press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. Every time the button is pressed, the power is switched in the sequence of "OFF", "ACC", "ON" and "OFF". When the engine is stopped and the push-button ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON", the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch illuminates

in orange.

Power status	Indicator color	Operation
OFF	Turned off	Power is turned off.
ACC	Orange	The following systems can be used: audio and accessory power outlet.
ON	Orange (while engine is stopped)	All electrical systems can be used.
	Turned off (while engine is running)

CAUTION

• To prevent the vehicle battery from discharging, do not leave the push-button ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position a long time.
• To avoid a malfunction, observe the following precautions.
• Do not spill drinks or other liquids on the push-button ignition switch.

- Do not touch the push-button ignition switch with a hand that is soiled with oil or other contaminants.

• If the push-button ignition switch does not operate smoothly, stop the operation. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch does not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
• If the vehicle was left in the hot sun for a long time, the surface the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTE

• When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way.
• If the push-button ignition switch is pressed quickly, the power may not turn on or off.
• If the indicator light on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green when the push-button ignition switch is pressed, steering is

locked. When this occurs, press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

▼ Battery drainage reduction function

When the push-button ignition switch is le in the "ACC" position for approximately 20 minutes or the "ON" position (the engine not running) for approximately 1 hour, the push-button ignition switch will be automatically switched to "OFF" to reduce the possibility of the battery going dead. (This function is activated when the select lever is in the "P" position.)

■ When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

Refer to "Access Key Fob – If Access Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P502.

the-3. Hazard Warning Flasher

Left Is 307076

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, press the hazard warning flasher switch on the instrument panel. All the turn signal lights and the turn signal indicator lights will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and Gauges

NOTE

Liquid crystal displays are used in some of the meters and gauges in combination meter. You will find the indications hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.

■ Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occurs when the ignition switch is turned "ON" position can be activated or deactivated.

For details, refer to "General setting P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occur when the ignition switch is turned "ON" position can be activated or deactivated.

For details, refer to "General setting P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

Odometer

1 2 900 mi 307096

1 TRIP RESET switch 2 Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

.NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. The indicators will turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.

Double Trip Meter

1 2 A 34.5 307095

1 TRIP RESET switch

2 Trip meter

This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The trip meter shows the distance that vehicle has been driven since you last it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown the following sequence by pressing the TRIP RESET switch.

graph TD
    A["TRIP A"] --> B["TRIP B"]
    B --> A

To reset the trip meter, select either the trip or B trip meter, then press and hold TRIP RESET switch.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

NOTE

- If the connection between the combination meter and battery is bro for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip me will be lost.

- If you press the TRIP RESET swit the when the ignition switch is in th

the set "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light. It is possible to switch between trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset trip meter by pressing and holding the TRIP RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when TRIP RESET switch is not operat for approximately 10 seconds.

Fuel Gauge

F E

306055

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge

c shows "E" even if the fuel tank contains e fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to fuel level movement in the tank (e.g., during braking, turning or acceleration).

NOTE

• You will see the " sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the right side of the vehicle.

If you press the TRIP RESET switch while the ignition switch is in the

"LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge will turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is not operate for approximately 10 seconds.

We recommend that you drive moderate until the pointer of the temperature gaug reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.

y3-5. Illumination Brightness Control

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

H 1 306056

1 Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to "Engine Overheating" P496.

■ Combination Meter Settings

Meter settings can be set on the center information display. For details, perform the procedures described in "General settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

Interior view of a car dashboard with a digital display showing internal control panel (no text or symbols)

The illumination brightness of the combination meter and center information display dims under the following conditions

• The light switch is in theo“” or “D” position when the ambient light is dark.
• The light switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

• When the control dial is turned full upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work at all.
• The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition swit is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" portion.
• The operation method of illumination brightness will differ depending whether or not "Brightness Dial" the center information display is Refer to the operation method indicated the following table.

"Brightness Dial" is on.

Operational item	Combi-nation meter	Center information display
Control dial	Available	Available
“Brightness”*1 on the center information display	Not avail-able	Not avail-able

"Brightness Dial" is off.

Operational item	Combination meter	Center information display
Control dial	Available	Not available
"Brightness" on the center information display	Not available	Available

on1: When "Brightness Dial" is on, "Brightness" on the center information display is not available. For details about "Brightness Dial" off settings, refer to "General setting P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

■ Auto Dimmer Cancel Function

When the ambient light is bright, the illumination brightness is set to the maximum regardless of the position of the control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust the illumination brightness by using the control dial. When the ambient light is dark, you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.

The operational/non-operational setting and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel function can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights

Several of the warning and indicator light illuminate momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned the "ON" position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. For the system check, the following lights illuminate and turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started:

Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front passenger's seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the front seat passenger faster the seatbelt.)

☐: Rear seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON/ON ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

CHECK ENGINE / CHECK ENGINE warning light/ Malfunction indicator light

Charge warning light

Oil pressure warning light

ABS/ (ABS) ABS warning light

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light to Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicat light

BRAKE/ (!) Brake system warning light

PARK / (P): Electronic parking brake indicator light

●! Power steering warning light

(1): Low tire pressure warning light (U.S. spec. models)

Low fuel warning light

A: Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light

(A): Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow) If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

■ Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver's and passenger's seats, as required by current safety standards.

▼ Driver's and front passenger's seats

With the ignition switch turned to the "ON" position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following illustrations and sounding a chime.

a 306073

Driver's seat

307093

Front passenger's seat (dual 7.0-inch play models)

307094

Front passenger's seat (11.6-inch display models)

▽ Operation

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the driver's and/or front passenger's warning light will illuminate, then it will blink for several seconds. If the seatbelt of the driver's seat is not fasten the warning chime may make a peep sound.

NOTE

- If the driver's and/or front passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened while driving, the seatbelt warning system operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

- The warning light will illuminate when driving approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.

- The warning light will blink, a the warning chime will make a peep sound when driving between approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). Warning chime will stop when vehicle stops.

- The warning light will blink, a the warning chime will sound loudly when 15 seconds have elapsed while driving between approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h).

- The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound loudly when driving approximately more than 13 mph (20 km/h).

The warning light will turn off and the warning chime will stop when the seatbelt is fastened.

If there is no passenger on the front passenger's seat, the seatbelt warning system for the front passenger's seat will be deactivated. The front passenger's seatbelt warning system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passenger's seat.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the device from functioning correctly or cause the device to fail.

• Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seat-back.
• Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.
• Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.

- Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them a not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Front Seats" P28.

If the seatbelt warning system for the front passenger's seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passenger's seat is empty or it is deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.

• Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant, although we strongly recommend that all children are in the rear seat properly restrained.
• Ensure that there is no article left in seatback pocket.
• Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for front passenger's seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

▼ Rear passenger's seats

nt e 1 2 3 307092

em Rear seatbelt warning light (dual 7.0-inch display models)

sit 1 Rear left seat

2 Rear center seat

the3 Rear right seat

1 2 3 306359

Rear seatbelt warning light (11.6-inch play models)

1 Rear left seat
2 Rear center seat
3 Rear right seat

With the ignition switch turned to the "CN" position, the seatbelt warning light and chime reminds the rear passenger to fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the above illustration and sounding a chime.

WARNING

- The driver must check that the all passengers have fastened their seatbelts properly since the seatbelt warning system may not detect passengers under the fol-

- CONTINUED -

lowing circumstances.

• When cushions or child restraint systems, etc., are used.
• When a child or small adult is sitting in the seat.

- Observe the following precautions

• Do not apply any strong impact to the rear seat.
• Do not fold the seatback forward when objects are on the seat.
• Do not spill liquid on the rea seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe off immediately.
• Do not remove or disassembl the rear seat.

NOTE

- The seatbelt warning system of the rear seat detects if the seat is occupied by a passenger. Heavy cargo or large pets on the rear s may result in the activation of the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seat belt prior to loading cargo or large pets will avoid activating the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime.

- When folding the rear seat, ensure that the seat is empty prior to folding. Items caught between the seat bottom and seatback, when folded, may damage the seat surface or activate the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime.

▽ Operation

If passengers in the rear seats do not fasten their seatbelts while the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not fastened.

NOTE

- If the rear passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened while driv the seatbelt warning system operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

- The warning light will illuminate when driving approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.

seat – When driving approximately between 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 (20 km/h), if the seatbelts are fastened for 50 seconds, the seatbelt warning lights will blin and a warning chime will sour. The chime will make a peep

sound for 15 seconds, and it then will become louder and continue for 35 seconds. The warning light will blink for 50 seconds, then it will illuminate steadily and the chime will stop.

- When driving more than approximately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seatbelts are not fastened for 35 seconds, the warning lights of the unfastened seatbelts will blink and a chime will sound loudly. If the rear seatbelts are not fastened after 35 seconds, the blinking warning light will illuminate steadily and the chime will stop. The warning lights will continue to illuminate until their seatbelts are fastened.

- The warning light will turn off and the warning chime will stop when the seatbelt is fastened.

■ SRS Airbag System Warning Light

mph not

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-

less a technician checks and repair the system as needed, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag will not operate properly in the eve of a collision, which may result in injury.

• Flashing or flickering of the warning light
• No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position
  • Continuous illumination of the warning light
• Illumination of the warning light while driving

For details about the components monitored by the warning light, refer to "SRS Airbag System Monitors" P111.

s■ Front Passenger's Frontal Airbag ON and OFF Indicator Lights

NOTE

For details about the operating conditions of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer to "SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag" P90.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307091

Dual 7.0-inch display models

ON 📁: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
OFF N2 Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

or i- fer g RS PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307090

11.6-inch display models

ON: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
2: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

The front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights show you the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located as shown in the illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, both the ON and OFF indicator lights illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passenger's SRS

- CONTINUED -

frontal airbag determined by the SUBAR advanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light will illuminate while the OFF indicator light will remain off. If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light will remain off while the OFF indicator light will illuminate

With the ignition switch turned to the "ON position, if both the ON and OFF indicate lights remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check period, the system is malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.

CHECK ENGINE

Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator Light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning lig malfunction indicator light illuminates while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/ repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is at least one problem or potential problem somewhere in the emission control system.

If the light illuminates constantly if the light illuminates constantly while driving or does not turn off after the end starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the filler cap is not tightened until it cl If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning /light/malfunction indicator light coming on could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn

ing light/malfunction indicator light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not turn off, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

▼ If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should conform to the following instructions. MineReduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard acceleration.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
• Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-function indicator light may stop blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

■ Charge Warning Light

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or do not turn off after the engine starts, stop engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains illuminate contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

■ Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with th oil pressure warning light on. This may cause serious engine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine running, it may indicate that the engine pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or do not turn off after the engine starts, stop engine at the first safe opportunity and contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

For details about checking the engine level or adding the engine oil, refer to "Engine Oil" P527.

■ Engine Low Oil Level es Warning Light

This light illuminates when the engine oil level decreases to the lower limit. If the warning light illuminates, check the engine oil level on a level surface. When the engine oil level is not within the normal range, refill with engine oil. Refer to "Engine Oil" P527. After adding or changing the engine oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a level surface, the start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute more. Confirm that the warning light has turned off after the engine has started. If the warning light does not turn off after refilling the engine oil, or the light illuminates even though the engine oil level is within the normal range, have the vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The oil level will be detected by system just after turning the ignites switch to the "OFF" position. If the oil level is below the lower limit the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the engine low oil level warning light will turn on.

- When the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, the engine low oil level warning light may not illuminate even if the oil level is below the lower limit to avoid erroneous lighting.

■ AT OIL TEMP Warning AT OIL Light TEMP 3

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is too hot. If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

f▼ Transmission control system warning If the "AT OIL TEMP" warning light flashes after the engine has started, it may indicate that the transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

the Low Tire Pressure ion Warning Light (U.S.- he Spec. Models) when

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate for approximately 2

- CONTINUED -

seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all are properly inflated, the light will go out

Each tire, including the spare (if provide should be checked monthly when cold a inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of different size than the size indicated on vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminate a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation at reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level titestrigger illumination of the TPMS low t.pressure telltale.

d) Your vehicle has also been equipped with and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires of wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

tire

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned on or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to "Flat Tires" P4 When a replacement tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire inflation pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 20 mph (3

km/h). After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to 8 at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. Therefore, be sure to install the specified size for the front and rear tires.

ABS Warning LightABS/(ABS)

CAUTION

• If any of the following condition occur, we recommend that you have the ABS repaired at the available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, but it does not turn off ever after starting the vehicle.
• The warning light illuminates

during driving.

- When the warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.

to The ABS warning light illuminates together with the brake system warning light if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to "Brake System Warning Light" P192.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as described in the following conditions the ABS may be considered normal
- The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off immediately, remaining off.
- The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started, but it turns off while driving.
- The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will turn off.

■ Brake System Warning Light

WARNING

• Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If at all in doubt about whether t brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
• If the brake system warning light illuminates, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" P394.

NOTE

- Even if the brake system warning light illuminates, if the warning life behavior is as described in the following examples, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning.

- The warning light turns off wh the electronic parking brake is applied or released.

- The warning light turns off with the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position again.

- The brake system warning light may illuminate immediately after the engine is started. However, it is no malfunctioning if the warning light turns off after the electronic park brake is released.

- The brake system warning light may illuminate after the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turns off a short period of time.

- When the engine is started while

electronic parking brake is applied/released, the system may judge an abnormal situation and the warning light may illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, turn the ignition switch once to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and then restart the engine. Then, apply/release the electronic parking brake. If the warning light turns off, the system will be restored.

This light has the following functions.

en▼ Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the "MIN" level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the "ON" position and with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in "ON"), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level is below the "MIN" mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning If the warning light remains on even the the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact a SUBARU dealer.
▼ Electronic brake booster warning The brake system warning light illuminat when the electronic brake booster is malfunctioning. If the warning light illuminates, promptly park in a safe location soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.
▼ Electronic parking brake system warning

The brake system warning light illuminates when the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the warning light illuminates, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.

The brake system warning light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" P394.

Frequent operation warning The brake system warning light illuminates and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch is operated too frequently. In this case, the operation of the parking brake switch is restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.

■ Electronic Parking PARK / (P) Brake Indicator Light

▼ Parking brake indicator The light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.
▼ Electronic parking brake system s warning

WARNING

- When you release the electronic parking brake while the engine is running, the electronic parking brake indicator light will turn off. However, if the light still illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe location immediately and have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.

- If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. - If the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" -P394.

NOTE

- When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the electronic parking brake applied, the electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off. - When the electronic parking brake switch is pulled to apply the electronic parking brake while the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates, remains illuminated for approximately 30

- CONTINUED -

seconds and then turns off.
- Even if the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, if the warm light behavior is as described in following examples, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning.
- The indicator light turns off with the electronic parking brake is released.
- The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash immediately at the engine is started. However, it not malfunctioning if the indicator light turns off after the electronic parking brake is released.
- The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash after the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turn off after a short period of time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes when the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the indicator light flashes, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" ingP394.

the ▽ Parking brake apply inhibit waring
The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp soul will be heard if the parking brake switch operated when the parking brake cannot be applied.

ter ▽ Frequent operation warning is The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch operated too frequently. In this case, the operation of the parking brake switch is restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.

NOTE ^15 Wait until the indicator light turns

Auto Vehicle Hold Ind(AVH) cator Light

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light does not illuminate even wh "Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)" is touched to activate the Auto Vehi

Hold function, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning.

This indicator light illuminates when the Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" P396.

■ Low Fuel Warning Light The low fuel warning light illuminates when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6 l/s gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.

■ Door Open Indicator

When any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not fully closed, the door open indicator appears. This function

is effective even if the ignition switch is the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position or key is removed from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

The open door is indicated by the corresponding part of the door open indicator.

Always make sure this indicator does not appear before you start to drive.

■ Engine Hood Open Warning Light

The warning light illuminates if the engine hood is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.

■ Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light appears when the fluid level in the windshield washer fluid tank decreases to the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt (0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).

■ All-Wheel Drive Warn-AWD ing Light

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe location and then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost a pressure for some other reason.

the NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, AWD warning light may flash. Use of temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time necessary. Replace the temporary spare tire with a conventional tire as soon as possible.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of different diameters fitted on wheels or with the air pressure excessive low in any of its tires.

■ Power Steering Warning Light

While the engine is running, this warning light illuminates when a malfunction has been detected in the electric power steering system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Instruments, and Contr

the

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel parking.

- CONTINUED -

• The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.
  At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steel wheel is not operated for a while a the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However if the power steering is operated in non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too frequent that may result in a malfunction of power steering control system.
  ■ Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator Light
  ▼ Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and ABS are inoperative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while driving in this condition but drive carefully and have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU deal as soon as possible.

NOTE

• If the electrical circuit of the Vehi Dynamics Control system itself m functions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) remains fully operational.
• The warning light illuminates when the electronic control system of ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.

• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.
• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.
• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.
• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.
• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.

'NOTE

asle, the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, may be considered normal.

• The warning light illuminates righter after the engine is started but turns off immediately and remains off.
• The warning light illuminates after the engine has started and turns off while the vehicle is subsequently being driven.

The warning light illuminates during driving, but turns off immediately and remains off.

▼ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and during activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

- The light may remain illuminated for a short period of time after the engine has been started, especially

in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should turn off as soon the engine has warmed up.

- The indicator light illuminates when the engine has developed a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

- The light does not turn off even after lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light

The light illuminates when "Vehicle Dynamics Control" is selected to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.

- The light does not illuminate while the system check.

- The light does not turn off even after aYou cannot turn the warning chimes off. period of approximately 2 seconds afterHowever, the volume setting of the outside ashe ignition switch has been turned to warning chime can be changed by a the "ON" position. SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

■ Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped)

graph TD
    A["Central Device"] --> B["Key"]
    C["Left Circular Component"] --> A
    D["Right Circular Component"] --> A
    E["Bottom Right Key"] --> A
    F["Signal icon"] --> A
    G["305972"] --> A

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start system is equipped with a warning chimer and the access key warning indicator in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or the warning indicator appears, take the appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green when starting the engine. This indicates the status that the steering wheel is not released and could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

CAUTION

- When starting the engine again after the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green, if the operation indicator is still flashing in green, there could be a steering lock malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

- When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in orange, contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

• Even when the access key fob is within the operating ranges inside the vehicle, the access key warning for engine start may be provided depending on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions.
• When the access key fob is taken out of the vehicle through an open window, the access key takeout warning or passenger access key takeout warning will not be provided.
  ▼ List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings occurs even if the access key warning indicator does not appear, take the appropriate action.

Inside warning chime	Outside warning chime	Operation indicator on push-button ignition switch	Status Action
Ding, ding ... (intermittent)	—	—	The driver's door is opened while the push-button ignition switch is "ACC" and the select lever is in the "P" position.	Switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF", or close the driver's door.When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".
			The push-button ignition switch is switched to "OFF" while the driver's door is open.	Close the driver's door.
Ding	Short beep (2 seconds)	—	Lockout warning:The doors are locked by following methods when an access key fob is left in the car.The door is closed when the lock lever is inside the lock position.The door is closed when the power door locking switch is in the lock position.	Take out the access key fob from the vehicle and lock the doors.The doors cannot be locked while the access key fob is inside the vehicle.A chirp sound will be heard, and all door be unlocked.
—	Short beep (2 seconds)	—	Access key lock-in warning:The door lock sensor is touched while the push-button ignition switch is "OFF" and the access key fob is inside the vehicle.	Take out the access key fob from the vehicle and lock the doors.the access key fob is inside the vehicle doors cannot be locked.
—	Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)	—	Door ajar warning:The door lock sensor is touched while the ignition switch is in the "OFF" position and one of the doors including the rear gate opened.	Close the doors securely and lock them.If one of the doors including the rear gate opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding	Long beep (60 seconds max.)	—	Power warning:The door lock sensor is touched while your car are carrying the access key fob, the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF" and the select lever is in the position.	Return the access key fob inside the vehicle or switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".If the push-button ignition switch is not switched to "OFF", the doors cannot be locked.
Ding, ding ... (7 seconds)	—	—	Access key warning:The vehicle is driven while the access key is not inside the vehicle.	Carry the access key fob, and drive the vehicle.
Ding — —			Access key warning for engine start:The push-button ignition switch is pressed while the access key fob is not inside the vehicle.	Carry the access key fob, and press the push-button ignition switch.
Ding	Beep, beep, beep (3 times)	—	Access key takeout warning:The driver exits the vehicle with the access key fob and closes the driver's door while push-button ignition switch is in a position "OFF", and get out of the vehicle. other than "OFF" and the select lever is "P" position.
Ding	Beep, beep, beep (3 times)	—	Passenger access key takeout warning:A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the access key fob and closes a door other the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF".	the return the access key fob to inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".
Long beep (continuous)	Long beep (continuous)	—	Access key takeout without "P" position warning:The driver exits the vehicle with the access key fob and closes the driver's door while push-button ignition switch is in a position "OFF" and exit the vehicle. other than "OFF" and the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.	Shift the select lever to the "P" position, switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle.
Long beep (continuous)	—	—	Select lever position warning:Case 1: The engine is turned off by pressing the push-button ignition switch while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.Case 2: The driver's door is opened while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF" and the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.	Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select lever to the "P" position, switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle.Case 2: Shift the select lever to the "P" position, switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle.
Ding — —	The battery of	the access key fob	is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Ding —		Flashes in green (15 seconds max.)	Steering lock warning:The engine start procedure is performed, the steering is still locked.	While turning the steering wheel right and lightly, depress the brake pedal and press push-button ignition switch.
Ding — Flashes in orange			System malfunction warning:A malfunction is detected in the power system or steering lock.	Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately are have the vehicle inspected.

left the

■ Security Indicator Light

This indicator light shows the status of alarm system. It also indicates operation the immobilizer system.

▼ Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operation status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm System" or P146.

▼ Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking in the following conditions.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

• Immediately after the push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• Immediately after the driver's door is opened or closed when all of the following conditions are met.

- The push-button ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

- The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is used (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the power is not switched to "ON" and the security indicator light continues blinking.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

- Approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the above conditions, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be malfunctioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer system, refer to "Immobilizer" P136.

NOTE

- The security indicator light remains off in the following conditions. It means that the matching of the ID code is completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

- While the engine is running - The push-button ignition switch has been turned to the "ON" or

"ACC" position and the driver's door has not been opened or closed

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

• While the engine is running
• For approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position
• When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position

(1) Even if a malfunction occurs, such as the security indicator light flashes irregularly, it will not affect the functionality of the immobilizer system.

■ SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If Equipped)

1 2 [1] S# 306074

SI-DRIVE indicator light 1 Intelligent (I) mode 2 Sport Sharp (S#) mode

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to "SI-DRIVE" P380.

■ Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator

1 2 3 2 306075

1 Upshift indicator
2 Downshift indicator
3 Select lever/gear position indicator

The select lever position is displayed on the indicator.

▼ Upshift/downshift indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the available upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" P378.

■ Turn Signal Indicator ← → Lights

These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to "Replacing Bulbs" P554.

■ High Beam Indicator Light

This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when operating the headlight flasher.

■ High Beam Assist Indcator

This indicator appears when the high beam assist function is activated. For details about the high beam assist function, refer to "High Beam Assist Function" P264.

■ Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning Light

This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate normally.

If this light illuminates while driving or not turn off approximately 3 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position, have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.

■ LED Headlight Warning Light

This light illuminates if the LED headlight malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

■ Steering Responsive SRH Headlight Warning Light

The light illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Responsive Headlight. Refer to "Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)" P267.

■ Headlight Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates under the following conditions.

- The light switch is turned to the "or "D" position.

The light switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

■ Steering Responsive SRH Headlight OFF Indicator OFF Light

This light illuminates when the Steering Responsive Headlight function is off. For details about the on/off setting, refer to "Car settings" P230.

■ Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the front fog lights are illuminated.

■ Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light is illuminated in yellow, there may be a

malfunction in the Auto Start Stop system. When starting the engine again after the Auto Start Stop warning light illuminates, if it is still illuminating, have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

The Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate in yellow if you open the engine hood when the engine has been temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system. In this case, to ensure safety, the engine will not be automatically restarted, even if you release the brake pedal. Use normal operation to restart the engine.

■ Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when "Auto Start Stop" is touched to prevent the Auto Start Stop system from operating. It will turn off when "Auto Start Stop" is touched once more to enable operation of the Auto Start Stop system. For details about the setting, refer to "Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon" P221 (11.6-inch display models) or "Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon" P249 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light does not illuminate when "Auto Start Stop" is touched, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

■ Auto Start Stop Indica- tor Light (Green)

This indicator light illuminates when the engine has been temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn when the engine is restarted.

■ Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator Light

When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator light illuminates when the operating conditions of the Auto Start Stop system are not met. The light will turn off when the vehicle starts driving. Refer to "Non-operational conditions" P402.

■ X-MODE Indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

or Auto as off 1 306189

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) 1 X-MODE indicator

1 2 306190

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 mode 1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator 2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

This indicator appears while X-MODE is activated. It will disappear when X-MOD is deactivated. Refer to "To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE" P389.

■ Hill Descent Control Indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in standby. It will flash while the hill descent control function is operating. It will disappear when the hill descent control function is not available.

■ BSD/RCTA Warning In-☐ Indicator (If Equipped)

This warning indicator appears on the combination meter display (color LCD) when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is malfunctioning for any reason. For further details, refer to "BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator" P419. If this indicator remains displayed, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

■ BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-FF tor (If Equipped)

This indicator appears on the combination meter display (color LCD) when "Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)" is touched to deactivate the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/RCTA is suspended temporarily. For details, refer to "BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator" P418.

■ Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator

When the outside temperature is 37^ F ( 3^ C) or less, the icy road surface warning indicator will illuminate to inform the driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

- The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature in the are around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following condition

• While parking or driving at low speeds
• When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunne
• When starting the engine after being parked for a certain per of time

d. The icy road surface warning indicator should be treated only as guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before doing.

- Once the icy road surface warning indicator appears, it will not disappear unless the outside temperatu has increased to 41^ (5°C) or her.

■ RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)

RAB

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System" P422.

■ RAB OFF Indicator (If RAB OFF Equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is turned OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is suspended temporarily. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System" P422.

■ Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator i- Light (Green) (If iv- Equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is activated. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)" P442.

■ Driver Monitoring System Warning Light (Yellow) (If Equipped)

This warning light illuminates if the Driv Monitoring System malfunctions. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)" P442.

■ Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light (If Equipped)

This indicator illuminates when "Driver Monitoring System" is touched to deactivate Driver Monitoring System. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light" OF P442.

■ Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop Indicator Light (If Equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is temporarily stopped. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light" P442.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops temporarily in the following circumstances.

- The temperature of the Driver Monitoring System unit is high.

■ Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator (If Equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the sonar audible alarm is turned OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" P230.

3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the combination meter display (color LCD) while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the combinations meter display (color LCD) interferes with your ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the combination meter display (color LCD). Also, a warning message will appear on the display if a malfunction is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can be performed.

A MPG 1 2 3 4 5 D 842.0 7452.m 6 7 8 B MPG 1 2 3 4 5 D 842.0 7452.m 6 7 8 307132

Combination meter display (color LCD)

1 Meter information screen (Refer to "Meter Information Screen" P209.)

2 Warning screen (Refer to "Warning Screen" P209.)/Basic screen (Refer to "Basic Screens" P212.)

3 EyeSight screen*

4 Digital speed screen (Refer to "Digital Speed Screen" P215.)

5 Telltale screen (Refer to "Telltale Screen" P211.)

6 Select lever/gear position indicator (Refer to "Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator" P203.)

7 X-MODE indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) (Refer to "X-MODE Indicator (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)" P205.) SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped) (Refer to "SI-DRIVE Indicator Light" P203.)

8 Odometer (Refer to "Odometer" P179.)/Double trip meter (Refer to "Double Trip Meter" P180.)

*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight Owner's Manual.

A: Activating the EyeSight system

B: Deactivating the EyeSight system

■ Basic Operation

1 2 3 307089

Control switches

By operating on of the control switches, the screens can be changed.

If there are some useful messages, such as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current screen, and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. If such a screen is displayed, take proper action according to the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. While the i information reminder is shown on the display, it may be possible to display

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

the warning screen again. To recall the message marked with i on the display, press the i switch on the steering wheel

■ Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen are motion graphic displayed on the combination meter display and center information display upon entering and exiting the vehicle.

When the driver's door is opened and closed after unlocking the door, the welcome screen (opening animation) will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds. When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the combination meter display (color LCD) gradually turns off by showing good-bye screen (ending animation).

NOTE

• The welcome screen and the goodbye screen may differ in the actual words and appearance.

• The basic screen will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is displayed.

• Once the welcome screen appears, takes a certain period of time to display it again.

• If the ignition switch is operated after unlocking the driver's door, the welcome screen will not appear even when the driver's door is opened and closed.
• The welcome screen will disappear when you lock the driver's door by using the remote keyless entry system (all models) or the keyless access function (if equipped) while the welcome screen is displayed.
• The welcome screen including the audio/navigation unit can be set on or off.
• The welcome screen can be set to or off. For details, refer to "Gene settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
• The good-bye screen can be set on or off. For details, refer to “General settings” P225 (11.6-inch display models) or “General settings” P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

Warning Screen

SRS Airbag System

305010

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, it will appear on combination meter display (color LCD). Take the appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.

■ Meter Information Screen

toThe meter information screen can be Genanged. For details, refer to "General settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual -7.0-inch display models).

▼ ECO gauge

- MPG + 306114

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset and the current rate of fuel consumption.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit	Needle position
	“+” side “-” side
MPG Better Poorer
I/100km Poorer		Better

NOTE

• The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication.
• After resetting the trip meter, the average rate of fuel consumption not shown until driving 0.6 miles km). Until that time, the ECO ga does not operate.
  ▼ Clock and outside temperature
  

75°F 7:14PM 306115

This screen displays the clock and outside temperature.

NOTE

• The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" P256.

- You can set the temperature units to be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

▼ Compass (if equipped)

N 306116

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

▼ Driving range on remaining fuel

mi 306117

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining is only a guide. The indicated value differ from the actual driving range the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low warning light illuminates.

■ Telltale Screen

- MPG + 00 00" 0.000 gal O MPH 1 2.0 2 mi 306060

1 Telltale screen

when the corresponding situation occurs, they following telltales will be displayed on the telltale screen.

NOTE

• When there is warning information to display, it will be displayed in warning indicators, starting on the left in ascending order of severity.
• If there are 6 or more warning messages to display, the indicators will be displayed in sequential order

Mark Name Page
	Door open indicator light	194
	Engine hood open warning light	195
AT OIL TEMP	AT OIL TEMP warning light	189
AWD	All-Wheel Drive warning light	195
	LED headlight warning light	204
	High beam assist indicator light	203
SRH OFF	Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light	204
fiv SRH	Steering Responsive Headlight warning light	204
	Engine low oil level warning light	189
RAB	RAB warning light (if equipped)	206
RAB OFF	RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)	206
B_A	BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)	206
	BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)	206
	Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)	204
	Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light	204
	Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)	205
	Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator light	205
	Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light	204
	Windshield washer fluid warning light	195
	Hill descent control indicator light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	205

Mark Name	Page
	Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green) (if equipped)	206
	Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow) (if equipped)	207
	Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light (if equipped)	207
	Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped)	207
	Icy road surface warning light	206

■ Basic Screens

By operating the or switch on the steering wheel, you can change the screen that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

AVG A12.7MPG

100mi

306203

AVG: Average fuel consumption

Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

25.3MPG 100mi 305013

Current fuel consumption

Driving range on remaining fuel

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining is only a guide. The indicated value differ from the actual driving range the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low warning light illuminates.

Driving information screen:

9h37' 200mi 306238

Journey time

Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (t) time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position) away journey distance (the distance that has been driven since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position). fuel

Auto Start Stop screen:

A 01'10" 1 gal 306239

(A): The total amount of time that the engine was stopped by means of the Auto Start Stop system (B): The total amount of fuel saved due to the engine being stopped by the Auto Start Stop system

The indicated values are calculated from the most recent reset of the currently displayed trip meter to the current time. The indication ranges are as follows.

• Total amount of time: from 00'00" to 9999h59'59"
  ● Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 gal to 9999.999 gal

NOTE

- When the trip meter is reset, the corresponding accumulated time and the amount of fuel saving are

- CONTINUED -

also reset.

- The time spent with the engine stopped by means of the Auto St Stop system is also added to the journey time.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

35 33 [psi] 35 33

306204

This screen displays each tire pressure. When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire and the tire pressure will be displayed on the screen in yellow.

NOTE

• The tire pressure values are displayed several minutes after driving.
• You can set the tire pressure units. For details about setting the units, refer to "General settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "Gen-

eral settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch Navigation screen (if equipped): display models).

StarOnce the tire pressure monitoring the system detects the low tire pressure, the tire pressure values will display in yellow until the system detects the normal tire pressure.

• Immediately adjust the tire pressure when the warning light illuminates. When the tire pressure monitoring system detects the adjusted tire pressure, the warning light will turn off and the tire pressure values will turn to white.
• For information about the specified value of the air pressure, refer to "Tires" P572.

Compass screen (if equipped):

- N - 306118

re, y the 9th Ave 600 ft ← n ill 306168

When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information. For details about the navigation system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

'The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Audio screen:

FM 98.7 306119

The audio screen shows the status of audio information. For details about the audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Clock and outside temperature screen:

1:19 OUT TEMP 74 °F 306120

This screen displays the clock and outs temperature.

NOTE

• The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" P256.
• You can set the temperature units to be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

■ Digital Speed Screen

LIMIT 25 — 1 2 — 10 MPH 306169

de1 Speed limit indicator (if equipped) 2 Vehicle speed This screen displays the current vehicle speed.

3-8. Center Information Display (CID)

WARNING

Always pay attention to safe driving when operating the center information display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the center information display is disturbing your awareness and ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing operations on the display. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so could result in an accident.

Features

All information is displayed on the center information display, including vehicle settings, vehicle status, navigation system (i equipped) operation, audio operation, and climate control operation.

Items	Page for 11.6-inch display models	Page for dual 7.0-inch display models
Interruption screen	217
Vehicle status and maintenance information	218 250
Vehicle settings 225 243/247
Climate control operations	225 243
Front View Monitor (if equipped)/Rear view camera	405/408
eNavigation system	Refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
Audio/telephone	Refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
EyeSight	Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

The center information display can also be fused to set and initialize the center information display itself.

NOTE

• When the vehicle is in motion, certain functions and selections may not be available.
• The language and units for both center information display and the

combination meter display (color LCD) can be changed. For details about language settings, refer to "General settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models). For details about unit settings, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

- The images displayed in this Owner's Manual are sample images. The actual image may vary depending on the region and vehicle specifications.

■ Welcome Screen

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen are motion graphic displayed on the combination meter display and center information display upon entering and exiting the vehicle.

When the driver's door is opened and closed, the welcome screen will appear for a short time.

NOTE

- The welcome screen will disappear when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is shown.

• The welcome screen can be turned on or off. For details, refer to "General settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
• For a certain period of time after welcome screen has once appeared it may not appear again even when the driver's door is opened and closed. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Good-Bye Screen

The good-bye screen will be displayed under the following conditions.

• The driver's door is opened after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position.
• 3 minutes have passed after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position with the driver's door closed.
• 10 minutes have passed when the hands-free phone is used after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position.
• The battery voltage is low when the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position.

■ Interruption Screen Useful messages, such as reminders, weather information (if equipped) and traffic information (if equipped) may inter- rupt the current screen and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. Take the proper action according to the message.

■ Touch Screen Operations

The center information display has a touch screen. Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly.

▼ Touch

Diagram showing hand positioning inside a vehicle's door panel with an inset highlighting the left side of the door panel.

Quickly touch and release once.

Drag

Diagram showing hand gesture application on car interior with directional arrows and a magnified view of hand movement

Touch the screen and move the screen the desired position.

▼ Swipe

Diagram showing hand positioning and tool application on a vehicle door panel, with magnified inset highlighting the motion direction.

Quickly move the screen by swiping with

your finger.

NOTE

Swipe operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.

■ 11.6-Inch Display Models (If Equipped)

NOTE

For dual 7.0-inch display models, refer to "Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models" P242.

▼ Touch screen

72 F 2:01 No Audio Playing Pop Radio Media Phone Apo MySubaru Settings Get Info 1 9 8 5 6 7 ON/OFF 307087

1 HOME icon (Refer to "HOME icon" P225.)

2 Status bar (Refer to "Status bar" P218.)

3 Information bar (Refer to "Information bar" P219.)

4 Main screen (Refer to "Main screen" P225.)

5 Manage device icon (Refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual)

6 Driver profiles icon (Refer to "Driver profiles icon" P225.)

7 Climate control screen (Refer to "Climate control screen" P225.)

8 Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon (Refer to "Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon" P221.)

9 Car settings icon (Refer to "Car settings icon" P223.)

While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the touch panel will activate.

Status bar

The outside temperature and clock are displayed on the status bar.

NOTE

- The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.

• While parking or driving at low speeds
• When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel)

- When starting the engine after being parked for a certain per of time

• You can set the temperature units be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer "Car settings" P230.
• The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" P256.
• Touch the clock on the status bar display the clock setting screen. Refer to "Clock" P256.
• For details about Bluetooth device information, refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Information bar Swipe the information bar or touch on the information bar to switch the item displayed.

toAudio screen:

to Bluetooth Unknown Title Unknown Artist 306127

The screen of the currently selected audio source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Navigation screen (models with navigation system):

< W 37th St 306170

The directions to the destination are displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the navigation system, the compass orientation, street name and speed limit remain displayed on the screen.

Favorite screen:

Compress Weather 6H Calendar MON 306128

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the following items.

Item Details
	Engine coolant temperature
	Engine oil temperature
	Average vehicle speed
	Accelerator opening ratio
	Vehicle posture
	Direction of the vehicle*
	Weather information for the next three hours*
	Weather information for the next six hours*
	Posted speed limit of the road you are currently driving on†
	Calendar
	Driver Monitoring System* information and the average fuel consumption of driver

Item Details
	Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE

Some items may not be shown depending on the model and specifications.

The items shown on the favorite screen can be changed. For details, refer to "Favorite Widgets" P236.

Weather information screen (if equipped):

Detroit,MI 52°F 306218

NOTE

• When all of the following conditions are satisfied, weather information is displayed.
• The vehicle is equipped with an audio and navigation system for SiriusXM satellite radio.
• The SiriusXM satellite radio subscription is active.
• The weather forecast for the set destination remains displayed until a new destination is set or until destination is reached.
• Depending on the reception timing of XM, the weather information m be delayed.

X-MODE screen (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness):

X MODE OFF ON 306129

Models with 1 mode

X MODE SNOW DIRTY NORMAL DEEP SNOW MUD the 306171

Models with 2 modes X-MODE information is displayed on the screen.

Also, X-MODE can be switched to a different mode on the screen.

Main screen

For details about the following menu, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

• Radio
  • Media
• Phone
• Map
• Apps
  • My Subaru
  • SUBARU STARLINK
• Add Shortcut

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon

1 307088

1 Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

- CONTINUED -

Touching “A” deactivates the Auto Start Stop system and turns off the Auto Start Stop indicator (green) on the screen. Touching “A” again activates the Auto Start Stop system and turns on the Auto Start Stop indicator (green). Refer to “To turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system” P403.

Auto Vehicle Hold icon

Car Help Display Off Smart Mode Auto Mobile Map Remote Windows Control DVD Spectral 307241

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on and off, touch the "Auto Vehicle Hold" icon. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn off. Refer to "To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function" P397.

NOTE

- When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is on, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light on the combination meter turns on. The "Auto Vehicle Hold" indicator also turns on at the same time. - When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light on the combination meter turns off. The "Auto Vehicle Hold" indicator also turns off at the same time. - For light on the combination meter illuminates. - The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon has been touched again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. - Refer to "To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System" P387.

▽ Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

Car Map Display Off Water Mode Auto Vehicle Mode Vaccine Camera Air Draincut 307242

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on and off, touch the "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon. When the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is turned off during engine operation

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illumi-

ates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon has been touched again to

reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off.

Refer to "To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System" P387.

NOTE

- When Vehicle Dynamics Control is on, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter turns off. The "Vehicle Dynamics Control" indicator turns on at the same time. - When Vehicle Dynamics Control is off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter turns on. The "Vehicle Dynamics Control" indicator turns off at the same time.

▽ Display Off

Activation of the display off mode:

Car Anti Chronic Heart Motion Anti-Wheel Tact Anti-Wheel Cavity Control 307244

1. Touch "Display Off".

Deactivation of the display off mode:

Pure technical diagram of a mechanical component with no text, numbers, or symbols

1. Touch the display or push the tem-

perature control button.

Press and hold the volume knob to turn the screen back on. 307149

1. Press and hold the volume knob to turn the screen back on.

▽ Car settings icon

Touch to display the items that are changeable while driving.

Item		Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu 2nd	menu
Vehicle Control	Vehicle Dynamics Control	ON/OFF 387 235
	X-MODE*1	Models with 1 mode: ON/OFFModels with 2 modes: Normal, Deep Snow/Mud, Dirt	Snow/ 389 235
	Cruise Control Acceleration	Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic *	2	—
	Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)	ON/OFF 396 235
	Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH)	ON/OFF 267 235
	Auto Start Stop ON/OFF 403 235
Driving Assistance	Pre-Collision Braking	Setting ON/Setting OFF	*2	—
	Lane Departure	All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
	Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)*	ON/OFF 418 235
	Driver Monitoring System*1	ON/OFF 434 235
More Settings	Warning Volume Min/Mid/Max 417, 432 and *		2	—
	Units	km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon	179 and 207	235

*1: If equipped
*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

▽ Driver profiles icon

Touch driver profiles icon) to confirm the driver's information. For details, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

▼ HOME icon

Touch (HOME) to display the top menu

▽ Climate control screen

The climate control status is shown on screen.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 60 AUTO A/C 60 ON/OFF < 10 A/C 9 307085

1 Driver's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)
2 Set temperature indicator (driver's side)
3 Airflow mode
4 Climate control mode
5 Air inlet selection
6 SYNC mode indicator

7 Set temperature indicator (passenger's side)
8 Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)
9 Customizable icon
10 Fan speed control
11 Climate control ON/OFF icon

When operating the climate control system, the main screen switches to the climate control screen. For details, refer to "Climate Control Panel" P309.

Main screen

File Tools Mode Phone Apps 307079

To display the main screen, touch (HOME).

In this Owner's Manual, the following settings will be explained. For details about other items, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

- "Settings" → "General"

• "Settings" → "Car"
• "Car Info"

▽ General settings

Set the time and display general items.

General Sound Navigation Clock Display Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Security Information Reminder Screen Violet Mode

307086

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. Select the preferred menu.

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General	Clock	Time Setting*2	AUTO/Manual	256	256
		Time Setting	Sync With Phone/Manual
		Time Zone	AUTO/Pacific/Mountain/Central/Eastern/Atlantic/Newfoundland/Hawaii/Alaska		235
		Daylight Saving Time*	AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF 235
		Clock Format 12H/24H 235
	Display	Display Off Turn the screen	off. — 235
		Brightness Dial ON/OFF 181	235
		Brightness/Contrast	Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the display.	235	235
	Wi-Fi	Wi-Fi	ON/OFF	*6	—
		Connected to:	Select the registered devise.
		Available Wi-Fi Networks	Add
		Wi-Fi Protected Setup	PIN Setup/Push Button Setup
		Registered Wi-Fi Networks	—
	Wi-Fi Security Information	Wi-Fi Security Information (AP mode)	—
General	Wi-Fi Hotspot	Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF		*7	—
		Wi-Fi name (SSID): —
		Security Type: —
		Password: —
		Broadcast Frequency: —
		SSID Broadcast ON/OFF
		Connected Devices: —
	Reminder Screen	Maintenance ON/OFF		217	235
		Birthday	ON/OFF		235
		Anniversary	ON/OFF		235
	Valet Mode	Passcode Setting®	Keyboard: Enter New Passcode	259	235
		Activate Valet Mode	Keyboard: Enter Your Passcode
		Change Passcode	Keyboard: Change Passcode
	Meter Screen	Gauge Initial Movement	ON/OFF	179	235
		Meter Information Screen	Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/Compass*4/Gas Range	209	235
		Turn by Turn Screen Interruption*1	ON/OFF	212	235
	Camera	Rear Camera Delay Control	ON/OFF	409	235
		Steering Angle Lines	ON/OFF	411	235
General	Climate Control Customize Climate Button		A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation/SYNC	316 235
	Temperature Unit °F/°C — 218 235
	Language — English/Français/Espanol 207 and 216		235
	Tire Pressure Units*	— kPa/PSi	212 235
	Home Screen Short-cuts	— ON/OFF	*	6	235
	Welcome Screen	— ON/OFF	209 235
	Goodbye Screen	— ON/OFF	209 235
	Favorite Widgets	— Set a favorite widget from the list.	219 236
	Birthday List	— Set a birthday.	217 236
	Anniversary List	—	Set an anniversary day.	217	237
	Periodic Rest Notification*1	— ON/OFF		*6	—
	Software Update	Update	Check if a new software update
		Automatically Check for Updates	ON/OFF
		Automatically Download Updates	ON/OFF
		Default	—
	SUBARU STARLINK Apps Recovery	— OK/Cancel
	SUBARU STARLINK Auto Connect	—	ON/OFF
General	Factory Data Reset —	Reset/Cancel		*6	—
	System Information —	—
	Free/Open Source Software Information	—	—

*1: Models with navigation system
*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK without navigation system
*3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK or navigation system
*4: Models without navigation system
*5: If equipped
*6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.
*7: For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.
*8: Displayed until valet mode is set.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

▽ Car settings

Perform the EyeSight system setting and vehicle setting.

EyeSight ① EyeSight Assist Monitor ② Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) Driver Monitoring System Keyless Entry System ① Defogood 15 minutes 307084

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. Select the preferred menu.

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu	2nd menu 3rd menu
Car	EyeSight	Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF		*3	—
		Lane Departure	All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
		Cruise Control Acceleration	Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic
		Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound	ON/OFF
		Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor	ON/OFF
		Select Drive on Left/Drive on Right	Right Lane/Left Lane
	EyeSight Assist Monitor	Red Indicator ON/OFF
		Yellow Indicator ON/OFF
		Green Indicator ON/OFF
	Reverse Automatic Braking*	Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF	422 235
	Driver Monitoring System*	Driver Monitoring System	ON/OFF	434	235
		Repeat Facial Scan	Perform the user recognition.		237
		User Recognition	ON/OFF		235
		Automatically Retract Seat on Entry	ON/OFF		235
Car	Driver Monitoring System*	Register User Register the user.		434	237
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Re-register the driver's position.		237
		Delete Driver Position	Delete the registered driver's position.		237
		Delete User Delete the registered user. 237
		Delete All Users Delete all registered users. 237
	Keyless Entry System	Audible Signal*2	ON/OFF 134 and 139 235
		Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 134 and 140 235
		Driver Door Unlock*	Driver Door Only/All 128 235
		Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*	Rear Gate/Trunk Only, All	128 235
	Defogger	—	15 minutes/Continuous	275	235
	Interior Light	—	10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/OFF	331 235
	Auto Light Sensor	Light Sensitivity	Min/Low/Mid/Max	261 235
		Wiper Link	ON/OFF 262 235
Car	Welcome Lighting	Approaching Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF	262	235
		Leaving Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF		235
	One-Touch Lane Changer —	ON/OFF 270 235
	Auto Door Lock/Unlock	Auto Door Lock	Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out of PARK/OFF	144	235
		Auto Door Unlock	Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/Shift into or out of PARK/OFF		235
	Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 60 235
	Door Mirror Setting*	Auto Electric Folding ON/OFF	302 235
		Reverse Tilt	ON/OFF 300 235
	Power Rear Gate*	Power Rear Gate Memory	ON/OFF 162 235
	Vehicle Dynamics Control	— ON/OFF 387 235
	Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)	— ON/OFF 396 235
	Auto Start Stop	— ON/OFF 403 235
	Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)*1	— ON/OFF 418	235
	X-MODE*1	—	Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF Models with 2 modes: Normal, Snow/Dirt, Deep Snow/Mud	389 235
	Steering Responsive Head-lights (SRH)	— ON/OFF 267			235
Car	Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 417, 432 and *			3	235
	Units —		km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon	179 and 207	235

*1: If equipped
*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.
However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a defecting jam, etc.
*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

▼ How to select items on the screen ▽ Selecting

ON/OFF setting

Reminder Screen Maintenance Birthday Anniversary

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON or OFF.

Mater Information Screen Eco Gauge OUT TEMP/Clock Compass Gas Range 306134

Example

Touch the preferred item.

▼ How to set items on the screen

▼ Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the center information display.

NOTE

"Brightness" can only be adjusted when "Brightness Dial" is off. Refer "General settings" P225.

1. Touch Ⓞ(HOME).
2. → Ⓦ°(Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Display"
5. → "Brightness/Contrast"

RACE Brightness/Contrast Brightness 1 11 Contrast G 1 11 Default 306135

1. Drag ⬆ adjust the brightness and contrast.

Touch "Default" to revert to the factory setting.

▼ Favorite Widgets

Favorite Widgets Please select the icon you want to change. Then, choose your favorite widget from the list below. Access Fuel Consumption Angle 306136

The menu on the favorite screen can be customized.

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Favorite Widgets"
5. Select the icon of the display position.
6. Select the display item.

▽ Birthday List

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, a message will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. This function can be set to on or off by "Reminder Screen". For details, refer to "General settings" P225.

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Birthday List"

Birthday List Edit Add XXXX-B/7 306137

1. → "Add"

Enter Name 4/10 XXXXX 306138

1. Enter the name.
2. → "Next"

Enter Month and Day 03 / 30 OK 306139

1. Enter the date.
2. → "OK"

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be stored.

Anniversary List

The procedure for setting an anniversary is the same as "Birthday List" P236, except that in step 4 "Anniversary List" is selected

▽ Driver Monitoring System (if equipped)

The Driver Monitoring System settings can be changed.

For setting method for the following menu on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to 7 "ON/OFF setting" P235.

• Driver Monitoring System
• User Recognition
• Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

Repeat Facial Scan:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Repeat Facial Scan"

Scan again? OK Cancel 306140

→ "OK"

While seated in the driver's seat, face forward and wait for a few moments. When the scan is completed, the completion screen is displayed on the center information display.

Register User:

1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle so that you are seated in the correct driving posture.

NOTE

- Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration,

may be disrupted. Refer to "Power Seat" P32 or "Outside Mirrors" P299.

- If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle will not be saved.

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ°(Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Register User"

Register User 1.Driver A 2.Driver B 3. 4.Driver D 5.Driver E

306141

1. Select the preferred user from the list.

Register User Information. Adjust seat and door mirror positions, then press "Set". Set Cancel 306142

1. → "Set"
2. While seated in the driver's seat, face forward and wait for a few moments.

User 3 registered. Input name and select icon.

When the screen changes, the registration of the facial scan is completed.

graph TD
    A["Step 1: Initial measurement"] --> B["Step 2: Patient monitoring"]
    B --> C["Step 3: Observation of patient in bottle"]
    C --> D["Step 4: Patient viewing car with arrow indicating direction"]
    D --> E["End: Observation on car with arrow indicating direction"]

A Forward direction
B Display direction
1 Face forward.
2 Do not lower your chin.
3 Face the display.
*: Display

NOTE

• If user registration cannot be performed, turn your face forward as shown in the illustration, then turn to the display.
• There are some cases where user registration cannot be registered properly. In those cases, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P434.
• If "Unable to register. Try again." appears, repeat the procedure beginning from step 5.

Enter Name XXXXX 4/10 306138

1. Enter the name.
2. → "Next"

OK Select Icon Set

306144

1. Select the preferred icon.
2. → "Set"

NOTE

• An existing user can be overwritten by selecting a registered number. When a user is registered by overwriting, the individual fuel economy data is reset.
• When "User Recognition" is set to OFF, user registration cannot be selected.

Update Seat and Mirror Position:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Update Seat and Mirror Position"

Update seat and mirror position. Adjust seat and door mirror positions, then press "Set". Set Cancel

306145

NOTE

- Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, i may be disrupted. Refer to "Power Seat" P32 or "Outside Mirrors" P299.

- If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle will not be saved.

Delete Driver Position:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Delete Driver Position"

Delete driver position. OK? Yes No

306146
it6. → "Yes"

Delete User:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓜ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Delete User"

Delete User 1.XXXXX 2.Driver B 3.Driver C 4. 5. 306147

1. Select the preferred user from the list.

Delete User 3. OK? Yes No 306148

1. → "Yes"

Delete All Users:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Delete All Users"

Delete all users. OK? Yes No 306149

1. → "Yes"

▼ Car information screen

1. Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.

Play Radio Phone Airbus Airbus Settings Eco 100 307083

1. → (Info)

∇ Driving Statistics screen

1 Driving Statistics Maintenance 2 3 4 5 307171

1 Driving Statistics
2 Steering angle
3 Running condition
4 Vehicle posture
5 Telltale screen

This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status functions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

• The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture.
• For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, when X-MODE has been turned on, the screen of the center information display will be changed

to the X-MODE screen.

- The vehicle posture angle varies not only due to the angle of the road surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt caused by the occupants, cargo, and acceleration or deceleration.

▼ Maintenance screen

Driving Statistics Maintenance Auto Manual Engine Oil Load - Oil Filter Load - Tires Load - Maintenance Schedule Load - Reset 307082

Maintenance reminders can be set. Engine Oil change reminder:

1. Touch "Maintenance" from the 2nd menu in the car info screen.
2. → ⚙ (Engine Oil)
3. Select "Notification Date" or "Notification Distance" of the reminder.
4. → "Set"
5. → ✗

Oil Filter change reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Oil Filter" item in step 2.

Tires rotation reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Tires" item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Maintenance Schedule" item in step 2.

NOTE

- Touch "Reset" to reset each setting.

- Touch "Update" to revert to the default value.

■ Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models (If Equipped)

NOTE

For 11.6-inch display models, refer to "11.6-Inch Display Models" OF P218.

▼ Main screens

12:14 Apps Settings Phone SUSARU STARLINK Radio Media RADIO MEDIA PHONE APPS Vehicle Control Driving Assistance More Settings Auto Start Stop 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF A/C 307157

A Upper display
B Lower display

1 HOME button (Refer to "HOME button" P242.)

2 Status bar (Refer to "Status bar" P242.)

3 Upper main screen (Refer to "Setting of the upper display" P243.)
4 Lower main screen (Refer to "Setting of the lower display" P247.)
5 Climate control screen (Refer to "Climate control screen" P243.)

While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the touch panel will activate.

▼ HOME button

Press (HOME) to display the top menu.

▽ Status bar

The driver profiles icon, outside temperature and clock are shown on the display.

NOTE

- The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.

• While parking or driving at low speeds
• When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel)

• When starting the engine after being parked for a certain period of time

• You can set the temperature units be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer "Car Settings icon" P250.

• The clock can be shown in either hour display or 24-hour display. details about the setting, refer to "Clock" P256.
• Touch the clock on the status bar display the clock setting screen. Refer to "Clock" P256.

▽ Upper display

For details about items, refer to "Setting the upper display" P243.

For details about the following menu, re to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

• Radio
  • Media
• Phone
• Apps
  • SUBARU STARLINK
• Add Shortcut

▼ Lower display

For details about the setting items, refer "Setting of the lower display" P247. If this screen changes to the climate control screen, refer to "Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models" P310.

to ▽ Climate control screen

to 12- For 1 2 3 4 5 6 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF > A/C 9 8 7 of 307156

1 Driver's seat heater icon (if equipped)
2 Set temperature indicator
3 Climate control mode
4 Airflow mode
5 Air inlet selection
6 Front passenger's seat heater icon (if equipped)
7 Customizable icon
8 Fan speed control
9 Climate control ON/OFF icon

When operating the climate control system, the main screen switches to the climate control screen. For details about climate control operation, refer to "Climate Control Panel" P309.

▼ Setting of the upper display

In this Owner's Manual, the settings of the "General" menu will be explained. For details about other items, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

▽ General settings

The "General" menu is used to set the display, language and time.

1. Press ⓗ (HOME).

12:14 70°F Apps Settings Phone SUSARU STAWLINK Radio Media RADIO MEDIA PHONE APPS 306155

1. Touch ⚙ (Settings).
2. → "General"
3. Select the preferred menu.

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu	2nd menu 3rd menu
General	Clock	Time Setting Sync With Phone/Manual		256	256
		Clock Format 12H/24H 257
	Display	Display Off Turn the screen off. — 253
		Brightness Dial ON/OFF — 253
		Brightness/Contrast	Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen display and camera display.	— 253
	Reminder Screen	Maintenance ON/OFF		217	253
		Birthday	ON/OFF		253
		Anniversary	ON/OFF		253
	Valet Mode	Passcode Setting*	Keyboard: Enter New Pass-code	259	235
		Activate Valet Mode	Keyboard: Enter Your Pass-code
		Change Passcode	Keyboard: Change Passcode
	Meter Screen	Gauge Initial Movement	ON/OFF	179	253
		Meter Information Screen	Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/Gas Range	209	253
General	Camera	Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 409 253
		Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF	411 253
	Climate Control Customize Climate Button		A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation	316 253
	Temperature Unit °F/°C —	242 253
	Language	—	English/Français/Espanol	207 and 216	253
	Tire Pressure Units*	—	kPa/PSi	212 253
	Home Screen Shortcuts	—	ON/OFF	3*	253
	Welcome Screen	—	ON/OFF 209 253
	Goodbye Screen	—	ON/OFF 209 253
	Birthday List	—	Set a birthday.	217 254
	Anniversary List	—	Set an anniversary day.	217	254
	SUBARU STARLINK Apps Recovery	—	OK/Cancel	*3	—
	SUBARU STARLINK Auto Connect	—	ON/OFF
	Factory Data Reset	—	Reset/Cancel
General	System Information — —			*3	—
	Free/Open Source Software Information	—	—

*1: Displayed until valet mode is set.
*2: If equipped
*3: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

▽ Display Off

Activation of the display off mode:

OUT TEMP 32 °F 0:04 Display Off Valet Mode Add Shortcut 307260

1. Touch "Display Off".

Deactivation of the display off mode:

Top-down technical diagram of a vehicle dashboard layout with no visible text or symbols

1. Touch the display or push the temperature control button.

OUT TEMP 32 F 0:04 Press and hold the volume knob to turn the screen back on. 307261

1. Press and hold the volume knob to the screen back on.

▼ Setting of the lower display

Touch (car Settings). Refer to "Car Settings icon" P250.

This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status of the functions. Refer to "Driving Statistics" P254.

Set the timing of the maintenance. Refer to "Maintenance" P255.

▽ Vehicle settings while driving

MODE Vehicle Control Driving Assistance More Settings Auto Start Stop 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF > A/C 307245

Touch (X-MODE), (Vehicle Control),

(Driving Assistance), (More Settings), or (Auto Start Stop) to display the items that are changeable while driving.

turn

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu	2nd menu 3rd menu
X-MODE*1	— — ON/OFF 389 253
Vehicle Control	Vehicle Dynamics Control —	ON/OFF 387 253
	Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) —	ON/OFF 396 253
	Cruise Control Acceleration —		Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic	*2	—
Driving Assistance	Pre-Collision Braking — Setting ON/Setting OFF			*2	—
	Lane Departure —		All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
Auto Start Stop	— — ON/OFF 403 253
More Settings	Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max *			2	253
	Units —		km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon	179 and 207	253
	Auto Start Stop	— ON/OFF 403			253

*1: For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness
*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon

MODE Vehicle Control Driving Assistance More Settings Auto Start Stop 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF 307172

1 Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

Touching “A” deactivates the Auto Start Stop system and turns off the Auto Start Stop indicator (green) on the screen. Touching “A” again activates the Auto Start Stop system and turns on the Auto Start Stop indicator (green). Refer to “T turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system” P403.

Auto Vehicle Hold icon

Car Settings Driving Statistics Maintenance Auto Vehicle Hold Vehicle Dynamics Control AUTO A/C ON/OFF A/C 307258

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function is and off, touch the "Auto Vehicle Hold" in. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicates light will turn off. Refer to "To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function" P397.

NOTE

• When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is on, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light on the combination meter turn for light on the combination meter illuminates. Refer to "To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System" P387.
• When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light on the combination meter turns off. The "Auto Vehicle Hold" OFF indicator light turns off.

indicator also turns off at the same time.

▽ Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

Car Settings Driving Statistics Maintenance Auto Vehicle Hold Vehicle Dynamics Controls 60 AUTO ON/OFF A/C 307259

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on and off, touch the "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is turned off during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illumi-

- CONTINUED -

NOTE

• When Vehicle Dynamics Control is on, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter turns off. The "Vehicle Dynamics Control" indicator turns on at the same time.
• When Vehicle Dynamics Control is off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter turns on. The "Vehicle Dynamics Control" indicator turns off at the same time.

▽ Car Settings icon

Car Settings Driving Statistics Maintenance Vehicle Dynamics Control 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF > A/C 307169

1. Press (HOME).
2. Touch 📄 (Car Settings).

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu	2nd menu 3rd menu
Car Settings	EyeSight	Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF *		1	—
		Lane Departure	All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF	*1	—
		Cruise Control Acceleration	Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic	*1	—
		Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound	ON/OFF *	1	253
		Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor	ON/OFF *	1	253
		Select Drive on Left/Drive on Right	Right Lane/Left Lane *	1	—
	EyeSight Assist Monitor	Red Indicator ON/OFF		*1	—Yellow I
		Green Indicator	ON/OFF
	Keyless Entry System	Hazard Warning Flasher	ON/OFF	140	253
		Audible Signal	ON/OFF	134 and 139	253
	Defogger	—	15 minutes/Continuous	275	253
	Interior Light	—	10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/OFF	331	253

insturments and Controls

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu	2nd menu 3rd menu
Car Settings	Auto Light Sensor	Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 261 253
		Wiper Link ON/OFF 262 253
	Welcome Lighting	Approaching Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF	262	253
		Leaving Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF		253
	One-Touch Lane Changer —	ON/OFF 270 253
	Auto Door Lock/Unlock	Auto Door Lock	Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out of PARK/OFF	144	253
		Auto Door Unlock	Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/Shift into or out of PARK/OFF		253
	Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF		60 253
	Vehicle Dynamics Control	— ON/OFF 387 253
	Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)	— ON/OFF 396 253
	Auto Start Stop	— ON/OFF 403 253
	X-MODE*2	— ON/OFF 389 253
	Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max *			1	253
	Units	—	km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon	179 and 207	253

*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
*2: If equipped

NOTE

Touch ⓘ to display the explanation of the items.

▼ How to select items on the screen ▽ Selecting

ON/OFF setting

Vehicle Control Vehicle Dynamics Control Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) 306157

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON or OFF.

SACK Warning Volume Min Mid Max 306158

Example

Touch the preferred setting.

▼ How to set items on the screen

▼ Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the center information display.

NOTE

"Brightness" can only be adjusted when "Brightness Dial" is off. Refer "General settings" P243.

30

1. Touch △(HOME).
2. → Ⓠ°(Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Display"
5. → "Brightness/Contrast"

Brightness/Contrast Brightness 11 1 11 Contrast 6 1 11 Default 306159

1. Drag ⬆ adjust the brightness and contrast.

Touch "Default" to revert to the factory setting.

▽ Birthday List

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching a message will be displayed when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. This function can be set to on off by the "Reminder Screen". For details, refer to "General settings" P243.

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Birthday List"

Birthday List No Current Birthdays Add To add a birthday, please select "Add" and choose the date and name for the list.

1. → "Add"

Enter Name D/10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Q W E R T Y U I O P A S D F G H J K L ♠ Z X C V B N M a#U ## Next 306161

1. Enter the name.
2. → "Next"

Enter Month and Day 01 / 01 OK 306162

1. Enter the date.
2. → "OK"

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be stored.

Anniversary List

The procedure for setting an anniversary is the same as "Birthday List" P254, except that in step 4 "Anniversary List" is selected.

▼ Driving Statistics

Driving Statistics 1 3 2 306163

1 Steering angle
2 Vehicle posture
3 Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status of the functions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

• The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture.
• For Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, when X-MODE has been turned on, the screen of the center information display will be changed to the X-MODE screen.
• The vehicle posture angle varies not only due to the angle of the road surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt caused by the occupants, cargo, and acceleration or deceleration.

▼ Maintenance

Maintenance Engine Oil Tires 8/23/XXXX Last 0 miles --/--/---- Last----miles Oil Filter Maintenance Schedule --/--/---- Last----miles --/--/---- Last----miles Reset

306164

Maintenance reminders can be set.

Engine Oil setting:

1. Touch 🔒 (Maintenance).
2. → ⚙ (Engine Oil)
3. Select "Notification Date" or "Notification Distance" of the reminder.
4. → "Set"
5. → ✗

Oil Filter setting:

The setting procedure is the same as "Engine Oil" setting, but touch the "Oil Filter" item in step 2.

Tires setting:

The setting procedure is the same as "Engine Oil" setting, but touch the "Tires" item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as "Engine Oil" setting, but touch the "Maintenance Schedule" item in step 2.

NOTE

• Touch "Reset" to reset each setting.
• Touch "Update" to revert to the default value.

3-9. Clock

For models with a genuine SUBARU navigation and/or audio system, the clock can be adjusted using either auto mode manual mode.

■ Setting the Clock Manually

▼ Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

8:14 7:9 Apps Settings Phone TV START STARLINK Radio Media RADIO MEDIA PHONE APPS 307170

1. Press (NOME).
2. Touch ⏱° (Settings).
3. → "General"
4. → "Clock"
5. → "Time Setting"

Back Spec with Phone Manual Time Setting 1 / 1 / 2018 12 : 24 AM OK 306122

1. → "Manual"
2. → ∧ or ∨
3. → "OK"

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also displayed by touching the clock on status bar.

▼ 11.6-inch display models

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Home Radio Media Phone App MySunset Settings Car incl 307079

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ°(Settings)
   e4. → "General"
   the → "Clock"
3. → "Time Setting"

Time Setting AUTO Manual 8 / 6 / 20XX 2 : 12 PM OK

307080

1. → "Manual"
2. → ∧ or ∨
3. → "OK"

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also displayed by touching the clock on status bar.

■ Setting the Clock Automatically

▼ Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

0:12:49 79 P 12:14 Apps Settings Phone SIRARU STARLINK Radio Hydra

307170

be. Press (HOME). the. Touch (Settings).

1. → "General"
2. → "Clock"
3. → "Time Setting"

BACK Sync With Phone Manual Time Setting 1 / 1 / 20XX 12 : 24 AM OK

307081

1. → "Sync With Phone"

The clock will be set and adjusted autoa matically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smartphone, the settings of the connected smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notification settings may need to be activated.) For details, check the instructions on connecting smartphones.

▼ 11.6-inch display models

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Phone Audio Music Phone Aero Sound Outlook MyUsers Settings Cat Fts 307079

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Clock"
5. → "Time Setting"
6. Models with navigation system:

→ "AUTO"

Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigati system:

→ "AUTO"

Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system:

→ "Sync With Phone"

▽ Models with navigation system

The clock will be set automatically where a GPS signal is available.

Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system

The clock will be set automatically where a DCM (Data Communication Module in vehicle cellular connection) signal is available.

▽ Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system

The clock will be set and adjusted automatically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth for transferring phonebook data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Own

er's Manual for the audio/navigation system.

1. Transfer phonebook data to the system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smartphone, the settings of the connected smartphone may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or other models, notification settings may need to be activated.) For details, check the instructions on connecting smartphones.

■ Time Zone (Models with Navigation System)

You can configure the "Time Zone" setting on the clock setting screen. If a GPS signal is available when "AUTO" is selected, "Time Zone" is set automatically. Refer to "Main screen" P225 for the setting.

■ Daylight Saving Time (Models with Navigation System)

You can configure the "Daylight Saving Time" setting on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when "AUTO"3-10. Valet Mode

is selected, "Daylight Savings Time" is automatically. Refer to "Main screen" P225 for the setting.

NOTE

• When "Time Setting" is set to "AUTO", you can change "Daylight Saving Time" and "Time Zone" settings.
• When "Daylight Saving Time" is set to "AUTO", the "Time Zone" setting can only be set to "AUTO".

When leaving your vehicle with a valet service, such as at a hotel or restaurant, you can set the valet mode, which disable the navigation, audio, and vehicle setting functions. The display cannot be operated, preventing the leakage of personal information. The valet mode is designed to prevent personal information leaks.

Activation of Valet Mode

Smart Home My Home 307144

11.6-inch display models

OUT TEMP 32 ° 0:04 Display Off Valet Mode Add Shortcut 307246

Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Touch "Valet Mode".
   

Passcode Setting Enter New Passcode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 307145

11.6-inch display models

Passcode Setting Enter New Passcode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 307247

Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Enter the passcode.
2. Touch "OK".

■ Deactivation of Valet Mode

Visit More is Active 307146

11.6-inch display models

Valet Mode Is Active Deactivate 307248

Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Touch "Valet Mode" or select O5F (11.6-inch display models). Touch "Deactivate" (dual 7.0-inch display models).
2. Enter the passcode.
3. Touch "OK".

NOTE

If you enter the passcode incorrectly three times in a row when setting canceling valet mode, a message prompting you to contact a SUBARU dealer will be displayed, but it is possible to enter the passcode even after the fourth attempt.

If you have forgotten your passcode, consult your SUBARU dealer.

3-11. Light Control Switch

CAUTION

• Use of any lights for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery to discharge.
• Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the light control switch is turned to the off position. If the vehicle is left unattended for a long time with the light control switch set to a position other than the off position, even though the lights will turn off after 10 minutes, the battery may be discharged.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The light control switch operates when the y push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are tillurned off when the push-button ignition switch is turned off.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

The light control switch operates when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be operated (except auto on/off headlights) even when under the following conditions.

• When the push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" portion (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")
• When the key is not inserted into ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

If you leave the headlights on for 10 minutes, the headlights will turn off automatically. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position to illuminate the exterior lights again.

If the driver's door is opened while headlights are illuminated under such conditions, a chirp sound will inform the driver that the lights are illuminated.

Headlights

301716 AUTO

Except for Canada models

the - AUTO OFF 306400

the For Canada models

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob the end of the light control switch.

“O” position (except for Canada models):

The headlights are all off.

Only when the following conditions are fulfilled, instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

• The engine is running.
• The parking brake is fully released.
- The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

"OFF" position (for Canada models): The headlights are all off. ^2

*1: When the light switch is switched to the "OFF" position while the vehicle is stopped, the lights turn off. Then the light switch will automatically return to the "AUTO" position.
*2: The headlights will automatically change to the AUTO mode when the following conditions are met:

• The engine is running.
  ● The parking brake is fully released.
• The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

on D" position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

- CONTINUED -

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

"ODOE" position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

"AUTO" position: Auto on/off headlights When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail light and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

NOTE

• If the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlight do not turn on when it becomes outside, turn the light switch to the "D" position. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

- The light sensitivity of the auto on off headlights can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon"

ar P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting can be charged by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

▼ Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights While the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position, the headlights will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers operate several times. The headlights will automatically turn off approximately 1 minute after the wiper stops.

The ON/OFF setting of this function can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car Settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Welcome lighting function dark the welcome lighting function turns on t low beam headlight for smooth approach ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the following conditions are met. The light control switch is in the "AUT" position.

- It is dark enough to turn on the auto

- off headlights.

NOTE

If the engine is turned off after turning off the light switch, the welcome lighting function may not operate (for Canada models).

When approaching

While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will automatically illuminate when unlocking the doors (for Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, including the rear gate) by using the remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain illuminated for 30 seconds and then turn goff. However, if any of the following operations is done, the low beam headlights will turn off.

• The doors are locked.

The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".

The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

When exiting

While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will remain illuminated even when either of the following operation is done.

• The push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" status (models w "keyless access with push-button start system").
• The key is pulled out from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

The low beam headlights will turn off und any of the following conditions.

• 3 minutes have passed since the low beam headlights were illuminated by the welcome lighting function.
• 30 seconds have passed since the door is opened and closed!*
• The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".
• The locking procedure is performed twice. When performing the unlocking procedure after performing the locking procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.
  *1: The setting for the period of time in which low beam headlights remain on by the welcome lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can change the setting by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch

display models).

with ▼ Sensor for the auto on/off headlights

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

The sensor is on the instrument panel shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near sensor, the sensor may not detect the level of the ambient light correctly and the auto on/off headlight may not operate properly.

■ High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer)

1 2 304881

1 High beam 2 Low beam

While the light control switch is in the or "AUTO" position in a dark place, the headlights will turn on.

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light "≡" on the combination meter is also on.

tsNOTE

While the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the lever is the high beam position, the high beam assist function will be on standby.

Headlight Flasher

Simple line drawing of a cylindrical object with a pointed tip, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flash position for more than just a few seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you have the lever. The headlight flasher works enough though the lighting switch is in the off position.

When the headlights are on high beam, high beam indicator light “≡” on the combination meter also illuminates.

■ High Beam Assist Function NOTE

• The high beam assist function utilizes the stereo camera installed the position of the front map lig
• For details on how to handle the stereo camera, refer to the Owner Manual supplement for the EyeSig system.

The high beam assist function automatically changes the headlight from high beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to high beam.

ing When the vehicle speed increases to or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

• There is no preceding or oncoming vehicle.
• The forward area of the vehicle is dark
• The road does not have a sharp curve Id

When any of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to low be

• When the vehicle speed decreases to or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
• When the forward area of the vehicle is bright.
• When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle.

- When the EyeSight system is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

Do not overestimate the capacity of its. the high beam assist function. The driver always has the responsibility to understand the surrounding situation, to drive safely, and to change the headlight mode manually if necessary.

- The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as “operational”. This setting can be changed to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

▼ How to use the high beam assist function

The high beam assist function will be activated when all the following conditions are met.

• The light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the low beam headlights am. are on automatically.
• The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

304963

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is activated, the high beam assist indicator on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped, the headlight will be fixed low beam.

▼ How to temporarily lower the sensitivity of the high beam assist function

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function can be lowered by using the following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position, set the light control

switch to the "AUTO" position and p the signal lever forward (high beam position).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and within approximately 15 seconds, press the / / (following distance setting) switch more than 10 times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the high beam assist indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) will flash.

NOTE

- The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions.

- Cruise control indicator is illuminated.

- The EyeSight warning indicator at (yellow) is illuminated.

- The sensitivity of the high beam assist function returns to normal level the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted.

How to change the headlight mode manually

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to the center position, the high beam assist function will turn off and the high beam assist indicator will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to the "D" position, the headlight mode will be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function will turn off, the high beam assist indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator light will turn on.

NOTE

After manually changing the headlight mode to the high beam, if you turn on the high beam assist function, return the light control switch to the "AUTO" position.

- When manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you turn the light control switch to the "300" position, the parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights will turn on.

▼ Tips for the high beam assist sys-tem

• The high beam assist function recognizes the condition surrounding the vehicle based on the brightness of illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the headlight mode may switch in some situations that do not match to the driver's sense.
• A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be detected.

• Under the following situations, the brightness of ambient illumination may not be detected correctly and the high beam assist function may not work properly. As a result, the glare of the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode may continue although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such cases, change the headlight mode manually.

• In bad weather (fog, snow, sand storm, heavy rain, etc.).

• When the windshield glass is dirty fogged.
• When the windshield is cracked or damaged.

• If there are lights similar to the headlights or the tail lights in the surrounding area.

• When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is driven without its headlights and tail lights on.

• If the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the light beams are not aimed correctly.
• When a rapid change of brightness continues while driving.
• When driving on a road with many ups and downs or uneven surfaces
• When driving on a road with many curves.
• When there are some objects that reflect light strongly, such as a road sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
• When the rear part of the vehicle ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly.
• When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty.
• When your vehicle is tilted, such as in case the vehicle has a flat tire or being towed.
• When the stereo camera is deformed or the stereo camera lenses are dirty.
• Immediately after the engine has started.
• In the following conditions, the head-light mode will not be automatically

changed from the high beam to the low beam.

• When your vehicle passes an on-coming vehicle suddenly in a blind curve.
• When another vehicle passes in front of your vehicle.
• When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead comes in and out of view because of continuous curves, median strips, roadside trees, etc.

f the stereo camera detects the light of the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam automatically.

• The headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam, or the low beam mode may continue, when affected by a street light, traffic signal, illumination of an advertisement board, or a reflective object such as a road sign and signboard.
  Tise timing of the change of headlight mode may differ due to the following factors.

• Color or brightness of the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead.

• The headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are covered with mud, snow,

etc.

• Movement and direction of an on- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead
• When the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead illuminate on only o side.
• When the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
• Conditions of a road (slope, curve road surface, etc.).
• Number of passengers and weight of loaded cargo.
• Limitation of the detection ability of the stereo camera.

■ Daytime Running Light System

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are illuminated, the tail lights do not illuminate. When it becomes dark outside, turn the light switch to the "ID" position to illuminate the headlights and tail lights. This will improve visibility and allow other drivers to see your vehicle more easily

The daytime running lights will automatically illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

• The engine is running.
• The parking brake is fully released.
• The light control switch is in the "AUTO", "oo" or "o" position (except e for Canada models).
• The light control switch is in the "AUTO", "☐☐" or "OFF" position (for Canada models).
• The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the position, the instrument panel illumination, front side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are also illuminated.

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

1 2

304837

The target area of illumination when SRH is activated

2 The target area of illumination when S ^DH is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves the headlight beam to the left or right in accordance with the steering angle and vehicle speed. This function helps to improve the visibility at night by illuminating the road ahead at corners and intersections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off. The settings can be changed by using the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230.

1 SRH OFF 305294

1 SRH OFF indicator light

The SRH OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) turns off when SRH is turned on. The SRH OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) illuminates when SRH is turned off.

1 SRH 306177

1 SRH warning indicator

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH warning indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) illuminates and a message appears on the warning screen when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

• The SRH function operative/non-operative status is kept when the engine is turned off, even if the engine is restarted.
• When you turn the ignition switch the "ON" position, the SRH OFF indicator light will illuminate and turn off after several seconds.

- SRH only activates when the vehicle is traveling forward at the speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

to

3-13. Headlight Beam Level 8-14. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped)

The LED headlights produce more light than conventional halogen headlights. When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and the headlight beams are angled upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the optimum height automatically depending on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the headlights may become misaligned, and the headlight beam leveler will not reset them to the proper angle. This may occur after transporting your vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the vehicle is parked and restarted on different angles. In such cases, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer.

d e 1 2 - D EDGE AUTO - - 扣 - 301721

Except for Canada models
1 Headlight switch
2 Fog light switch

1 2 306401

For Canada models
1 Headlight switch
2 Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch is placed in the deposition while the headlights are in the following condition.

• The headlight switch is in the "D" position with the low beam mode selected.
• While the headlight switch is in the "AUTO" position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights, perform the following.

- Turn the switch to "O" (except for Canada models).

- Turn the switch to "OFF" (for Canada models).

和 304967

Indicator light

The indicator light located on the combination meter will illuminate when the front lights are on.

3-15. Turn Signal Lever

1 2 3 4 304856

1 Right turn
2 Lane change right signal na-3 Lane change left signal fog Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

■ One-Touch Lane Changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal indicator light three times, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational setting of the one-touch lane changer can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. The setting can also be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

3-16. Wiper and Washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.

• Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the blade rubbers and might cause the wiper motor to fail. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield washer.

• In freezing weather, be sure that the blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blade rubbers frozen to the window glass could cause not only the blade rubbers to be damaged but also might cause the wiper motor to fail. If the blade rubbers are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on the wiper.

- If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, this might cause the wiper motor to fail even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation.

- Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to "Windshield Washer Fluid" P546.

Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.

- Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, su as paint thinner or benzine. T will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.

NOTE

- The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor temporarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe location, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally.

- Clean your blade rubbers and window glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Operate the windshield washer for at least 1 second so that

- CONTINUED -

washer solution will be sprinkled (all rubbers) with new ones. For replace Windshield Wiper and over the windshield or rear window. ment instructions, refer to "Replace-Washer Switches

- Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper. If blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield and rear window using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, however, use detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade strongly, the black coating component will peel off, which will cause the wiper to judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that the rubber has not come loose. After cleaning the window glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean water. Rinse the window until the water does not form beads on the glass. This indicates that the glass is clean.

- If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the wiper blades (or blade

ment of Wiper Blades" P547.
f the wipers do not operate when
wiper switch is in the "position,
turn the wiper switch to the" position. In this case, contact you
SUBARU dealer.

The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

▼ Windshield wipers

301723

△ : Mist (for a single wipe)
O : Off
: Intermittent
▼ : Low speed
▼ : High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the "O" position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

▼ Wiper intermittent time control

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle, seat, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

When the wiper switch is in the "position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in several steps from the shortest interval to the longest."

he▼Windshield washer

Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper control lever toward you. The washer fluid sprays until you release the lever. The wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with a pointer and a circular gauge symbol (no text or labels)

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning light appears when the washer fluid level in the tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the warning light appears refill the tank with fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to "Windshield Washer Fluid" P546.

■ Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Diagram of a connector with ports and wiring, no text or symbols present

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

: Continuous

: Intermittent

: Off

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

▼ Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob switch upward.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob s to the O" position.

With the switch turned to the "position,

the rear wiper will operate intermittently intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed. In this position, when you move the select lever to the "R" position, the wiper will switch to continuous operation. When you move the select lever from the "R" (reverse) position to another position, the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the "O" position, if the front windshield wipe operating continuously, the rear wiper w operate intermittently when you move the select lever to the "R" (reverse) position

The factory setting (default setting) of the reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as follows.

• U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
- Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by a SUB dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that distu the rear wiper operation on the gate. Doing so may damage the wiper when it operates.

at▼ Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the knob switch upward to the ☐ position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch downward to the ☐ position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.

offhe rear view camera washer also operates while the rear window washer is alloperating.

RU 307078

Windshield washer fluid warning light

urbsNOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning light appears when the washer fluid level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light appears 317. Defogger and Deicer refill the tank with fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to "Windshield Washer Fluid" P546.

Technical diagram showing three views of a car interior with labeled components: front, side, and side panels.

1 Rear window defogger

2 Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

vated only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

307239

Defogger button (dual 7.0-inch display models)

307240

Defogger button (11.6-inch display models)

- CONTINUED -

To activate the defogger and deicer system, press the defogger button. The rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer are activated simultaneously. The indicator light on the defogger button illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is activated. To turn them off, press the defogger butt again. They also turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

The defogger and deicer system will automatically shut off after approximately 15 minutes. If the rear window and outside mirrors have been cleared and the windshield wiper blade rubbers have been deiced completely before that time, press the defogger button to turn them off. If defrosting, defogging or deicing is not complete, you have to press the defogger button to turn them on again.

It is possible to set the defogger and dei system for the continuous operation mode by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

CAUTION

- To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than necessary.

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

NOTE

- Turn on the defogger and deicer system if the wipers are frozen to the windshield.

If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effec- icentively.

- While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation mode:

- If the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper deicer system automatically stops operating. However, the rear window defogger system

and outside mirror defogger system maintain continuous operation in this condition.

- If the vehicle battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger system and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating.

The vehicle is equipped with a radio antenna on the upper part of the rear window. Therefore it is not possible to clear fog and frost on the upper part of the rear window.

3-18. Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.

■ Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function) (If Equipped)

1 2 307155

1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal To reduce glare from the headlights of vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the glare position.

■ Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink(If Equipped)

1 2 3 304867

1 Compass
2 HomeLink • buttons
3 Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and help preserve your vision.

use ▼ To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- the ture

Press the "Switch" switch to turn the auto-dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch's green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

▼ To Operate the Compass Feature (if equipped)

1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the "switch" for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads "C", slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 304866

Compass calibration zones (U.S.)

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 306442

Compass calibration zones (South America)

1. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the " switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the "s" switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop pressing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction.

1. If the vehicle's magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccu

rate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the "C" switch for more than 9 seconds or until a "C" appears in display. Once a "C" appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

▼ HomeLink © Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up three hand-held radio frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLink-Gentex.

CAUTION

- Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way the device to prevent potential harm or damage.

• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage.
• Do not use HomeLinkwith any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.
• It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" or "ACC" position before programming and/or operating HomeLink®.
• Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the

Mirrors

programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink buttons" P281.

▽ Programming a New HomeLink button

1 2 307154

1 HomeLink * indicator light
2 HomeLink * buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink® button that you would like to program. The HomeLink indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to "Erasing HomeLink® buttons" P281).

1 304869

1 Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (28 cm) away from the HomeButton that you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if have difficulty with the programming process.

Line drawing of a hand pressing down on a curved surface with a magnifying glass (no text or symbols)

1. While the HomeLink® indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the hand-held remote button. Continue to pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace this "Programming a New HomeLink® button" step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. Refer to "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" P281.

1 304871

1 HomeLink * indicator light

1. Press the HomeLink button that you would like to program and observe t HomeLink® indicator light.

2. If the HomeLink® indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete.

3. If the HomeLink® indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the

programming instructions.

1 304872

1 "Learn" button

1. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

1. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 7.

Simple line drawing of a curved object with a finger pointing downward (no text or symbols)

1. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three times. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

1 304874

1 Status Indicators

1. If status indicator arrows appear next to the HomeLink indicator light, please refer to "Garage Door Two-Way Communication" P282.

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink® website.

▽ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming New HomeLink® button" step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink® indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote eve two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink button" step 4 to complete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held remote of the device may also be used at any time.

▼ Erasing HomeLink buttons

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink® is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming a New HomeLink button" - step 1.

▽ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® button

To program a previously trained button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink® button can be released at this point. Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLinkbutton" - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, will revert to the previously stored programming.

▽ Garage Door Two-Way Communication

HomeLink® has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink® can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink® can also recall and display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".

HomeLink® has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to \$ your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

▽ Programming Two-Way Communication

1 304874

1 Status Indicators

Within 5 seconds after programming a new HomeLink® button, both of HomeLink's garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do flash, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found cbonline at www.HomeLink.com and slowww.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

∇ Using Two-Way Communication

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simultaneously pressing HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink® will display the last recorded status for 3 seconds.

If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink® will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators (see below).

not

1		2
3		4

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)

2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)

4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

▼ Certification

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

• U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

• Canada-spec. models

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

HomeLink® and the HomeLinkhouse are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING

• When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use the HomeLinkWireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

■ Smart Rearview Mirror/Compass with HomeLink (Outback) (If Equipped)

▼ Safety precautions

WARNING

• Never rely exclusively on the Smart Rearview Mirror. The Smart Rearview Mirror has blind spots that must be checked prior to operating the vehicle. Please exercise caution when using this system.
• Do not disassemble or modify the main unit, camera or wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is a strange odor or smoke, stop using it immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
• Never operate the Smart Rear-view Mirror while driving. Doing so could result in an accident causes serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Do not put the main unit, camera or wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror close to fire. Doing so could result in a malfunction and fire.
• When the Smart Rearview Mirror malfunctions, change to the mirror mode immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
• Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror for extended period of time may result in car sickness.
  the The display could become hard to see because of lights (e.g. sunlight or the headlights of approaching vehicles) from outside of the vehicle. In this case, change to the mirror mode if necessary.

that NOTE

When the moonroof is opened (if equipped):

If the sunlight is too bright to see the display of the Smart Rearview Mirror, close the moonroof (sunshade), or select the mirror mode.

▼ Smart Rearview Mirror switches

5 1 2 3 4

307216

1 Mode lever
2 Left button
3 Center button
4 Right button
5 HomeLink buttons

▼ How to use the Smart Rearview Mirror

CAUTION

Adjust the rearview mirror before driving.

1) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror to the mirror mode.
2) Sit with the correct posture in driver's seat and adjust the mirror position to see behind.
3) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror to the display mode.

If you start driving without adjusting the mirror, light may reflect on the mirror while selecting the display mode and it may make it hard to set the screen.

To change the mode

the 2 1 307218

1 To select the display mode, first adjust the rearview mirror, then pull the mode lever towards you.
2 To select the mirror mode, push the mode lever away from you.

Select the display mode to show the in from the camera that is installed in the antenna.

Select the mirror mode to use as a no mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the image from the camera is not shown or mirror.

NOTE

- It is not possible to use the Sm Rearview Mirror in the display m when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position.

- When using the display mode, parts of the vehicle interior may reflect light on the display. Adjust the angle of the Smart Rearview Mirror to avoid unwanted reflection.

▽ Display adjustment

1 2 3 307219

roof Left button

2 Center button 3 Right button

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

Brightness adjustment

1 2 3 307220

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to set the brightness.

2 Press this button to decrease the brightness.

3 Press this button to increase the brightness.

After pressing the setting button, the mo will change to the up/down adjustment mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the brightness adjustment menu will exit.

Up/down adjustment

1 2 3 307221

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to set the angle.
2 Press this button to lower the angle.
3 Press this button to raise the angle.

After pressing the setting button, the mo will change to the left/right adjustment de mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the up/down adjustment menu will exit.

Left/right adjustment

1 2 3 307222

after pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the rotation adjustment mode.

1 Setting button: Press the setting button set the angle.

2 Press this button to turn the angle left.

3 Press this button to turn the angle right

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the left/right adjustment menu will exit.

Rotation adjustment

1 2 3 307223

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to set the angle.
2 Press this button to turn the angle counterclockwise.
3 Press this button to turn the angle clockwise.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the HomeLink menu.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the rotation adjustment me will finish.

∇ Dimming setting

The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dimm mirror mode. When the mirror mode is selected with the ignition switch in the position, auto dimming will activate. This mode decreases glare automatically depending on the brightness level from behind.

1 2 3 le 307219

1 Left button
2 Center button
3 Right button

When selecting the mirror mode, press any of the buttons to display the auto dimming menu. Press the center or right buttons to turn the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF.

ON"

9 ON" ON OFF 307224

Dimming mirror mode ON indicator

ON OFF 307225

Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator

When turning the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds.

Mirrors

NOTE

• When the ignition switch is turned the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, auto dimming will not activate.
• When the display mode is selected, auto dimming will not activate.

▼ When the display mode malfunctions

▽ Vehicle communication error

VEHICLE COMMUNICATION ERROR 307226

When there is a vehicle communication error, the warning indicators will appear shown in the illustration.

to 1 2 3 4 307227

1 Mode lever
2 Left button
3 Center button
4 Right button

When the warning indicators appear, operate the mode lever to select the mode. In such a case, we recommend you consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.

If the mode does not change to the mirror mode even when operating the mode lever, the mode lever may have malfunctioned. In such a case, press and hold one of the left, center, or right buttons for 10 seconds. Then the mode will change to the mirror mode.

▽ Camera calibration error

Line drawing of a car rearview mirror with a circular emblem on the top (no text or symbols)

When there is a camera calibration error, the warning indicators will appear as shown in the illustration.

When the warning indicators appear, or operate the mode lever to select the mirror mode. In such a case, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.

▼ Maintenance

Line drawing of a car rear view with no visible text or symbols

1 Camera

• Make sure to clean the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the camera regularly. If these parts are not clean, the screen cannot be seen clearly.
• Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the camera by using dry soft cloth. If the foreign matter cannot be removed, first wipe the are off using a wet soft cloth, and then v using a dry cloth.
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning. Doing so could result in discoloration, deterioration, or malfunction.
• Make sure to clean the rear camera lens regularly. When you clean the rear

camera lens, first soak a soft cloth diluted mild detergent to wipe it off, wipe using a dry cloth.

• During snowy weather, remove the accumulated snow from around the antenna, because snow interferes with the camera image on the mirror.
• When installing a roof box or a similar accessory, do not block the area in f of the camera lens to avoid interfering with the camera image on the mirror.
• When the Smart Rearview Mirror's visibility is poor because there is dirt or other foreign material adhering to camera, switch to the original rearview mirror.

ra▼ Tips

• Do not use the display mode for a long time while the engine is not running.
• Doing so could result in the battery a discharge.
• Do not install radio antennas around the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio wipes waves may disturb the Smart Rearview Mirror screen.
• Observe the following instructions. Not doing so could result in malfunction or the main mirror unit falling off.

- Do not push the button too strongly or move the lever too forcibly.

- Do not turn the main mirror unit

with more than 90 degrees.
and - Do not impact the main mirror unit.
- Do not impact the camera or antenna.
- If the screen is hard to see because of light, select the mirror mode.
- If LED lights or scattered reflections are caught in the camera, the screen may frontflicker. However, this is not a malfunction.
- If something moves rapidly near the camera, the display may not be able to catch the item. However, this is not a malfunction.
- If the display mode is used, the view of the rear will be different from the normal use of the inner mirror or the mirror mode. Do not rely solely on the Smart Rearview Mirror; check the rear visually if necessary. Pay attention to traffic conditions for safe driving.
- Adjust the brightness of the screen appropriately. If the screen is too bright, the driver's eyes may get tired while driving.
- The Smart Rearview Mirror sometimes becomes hot. However, this is not a malfunction.
In the following cases, the color may not be clear. However, this is not a malfunction.

• The shown items are a very far distance away.
• The environmental conditions are very dark.

▼ To operate the compass feature

1 2 3 307219

1 Left button
2 Center button
3 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select compass mode using the left button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

∇ To turn the compass feature off

NW 1 307231

1 Compass

Select "ON" or "OFF" using the center button.

on/ ▽ Compass calibration

If the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass.

Front view diagram of a car rearview mirror with labeled screen (NW) and control buttons, no text or symbols beyond labels

1. Select "CALIBRATE" using the right button.
2. To start the compass calibration, pre the center button.
3. Select "Continue" using the center button.

COMPRESS COLDROOM Airflow from the airway to the airway Airflow from the airway to the airway

307252

1. Select your current location in the display using the left button.
2. Select "Continue" using the center button.
3. Once "C" appears in the display, slow drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

▼ HomeLink © Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, and even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers, pleas go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

• Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to outside of the garage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features, as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.
• It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held remote (garage door opener

remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.

• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.
• Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P295.

Mirrors

HomeLink set up

1 2 3 4 307253

1 HomeLink buttons
2 Left button
3 Center button
4 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right but to display the main menu. Select HomeLink menu using the left button or press any of the HomeLink buttons.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

SET UP 307254

1. Select "SET UP" using the right button

2. Select "Continue" using the HomeLink left button.

3. Press any of the HomeLink buttons.

4. Be sure to read the displayed instructions.

Select "Continue" using the HomeLink left button.

1. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 2 in (5 cm) aw from the mirror.

on in a

Internal Jim Press and hold remote lmator within 2 inches and pre-pressed 1 307255

1 Garage door opener remote
6. While the HomeLink programming in instructions are displayed, press and hold the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage do#r opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.

1. Be sure your garage door is not moving, then press OK.
2. Firmly press the HomeLink left button 3 times.

At this point, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is

- CONTINUED -

pressed and released. Shelter garage door released to any of the 1 water press? 307256

1. "Program Success": If the programmed HomeLink button works, select "Yes" and programming is completed. If the programmed HomeLink button does not work, select "No" and proceed to step 10.

Power Lamp Control 30 307257

1 304872

1 "Learn" button
10. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to

the motor-head unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

1. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 12.
2. Return to the vehicle and press the HomeLink left button.
3. Firmly press the HomeLink left button 3 times.

At this point, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1. "Program Success": If the programmed HomeLink button works, select "Yes" and programming is completed.

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers, please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

▽ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device time out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming New HomeLink Button" step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote eve two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unp the device during the "cycling" proce to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 4 to complete.

▽ Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the handheld remote of the device may also be used at any time.

▼ Erasing HomeLink Buttons

1. Press any of the left, center or right buttons to select the main menu. Select HomeLink menu using the left button.
2. Select "SET UP" using the right button.
3. Select "Continue" using the HomeLink left button.
4. Select the "Trash can icon" using the HomeLink left button.

plug ess 1uHomeLink Clear current HomeLink button programming? ▼ Clear No 307330

1. To erase the program for the HomeLink button, select "Clear" using the HomeLink center button.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming a new HomeLink button" - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a previously programmed HomeLink button, refer to "HomeLink set up" P293.

▽ Garage Door Two-Way Communication

HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250) Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to say your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

▽ Programming Two-Way Communication

nd 1 HomeLink 307251

m)1 Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do n flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found online at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

∇ Using Two-Way Communication

STATUS SET UP 307250

Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select HomeLink menu using the left button. Select "STATUS" using the center button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

not

1 HomeLink 307251

1 Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for 5 seconds.

1 2 3 4 304876

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)

2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)

4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators.

Certification

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

• U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

• Canada-spec. models

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

HomeLink® and the HomeLinkhouse are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING

• When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use the HomeLinkWireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru or call 1-800-355-3515.

▼ Language

Front view of a car rearview mirror with control buttons and display screen (no text or symbols)

Changes the language displayed in the Smart Rearview Mirror.

1. Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select "LANGUAGE" using the left button.
2. Select the language using the right button and press the center button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

■ Outside Mirrors

▼ Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors before driving.

▼ Remote control mirror switch

L°R 304882

→: Select side to adjust
→: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that you want to adjust. "L" is for the left mirror, "R" is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.

NOTE

- The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.

For models with memory function:

- The outside mirror can be adjusted for approximately 45 seconds after the following conditions are met.

- The ignition switch is turned the "OFF" position.

- The door is unlocked using access key fob.

• The outside mirror angle can be registered with button "1", "2" or each of the key fobs. For details refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" P34.
• The outside mirror angle can also retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do s perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System P237.

▽ Reverse tilt-down feature (if equipped)

When backing the vehicle up, the right and/or left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Move the select lever to the R (Reverse) position.

3. The outside mirror angle moves downward.

The outside mirror angle will return to its original position when the following condition are met.

• Approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).
• The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• The vehicle is running.

NOTE

The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can be registered with button "1", "2" or each of the key fobs. For details, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" P34.
- The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P237.
- The operational/non-operational setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230.

- The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the first passenger's side mirror. The setting of driver's side mirror operation be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal during reverse tilt-down mirror angle adjustment.

To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror angle, adjust the outside mirror using remote control mirror switch while the reverse tilt-down operates. For details about how to adjust the outside mirror angle, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" P300.

Memory function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror can be registered. Register the position with button "1", "2" or each of the access key fobs and retrieve the position.

For details about registration or retrieval of a position, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" P34.

NOTE

If the seat is moved forward or back ward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the reverse tilt-down will move to the factory default position or the last position hold.

Hold last position function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror can be set to the latest adjusted angle. The hold last position function operates when the following condition are met.

• The memory function is not used.
• The seat is moved forward or backward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more.

NOTE

• The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as “non-operational”. This setting can be changed to “operational” at SUBARU dealers. For more details contact a SUBARU dealer.
• If the hold last position function's setting is "non-operation", the reverse tilt-down will move to the of factory default position.

▼ Power folding mirror switch (if equipped)

304969

The power folding mirror switch operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

To fold the outside mirrors, press the power folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors, press the switch again.

NOTE

- If the outside mirrors have been operated (folded or unfolded) manually, when you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ACC" or "ON" position the outside mirrors may be adjusted automatically depending on the status of the power folding mirror switch.

- CONTINUED -

• If the outside mirrors have been manually folded slightly forward of the regularly unfolded position, when you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ACC" or "ON" position, the outside mirrors may automatically fold further forward depending on the status of the power folding mirror switch. When this happens, press the power folding mirror switch. By doing so, the outside mirrors which have been folded to the furthest forward position will extend to the regularly unfolded position and then fold rearward in the usual way. In order to unfold outside mirrors, press the switch again.
• When you fold the outside mirrors manually, the mirrors may not unf when the switch is pressed, even though the motor operating sound heard. When this happens, operate the power folding mirror switch again.

• When you unfold the outside mirror manually, the mirrors may become wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors by operating the switch. If the outside mirrors are still wobbly, for the mirrors again and then unfold them by operating the switch again

• When the temperature is low, the outside mirrors may stop during operation. Push the switch again. When the outside mirrors do not work by operating the switch, mo the outside mirrors several times manually. This makes it possible operate them by switch operation.

• When you operate the power fold mirror switch continuously, it may not work. This is not a malfunction Operate after waiting for a short period of time.

• The outside mirrors can be operated (folded or unfolded) manually for approximately 45 seconds after the following conditions are met.

• The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.

• The door is unlocked using the fold access key fob.

is ▽ Power folding door mirror function (if equipped)

The mirrors are automatically folded when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position, the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the doors are locked.

The mirrors are automatically unfolded when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position and the doors n.

are unlocked.

NOTE

- The power folding door mirror function does not operate when the power folding mirror switch is in to the mirror unfolding position. - The setting of the power folding door using mirrors function can be changed by operating the center information dispon. play. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230. Also, the setting can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. and Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

3-19. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
• If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

Diagram showing car interior and hand valve adjustment with numbered arrows indicating motion steps

1 Tilt adjustment
2 Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to "Front Seats" P28.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down, and forward and backward.

3-20. Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system warms the steering wheel at a constant temperature.

nt d 1 2 307214

1 Heated Steering Wheel switch
2 Indicator light

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch when the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Then the steering wheel will be warmed and the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. To turn of the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the switch again. Then the indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION

• Use the Heated Steering Wheel system with the engine running. Otherwise, the battery voltage may drop below the permissible level and it may not be possible start the engine.
• There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the Heated Steering Wheel for a long period of time. When using the Heated Steering Wheel, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.
• Do not cover the Heated Steering Wheel with an object such as a steering wheel cover. Doing so may cause the Heated Steering Wheel to overheat.
• Do not spill liquid on the steering wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately and dry it before using the Heated Steering Wheel system.

NOTE

- If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is approximately above 104^ (40°C) when the Heated

Steering Wheel system is turned on 03-21. Horn the system will not heat the steering wheel. Then, the indicator light will continue to illuminate.

• The Heated Steering Wheel system will automatically turn off approximately 30 minutes after the system has been turned on.
• The temperature of the Heated Steering Wheel system cannot be adjusted.

P 304901

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Climate Control

4-1. Ventilator Control.... 308

Center Ventilators 308

Side Ventilators 308

Rear Ventilators (If Equipped) 308

4-2. Climate Control Panel 309

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models 310

11.6-Inch Display Models 312

4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation.... 314

Sensors.... 315

4-4. Manual Climate Control.... 316

Airflow Mode Selection 316

Temperature Control 317

Fan Speed Control.... 318

Air Conditioner Control.... 318

Air Inlet Selection 318

To Turn Off the Climate Control System ....

4-5. Front Seat Heater and Ventilation

(If Equipped).... 319

Front Seat Heater 319

Front Seat Ventilation.... 320

4-6. Defrosting 320

4-7. Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner 321

Cleaning Ventilator Grille 321

Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct Sunlight 321

Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant Circuit.... 321

Checking Air Conditioning System before Summer Season.... 321

Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity and Low Temperature Weather Condition ..... 322

Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When Engine Is Heavily Loaded 322

319 Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ..... §322

4-8. Air Filtration System 32

Replacing the Cabin Air Filter.... 323

4-1. Ventilator Control

■ Center Ventilators

Diagram of a car interior with directional arrows indicating movement or flow, no readable text or symbols present.

■ Side Ventilators

1 2 403685

1 Open
2 Close

■ Rear Ventilators (If Equipped)

1 2 403168

1 Open
2 Close

Move the tabs to adjust the flow direction. To close the ventilator, move the tab all way down.

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction the open the ventilator, turn the side grid open/close wheel upward to the "≡" position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to "☒" position.

a.Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. bTo open the ventilator, turn the rear grille open/close wheel upward to the "≡" position.

The close it, turn the wheel downward to the "☒" position.

4-2. Climate Control Panel

WARNING

• The cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

■ Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

1 2 3 4 403183

1 Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting" P320.)
2 Defogger button (if equipped) (Refer to "Defogger and Deicer" P275.)
3 Climate control screen (lower display)
4 Temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature Control" P317.)

▼ Climate control screen

60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF 1 5 4 6 AUTO A/C MAX A/C 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF > A/C 403886

Climate control screen (lower display)

→: Touch the climate control mode indicator

1 Climate control ON/OFF icon
2 Set temperature indicator
3 Climate control mode indicator
4 Customizable icon*
5 Fan speed control
6 Climate control mode select icon
7 Airflow mode selection screen
*: The customizable icon can be changed to the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" P243.

■ 11.6-Inch Display Models

1 5 4 3 2 403707

1 Climate control screen
2 Defogger button (Refer to "Defogger and Deicer" P275.)
3 Passenger's side temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature Control" P317.)
4 Driver's side temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature Control" P317.)
5 Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting" P320.)

▼ Climate control screen

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AUTO A/C 71 ON/OFF < >A/C Climate Control 8 9 10 11 12 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71

→: Touch the climate control mode indicator

1 Climate control mode indicator
2 SYNC mode indicator
3 Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)**
4 Customizable icon* 2
5 Fan speed control
6 Climate control ON/OFF icon
7 Driver's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped) ^*1
8 Climate control mode select icon
9 Temperature control screen (passenger's side)
10 SYNC icon
11 Temperature control bar
12 Airflow mode selection screen
13 Temperature control screen (driver's side)
*1: For details, refer to "Front Seat Heater and Ventilation" P319.
*2: The customizable icon can be changed to the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" P225.

NOTE

The layout and the available functions for operating the climate control screen may vary depending on the number of items shown on the Center Information Display.

4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation

1 2 AUTO A/C MAX A/C 3 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF 4 A/C 403687

Climate control screen (dual 7.0-inch display models)

Climate Control AUTO AC MAX AC 71 68 M 14 65 72 SYNC 72 90 60 LO LO V V 3 71 AC 68 403655

Climate control screen (11.6-inch display models)

1 Air inlet selection
2 Air conditioner
3 Airflow mode
4 Fan speed

When the auto mode is selected, the following functions are automatically controlled.

• Fan speed
• Airflow mode
• Air inlet selection
  • Air conditioner operation

To activate this mode, perform the following.

"AUTO" is displayed on the customizable icon:

1. Touch "AUTO".

2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to "Temperature Control" P317.

"AUTO" is not displayed on the customizable icon:

1. Touch the climate control mode indicator.
2. Touch "AUTO".
3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to "Temperature Control" P317.

NOTE

• Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.
• Even when cooling is not necessary, the air conditioner will automatically turn on if the temperature is set much lower than the current outlet air temperature. Even in this case, the “A/C” indicator light on the climate control screen illuminates.

• The air conditioner may not operate in the following cases:

• When the cabin temperature is low

• When the ambient temperature decreases close to 32^ (0°C)

- The controllable temperature range z- may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

- When "AUTO" is displayed, if you operate the fan speed control or airflow mode, press the defroster button, or turn on MAX A/C mode, the "AUTO" display will turn off. You can then manually control the system as desired using the climate control screen. To change the system back to auto mode, touch "AUTO".

To turn off the climate control system, touch "ON/OFF".

At this time, the air inlet selection mode differ depending on the auto mode and manual mode.

• When the air inlet selection is set to auto mode: Outside air circulation
• When the air inlet selection is set to manual mode: No change

When the ignition switch is changed to the "OFF"/"LOCK" or "ACC" position from "ON", the air inlet mode will automatically change to the outside air mode regardless of whether it is the auto mode or manual mode.

Sensors

the You will 1 2 403658

1 Solar sensor

2 Interior air temperature sensor*

*: Some models are equipped with a humidity sensor and an air temperature sensor.

The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precautions:

• Do not subject the sensors to impact.
• Keep water away from the sensors.
• Do not cover the sensors.
• Do not subject the sensors to impact.
• Keep water away from the sensors.
• Do not cover the sensors.

4-4. Manual Climate Control

■ Airflow Mode Selection

Select the preferred airflow mode by the following operation.

1. Touch the climate control mode indicator.
2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.

Airflow modes are as follows.

A 403170

A Models with rear ventilators

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Diagram showing car interior and seat movement with directional arrows and a vehicle number 403175

A Models with rear ventilators

Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets foot outlets

A 403171

A Models with rear ventilators

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the

foot outlets

A 403258

A Models with rear ventilators

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the instrument panel and some through windshield defroster outlets (A small amount of air flows to the windshield and both side windows to prevent fogging.)

Diagram illustrating car air intake and airflow in a vehicle, showing directional arrows and labeled components like fan, steering wheel, and dashboard.

A Models with rear ventilators

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel

■ Temperature Control

Perform the following operation to regulate the temperature of airflow from the air outlets.

Temperature control buttons:

Press the temperature control button to blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).

Temperature control screen (11.6-inch display models):

1. Touch the climate control mode indicator.

2. Select the preferred temperature by the following operation.

3. Touch and move the temperature control bar.

4. Touch the “∧”/“∨”.
5. Touch the preferred temperature in the temperature control screen.

▼ Max A/C mode

For quicker cooling, touch "MAX A/C" on the climate control mode select icon or customizable icon.

When the Max A/C mode is on, the following settings will be changed automatically.

• The air conditioner will turn on.
- The temperature will be set on the lowest.
• The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

The air inlet will be set to the recirculation mode.

- The airflow mode setting will be set to the ventilation mode.

the to turn off the Max A/C mode and return to the previous setting, touch "MAX A/C" again.

▼ SYNC mode (11.6-inch display models)

When the SYNC mode is turned on, both the driver's and passenger's side temperatures are synchronized using the driver's side temperature control button and temperature control screen.

• If "SYNC" is displayed on the customizable icon, touch "SYNC" to turn the SYNC mode on or off.
• If a customizable icon other than "SYNC" is displayed, touch the climate control mode indicator. Then touch "SYNC" to turn the SYNC mode on or off.

The SYNC mode indicator will turn white. Touch "SYNC" again, press the passenger's side temperature control button or operate the passenger's side temperature control bar to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC mode indicator will be grayed out. In this case, temperature control on the

- CONTINUED -

driver's side and passenger's side will be separated. The temperature will be controlled individually using the driver's and passenger's temperature control button and the driver's and passenger's temperature control bar.

■ Fan Speed Control

Select the preferred fan speed by touch

< or ☑ the climate control screen.

■ Air Conditioner Control

The air conditioner operates only when engine is running.

Perform the following operation while the fan is in operation to turn on the air conditioner.

• If "A/C" is displayed on the customizable icon, touch "A/C". When the air conditioner is on, the "A/C" indicator illuminates and an A/C icon will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.
• If a customizable icon other than "A/C is displayed, touch the climate control mode indicator. Then touch "A/C" on the climate control mode select icon. When the air conditioner is on, "A/C" indicator illuminates and an A/C icon will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.

eTo turn off the air conditioner, touch "A/C" again. The indicator light will turn off.

NOTE

a-For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, turn on the air conditioner. However, if the ambient temperature decreases to approximately 32°F (0°C), the air condition and dehumidification system may not work properly.

h Air Inlet Selection

Select the air inlet by touching the air selection icon.

Recirculation mode: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. This mode is used for the following cases.

• When driving on a dusty road
• When you want cooling performance to increase (for example, in particularly hot weather)

Perform the following operation to select this mode.

- is displayed on the customizable icon:

(1) Touch.

ob is not displayed on the customizable icon:
(1) Touch the climate control mode

/C" indicator.

(2) Touch 📄 on the climate control mode select icon.

- will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.

Outside air circulation mode: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. This mode is used for the following cases.

• When the road is no longer dusty
• When the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature

nlet

Perform the same operation as the recirculation mode to change the mode will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.

WARNING

Continued operation in the recirculation mode may fog up the windows. Switch to the outside air circulation mode as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.

NOTE

When outside air circulation is selected, the system may automatically adjust the air inlet setting depending on such factors as the temperature

setting, the temperature inside the vehicle, or conditions outside the vehicle.

■ To Turn Off the Climate trol System

To turn off the climate control system, touch "ON/OFF".

4-5. Front Seat Heater and Ventilation (If Equipped)

■ Front Seat Heater

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

1 60 AUTO A/C ON/OFF > A/C 2 3 403708

Dual 7.0-inch display models

1 60 AUTO A/C 60 3 ON/OFF 2 A/C 403656

11.6-inch display models

1 Seat heater indicator
2 Front passenger's seat heater icon
3 Driver's seat heater icon

Touch the driver's/passenger's seat heater icon on the climate control screen. Each time you touch the icon, the mode will change as follows.

graph TD
    A["HIGH"] --> B["MID"]
    C["OFF"] <--_D["LOW"]

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat to heat up quicker. Holding and releasing the seat heater icon turns the seat heater off in any mode.

NOTE

The front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

■ Front Seat Ventilation

The front seat ventilation operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position

1 AUTO A/C 60 60 ON/OFF > A/C 3 2 403657

1 Seat ventilation indicator
2 Front passenger's seat ventilation icon
3 Driver's seat ventilation icon

Touch the driver's/passenger's seat ventilation icon on the climate control screen. Each time you touch the icon, the mode will change as follows.

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

'All indicator lights turn off.

Holding and releasing the seat ventilation icon turns the seat ventilation off in any mode.

4-6. Defrosting

FRONT 403260

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows, perform the following procedures.

• To select the “ ” mode, press the defroster button.
• To select the "mode, touch" on the airflow mode selection screen.

NOTE

- When the “” or “” mode is selected, the air conditioner operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner icon to defrost the windshield more quickly. However, the indicator on the air conditioner icon may not illuminate. At the same time, the air inlet selec-

tion is automatically set to the side air circulation mode.

- After defrosting the windshield by pressing the defroster button, pressing the button again returns the system to the setting that had been selected before the defroster was activated.

14-7. Operating Tips for and Air Conditioner

■ Cleaning Ventilator Grille

Technical diagram of a car showing engine compartment and structural details with numbered annotations

1 Front ventilator inlet grille
2 Condenser

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clear because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

■ Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct Sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.

■ Lubrication Oil Circulation the Refrigerant Circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.

■ Checking Air Conditioning System before Summer Sea-son

Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. Have the air conditioning system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Cooling and Dehumidifying High Humidity and Low Temperature Weather Condition

Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.

■ Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When Engine Is Heavily Loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.

■ Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System

a 1 403176

1 Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).

Before adding, changing or checking the refrigerant, check the air conditioner label in the location shown in the illustration to confirm which type of refrigerant is used your vehicle.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for service Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

4-8. Air Filtration System

Your vehicle's air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system. Replace the cabin air filter according to the replacement schedule found in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter's dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter.

• Reduction of the airflow through the vents.
• Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.

■ Replacing the Cabin Air Filter

1. Remove the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

Technical diagram showing car interior components with a magnified inset highlighting a specific component, labeled 403192.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from glove box.

er 403193

(3) Push both sides of the glove box inward to unlock the stoppers and then pull down the glove box as as it will go.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly steps

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally and remove the hinge portion.

When doing this, be careful not to damage the hinge.

Diagram showing engine compartment with labeled components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

far 2. Remove the cabin air filter according to the following procedure in order to prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

403231

1. Replace the cabin air filter with a new4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect one and then reinstall the cover. the damper shaft.

The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.

403232

1. Reinstall the glove box, and connect the damper shaft.

2. Close the glove box.

Audio

5-1. Antenna 326 Printed Antenna 326

Roof Antenna.... 326 5-2. Audio Set .... 326

5-1. Antenna

■ Printed Antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window.

Line drawings of a car rear and side profiles, no text or symbols present

The antenna is printed on the inner surface of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate significantly if you apply tinting film

any other material over the antenna portion of the rear window glass.

■ Roof Antenna

Side-by-side line drawings of a car's front and side views, showing structural components (no text or symbols)

The satellite radio antenna and telematics antenna (if equipped) are installed in the center of the roof at the rear.

5-2. Audio Set

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system or audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual for details.

-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Interior Equipment

6-1. Interior Light 330

Dome Light 330

Map Lights 330

Cargo Area Light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) 331

Rear Gate Light (If Equipped).... 331

OFF Delay Timer.... 331

6-2. Sun Visors.... 332

Vanity Mirror with Light....332

6-3. Storage Compartment 333

Glove Box 333

Center Console 333

Overhead Console 334

6-4. Cup Holder 334

Front Passenger's Cup Holder 334

Rear Passenger's Cup Holder ....335

6-5. Bottle Holders 335

6-6. Accessory Power Outlets 336

6-7. USB Power Supply 338

How to Use the USB Power Supply 339

6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option) 340

6-9. Assist Grip 340

6-10. Coat Hook 341

6-11. Shopping Bag Hook 342

Legacy 342

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness.... 342

6-12. Floor Mat 342

6-13. Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness - If Equipped)....343

To Install the Cover Housing 343

Using the Cover 344

To Remove the Cover Housing 346

To Stow the Cover 347

To Take Out the Stowed Cover ....

6-14. Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) 348

6-15. Adjustable Storage Net (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)....349

6-16. Under-Floor Storage Compartment (If Equipped) 349

6-1. Interior Light

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lights are turned off to avoid battery discharge.

Dome Light

1 2 3 602436

1 OFF
2 DOOR
3 ON

The dome light switch has the following positions:

ON: The light turns on.

OFF: The light turns off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates automatically when any of the doors (for Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness, including the rear gate) is opened. Several seconds after all of the doors (including rear gate) are closed, the dome light gradually turns off. For details, refer to "OFF Delay Timer" P331.

■ Map Lights

▼ Map light switches

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard seat (no text or symbols)

To turn on the map light, press the lens To turn it off, press the lens again.

CAUTION

Do not keep watching the light source because they use LEDs.
Doing so could damage your eyes.

▼ Door interlock switch

DOOR OFF 1 602438

1 Door interlock switch

The door interlock switch has the following positions.

OFF: The map lights do not illuminate automatically in conjunction with a door opening. However, the lights can be turned on manually by pressing the map light lens.

DOOR: The map lights illuminate automatically when any of the doors (other than the rear gate or trunk lid) is opened even

while the map light is off. Several second gate is closed. For details, refer to "OF after all of the doors (other than the rear Delay Timer" P331. gate or trunk lid) are closed, the map lights gradually turn off. For details, refer to "OR Rear Gate Light (If Equipped Delay Timer" P331.

■ Cargo Area Light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

1 2 3 ON DOOR OFF 602474

1 ON
2 DOOR
3 OFF

The cargo area light switch has the following positions.

ON: The light turns on.

OFF: The light turns off.

DOOR: The light illuminates only when rear gate is opened. The light gradually turns off several seconds after the rear

Rear Gate Light (If Equipped)

1 2 602167

1 OFF

2 DOOR

DOOR: The light illuminates when the gate is opened. The light remains illuminated for several seconds and gradually turns off after the rear gate is closed. OFF: The light turns off.

■ OFF Delay Timer

The following lights have an automatic illumination function.

the Dome light

• Map lights

• Trunk light (Legacy)

• Cargo area light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
  • Rear gate light (if equipped)

When the interior light switch is set to the "DOOR" position, the light will automatically turn on and off depending on the locking and unlocking of the doors, the opening and closing of the doors, as well as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in which the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, the setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P230 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

6-2. Sun Visors

Diagram of a car intake mechanism showing a lever and seat assembly (no text or symbols)

To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

Diagram of a hand holding a car seatbelt with a black arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols)

With the sun visor positioned over the side window, you can slide the sun visor to wait the rear to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. The slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear the vehicle. When you have finished sliding it, push it toward the front of the vehicle.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and fan (no text or symbols)

CAUTION Do not slide the sun visor over windshield. The slid sun visor would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.

■ Vanity Mirror with Light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being blinded by glare.

Diagram of a car interior showing airflow direction and component placement (no text or symbols)

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

6-3. Storage Compartment

CAUTION

• Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident.

• Do not store the following items in the storage compartment. Otherwise, it may cause a fire accident.

• Spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items.

• Plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter.

Glove Box

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard control with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or adjustment.

1 Lock
2 Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key a turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove b insert the key and turn it counterclockwi

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box.

NOTE

The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.

■ Center Console

The center console box provides a storage space.

Diagram showing car interior components with labeled parts and a magnified inset of a mechanical component

T4 Upper lid opening lever
2 Upper and lower lid opening lever (dotte surface)

The center console box has a two-layer structure consisting of an upper compartment and lower compartment.

■ Overhead Console

Diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows and compartments (no text or symbols)

To open the console, push on the lid lightly and it will automatically open.

WARNING

Do not use the overhead console while driving. Doing so may distract you from the road conditions ahead and cause an accident that may result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

- Before operating this vehicle, ensure that the overhead console is closed.

• When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic other heat vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.
• Do not pull the lid when opening the overhead console. There is the risk that the over-head console may be damaged.

6-4. Cup Holder

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you and/or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery, carpets or audio equipment.

■ Front Passenger's Cup Holder

CAUTION

• Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.
  • Take care not to spill a beverage on the select lever or any switch(es) in the adjacent area. If the beverage is spilled, it may cause a malfunction of the select lever and/or switch(es).

1 601994

1 Spacer

The dual cup holder is built into the ce console.

Place a spacer in it before putting in a small cup or can.

■ Rear Passenger's Cup Holde6-5. Bottle Holders

Line drawing of a car interior showing the rear seats and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Ar dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverage is in the cup holder, do not fold down or recline any seat. Otherwise, the beverage could spill while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could burn you and/or your passengers.

CAUTION

• Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.
• When placing a beverage in a bottle holder, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could burn you and/or your passengers.

is n 601996

The bottle holder equipped on each door

- CONTINUED -

trim can be used to hold beverage bott and other items.

es6-6. Accessory Power Outlets

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing a circular component (no text or symbols)

Power outlet in the glove box

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset circular dial (no text or symbols)

Power outlet in the center console (if equipped)

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel with labeled component

Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Accessory power outlets are provided in the glove box, center console and cargo area. Electrical power (12 V DC) from the battery is available at any of the outlets when the ignition switch is in either the "ACC" or "ON" position.

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.

When using appliances connected to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120 W.

CAUTION

• Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlet.
• Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not use.
• Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12 V DC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
  When using appliances connected to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120 W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
• If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.

• Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
• Before driving your vehicle, make in sure that the plug and the cord your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a magnified inset view (no text or symbols)

Power outlet in the glove box

use

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a belt switch and seat, no text or symbols present

Power outlet in the center console (if equipped)

NOTE

The power outlets in the center console and the glove box can be used even

- CONTINUED -

when the lid is closed, because there are gaps that allow the cords to come out. Pass the cord of the electrical appliance through this gap. 6-7. USB Power Supply CAUTION

CAUTION

• The specification of a USB terminal that can be used is Type-A and Type-C. If a different specification of terminal is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible, or the device may malfunction.
• There is a risk that a connected device may malfunction or data may be damaged. The connection of a device shall be performed at your responsibility.

• To avoid an electric shock or a malfunction, observe the following precautions.

• Do not connect a USB hub.

• Do not insert any metal or other foreign object into the USB terminal.
• Do not spill water or other liquid on the USB terminal.

- Be careful not to pull the connected cable. Doing so could break the USB terminal and the connected device.

• If a device is connected for a long time when the engine is not running, doing so may cause the risk of a discharged battery. Even when the engine is running, we recommend that you do not connect a device for an unnecessarily long time.
• Do not connect a malfunctioning device. Doing so may cause the risk of smoke and fire.

NOTE

- The rated voltage of each USB terminal is DC 5 V. For details about the maximum rated power, refer to "How to Use the USB Power Supply" -P339. Before connecting a device, be sure to read the instruction manual of the device and check whether or not this specification of the output is supported by the device. If a device that requires power exceeding the maximum rating is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. Even if charging could be completed, the time required for charging may be longer than when the genuine charger for that device is used.

• Depending on the device, charging may be possible only when a special cable is used. In this case, be sure to connect the device using the special cable.
• When a device that communicates with a PC is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible.
• When connect a device for charging, disconnect the device promptly after charging is completed.

■ How to Use the USB Power Supply

3.0A 2.4A 602432

Type-A and Type-C

cial re to al 2.4A 602475

Type-A

Front seat USB power supply (an audio device can be connected and used)

2-terminal type USB power supply
- USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*
- USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

1-terminal type USB power supply
- USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A

3.0A 2.4A 602433

Console USB power supply (charge only) (if equipped)

• USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*
• USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

USB Use the USB terminal to use or charge/ean electronic device.

When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the power can be supplied to the electronic device.

6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option)

CAUTION

• Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This cause a fire.
  ● Always extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them into the ashtray, and then close the ashtray securely. If you keep the ashtray open, the fire of the cigarette may spread to another cigarette butt and start a fire.
• Do not put flammable material in the ashtray.
• Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ash-tray's inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.

Diagram of a mechanical device with an open lid and internal components, showing a rotational arrow (no text or symbols)

601270

The portable ashtray can be installed in each cup holder or bottle holder. For the locations of the cup holders, refer to "Cu Holder" P334. For the locations of the bottle holders, refer to "Bottle Holders" P335.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

6-9. Assist Grip

Illustration of a curved mechanical component with a labeled part (1), alongside a wire or cable extension (no text or symbols present)

p 1 Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the body of the passengers when they are in the seat and the vehicle is moving.

the

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when getting up from the seat. Holding and pulling the assist grip in the wrong way could break the grip and possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the assist grip. Doing so could break and damage the object.

6-10. Coat Hook

Line drawing of a hanger with handle and clasp, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

• Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
• Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no pointed objects in the pockets.

If these instructions are ignored, following may occur in sudden stops or in a collision.

• Serious injuries by the items thrown through the cabin
• Incorrect SRS curtain airbag deployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the driver's view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Simple line drawing of a curved object with a small inset, no text or symbols present

The coat hook is attached to each rear passenger's assist grip.

6-11. Shopping Bag Hook

■ Legacy

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) more.

Technical line drawing of a car rear bumper with two internal compartments (no text or symbols)

A shopping bag hook is attached to each inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk lid opening.

■ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) o more.

Top-down view of a car backrest with two internal compartments and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.

To use the hook, push the upper portion and the shopping bag hook will appear. Store the hook after using it.

6-12. Floor Mat

Diagram of a car interior showing foot, seat, and dashboard with a warning sign (no text or symbols on main diagram)

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Observe the following precautions to prevent the floor mat from slipping forward.

• Be sure to use a genuine SUBARU floor mat designed with grommets in the correct locations.
• Make sure that the driver's floor mat is placed back in its proper location and is correctly secured on its retaining pins.

- Do not use more than one floor mat.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a magnified inset showing a curved component (no text or symbols)

Retaining pins are located on the driver's side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured using the built-in grommets, by placing the grommets over the pins and pushing them downward.

6-13. Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness - If Equipped)

The Lifting Cargo Cover is provided to cover the cargo area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight.

The cover also has the practicability of i easy lift-up function, eliminating the need to rewind the cover all the way when accessing the cargo.

This cover can be detached to make roo for additional cargo.

1 2 3 4 602083

1 Cargo area cover
2 Cover housing
3 Front cover
4 Front cover rod

■ To Install the Cover Housing

602422

1. Insert the left side cover housing end into the retainer, then insert the right cover housing end into the right retainer.

Make sure both ends are clicked into the retainers.

NOTE

If the label on the cover housing is placed on the top, the cover housing will be installed in reverse and it will not be affixed to the vehicle body.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard and seat compartments with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Align the right side of the front cover rod end with a triangle mark on the cargo area trim.

NOTE

When the rear seatbacks are reclined align the front cover rod to the rear triangle mark.

1. Push the front cover rod on the right side against the cargo area trim to shorten the front cover rod.
2. Once the right side is aligned, align the left side to a triangle mark on the cargo area trim to fix the front cover in place.

CAUTION

When reclining the rear seatback, move the front cover backward so

that the cover is not damaged

Using the Cover

WARNING

Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and the object on the co could tumble forward in the event a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and re-winding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

▼ To extend the cover

2 A 1 er of 602084

A Stopper

1 Tilt up
2 Pull out

1. Hold the cover by the handle in the center, tilt it up and pull it out to free the stoppers.

Top-down schematic of a car's rearview and side rear seats showing structural components (no text or labels)

1. Pull out the cover by the handle in center to extend it. Then insert the stoppers into the catches as shown.

▼ To rewind the cover

Top-down line drawing of a car backrest with internal components and a magnified inset showing internal structure (no text or symbols)

1. Hold the cover by the handle in the

center and pull it toward you, then slightly lower it to free the stoppers the catches.

A 1 2 e 602072

A Stopper
1 Rewind
2 Tilt up

1. Slowly rewind the cover completely. Then tilt the cover up by the handle hook the stoppers.

in

Top-down line drawing of a car backseat showing the roof, seats, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Do not leave the cover dangling. Make sure the stoppers are hooked on to the cover housing. Otherwise the cover may be torn and damaged.

to

▼ To lift the cover

CAUTION

Do not drive with the cover lifted up. Doing so could obstruct the rear-ward view.

Top-down diagram of a car backrest showing structural components and airflow path (no text or symbols)

1. Push down the handle in the center to lift the cover up. The stoppers will slide up the grooves and stop at the top.
   

Interior view of a car backrest with internal structural diagram and no visible text or symbols

1. To lower the lifted cover, hold the cover by the handle and pull it back into to the

catches.

■ To Remove the Cover Housing

1. Slowly rewind the cover completely. Then tilt the cover up by the handle hook the stoppers.
2. Push the front cover rod on the right side against the cargo area trim to shorten the front cover rod.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and rear seats with a circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the front cover and place it on the cover housing.

602429

1. Hold down the button on the right-hand cargo area trim and lift up the right-hand cover housing end.
2. Gently slide the left-hand cover end out to the right then remove the cover housing.

■ To Stow the Cover

The cover can be stowed in the under-storage.

Top-down view of a car interior showing the rearview and side view of the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

1. To open the cargo floor lid, pull the handle up.

Diagram of a car interior showing structural components and a magnified inset view (no text or symbols)

1. Use the hook provided on the back hang the cargo floor lid open. The hook can be hanged onto the opening of the rear gate.

Top-down view of a car's rear intake structure showing vent, dashboard, and engine compartment (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the left and right corners of the cargo floor lid.

Technical line drawing of a car interior frame with no visible text or symbols

to4. Stow the cover housing in the cargo area under-floor storage.

NOTE

To make enough room for the cover when stowing, first insert the right-hand side into the ditch on the cargo area trim.

■ To Take Out the Stowed

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt buckle being inserted into a car seat (no text or symbols)

1. Raise the cover.
2. Take out the cover housing by lifting toward you.

Cover4. Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 110 lbs (50 kg) per hook.

Top-down technical diagram of a car interior showing structural components and airflow direction (no text or labels)

The cargo area is equipped with several tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses. When not in use, put the hooks up into the storing recesses.

6-15. Adjustable Storage (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Interior view of a car showing the backrest and seat area with a highlighted internal space (no text or symbols)

There is an adjustable storage net in the cargo area. Push the net downward to expand the cargo area.

Net6-16. Under-Floor Storage Compartment (If Equipped)

The subfloor storage compartment is located under the floor of the trunk or cargo area and can be used to store items. To open the lid, pull the tab or handle up.

NOTE

When storing a flat tire, put the su storage in the trunk or cargo area.

CAUTION

● Always keep the lid of the sub-floor storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event sudden stop or an accident.
- Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the subfloor storage compartment.

small ubfloor 602188

Legacy

of

Top-down line drawing of a car rear view showing engine compartment and roof structure (no text or symbols)

Outback (model with temporary spare tire) For Outback (model with temporary spare tire), hang the hook provided on the underside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open.

- CONTINUED -

NOTE

The lid cannot be hooked while the Lifting Cargo Cover is being used. Rewind the cover completely to open the lid.

Starting and Operating

7-1. Fuel 354

Fuel Requirements.... 354 Fuel Filler Lid and Cap.... 355

7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) 359

7-3. Preparing to Drive 360

7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch) ..... 361

General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine.... 361

Starting Engine 362

Stopping the Engine 363

Steering Lock 363

7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System) 363

Safety Precautions.... 363 Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 363

Starting Engine.... 363

Stopping Engine 365

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly 366

Steering Lock 366

7-6. Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) 367

Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) 367

Alternate Operation Method for Models with "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" 370

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models without "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System").... 370

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models with "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System") 371

Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine Start Shutdown 371

Pre-heating or Pre-cooling the Interior of the Vehicle 371

Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter Transceiver).... 371

System Maintenance 372

Certification for Remote Engine Starter 373

7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission .....374

Continuously Variable Transmission Features..... 374 Select Lever..... 375

Shift Lock Function.... 377

Selection of Manual Mode 378

Driving Tips 379

7-8. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)....380

Intelligent (I) Mode 380 Ste

Sport Sharp (S#) Mode 380

SI-DRIVE Switch.... 380

7-9. Power Steering 381

7-10. Braking....382

Braking Tips 382

Brake System.... 382

Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators.... 383

7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .....384

ABS Self-Check 384

ABS Warning Light 384

7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System .... 384 EBD System Malfunctions.... 385

7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System ...... Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor ...... To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System ...... 387

7-14. X-MODE (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness).... 388 To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE.... 389 Hill Descent Control Function .... 391

7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models) 392 Certification for Tire Pressure Monitoring System 393 TPMS Screen 393

7-16. Parking Your Vehicle .... 394 Electronic Parking Brake .... 394 Parking Tips .... 399

7-17. Auto Start Stop System .... 400 System Operation .... 400 Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status.... 404 System Warning .... 404

7-18. Front View Monitor (If Equipped) .... 405 How to Access the Front View Monitor.... 405 How to Cancel the Front View Monitor .... 406 Range of Image on Screen.... 406 Guiding Line.... 407 Handling of Camera .... 407

7-19. Rear View Camera ....408 How to Use the Rear View Camera .... 409 Viewing Range on the Screen.... 410 Help Lines .... 411

7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped) ....413 System Features ....413 System Operation ....415 BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer ....416 BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator....418 BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator....419 To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ....419 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ....420 Handling of Rear Corner Radars ....421

7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped) ....422 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview....423 Operating Conditions ....425 Sonar Audible Alarm Function....428 Automatic Braking Function Operation ....43 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Operation ....431 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/OFF Setting ....432 RAB Warning Indicator....433 Handling of the Sonar Sensors....433

7-22. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped) .....434 User Recognition Function ..... 438 Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning ..... 440 Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning ..... 441

Starting and Operating

Using the Driver Monitoring System.... 442

Registering and Deleting a User.... 444

Registering and Deleting Driver Position Personalization.... 444

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings ..... 444

How to Get the Source Code Using the Open Source 445

7-1. Fuel

CAUTION

• Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system
• Some gas stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, off fuels posted as regular octane gasoline with an octane rating below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of those fuels are not recommended.

■ Fuel Requirements

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane ratio of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

NOTE

When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) o higher to reduce the risk of engine overheat.

▼ Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane ra can cause persistent and heavy knocking which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill when you accelerate. See your dealer of qualified service technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistent

▽ RON

This octane rating is the Research Octa Number.

▼ AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

▼ Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is design to accept only an unleaded gasoline fille nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy

▼ Reformulated gasoline

SUBARU supports the use of reformulate gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn more

cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

tingMMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-function indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

▼ Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your

vehicle, but should contain no more than 15% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 15% ethanol, including from pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel conta you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in following description.

• Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
• Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5 of the fuel mixture AND if it is accom

n panied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.

• If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they m be fuel related, try a different brand gasoline before seeking service at yo SUBARU dealer.
• Fuel system damage or driveability of problems which result from the use improper fuel are not covered under SUBARU Limited Warranty.

■ Fuel Filler Lid and Cap

▼ Locations of the fuel filler lid

s he ci- 5% 702080

▼ Refueling

Only one person should be involved in refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress. Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station.

off. Before refueling, stop the vehicle, then turn off the ignition switch to turn off all the electrical components. At this time, the fuel filler lid also unlocks.

NOTE

When you lock the door, the fuel filler lid also locks. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one of the operations below.

• Press the unlock button on the key fob.

• Press the unlock side of the power door locking switch.

• Push the rear side of the fuel filler

• The fuel filler lid opens automatically. Open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any sta-

- CONTINUED -

tic electricity that may be present of your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is a possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

1 2 702319

1 Open
2 Close

1. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning slowly counterclockwise.

qn

WARNING

• Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position first and then close all vehicle doors and windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.
• When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for a sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

Diagram showing two mechanical components with a downward arrow indicating motion or assembly (no text or symbols present)

1. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder left inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

- When refueling, insert the fuel nozzle securely into the fuel filler pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard.

● Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard.	CAUTION Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.	- Press the lock side of the power door locking switch. When the doors are locked or unlocked using the automatic door lock system, the fuel filler lid will be locked or unlocked at the same time
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel. 7. Put the cap back on and turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening.	NOTE ● You will see the " sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the right side of the vehicle. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate. Refer to "CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator Light" P188. ● To lock the fuel filler lid, perform of the operations below. However if these operations are performed when the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid will not lock when it is subsequently closed. - Press the 🔒 button on the key fob.	CAUTION ● Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system. ● After refueling, turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may leak out while the vehicle is being driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident creating a fire hazard. ● Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because one fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty. ● Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

- Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.

▼ If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened (Legacy)

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened d a malfunction or a dead battery, it can opened from the trunk.

Diagram of a mechanical component with curved lines and a central circular feature, no text or symbols present

1. Remove the access cover at the right-filler lid side of the trunk trim.

s could i- level 1 pened 702325

1 Clip

be. Remove the yellow clip from the trim.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with directional arrows and a black arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

1. Pull the yellow clip to unlock the fuel

▼ If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the cargo area.

-16 702321

1. Remove the access cover at the right-side of the cargo area trim using a flat-head screwdriver.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled part '1' (no text or symbols beyond label)

1 Clip

1. Remove the yellow clip from the trim
   

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a fastener inserted (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the yellow clip to unlock the fuel filler lid.

7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer when testing an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

• At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
• Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicle's emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass this test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicle's registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the performance of the engine's emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model years and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.

• The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) and examination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool.
• A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light/mal-

- CONTINUED -

function indicator light (MIL) is observed, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete.

• A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) is not properly operating (light is illuminated or is not working due to a burned oil bulb) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicle's computer.
• A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBDII system readiness monitors "NOT READY" is greater than one. If the vehicle's battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for the emission test. Under this condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive higher vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
• Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle's wheels to turn while the vehicle remains one place. Prior to your vehicle being p on a dynamometer, tell your emission inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected in an attempt to bypass AWD for state emission testing. An AWD vehicle must be tested using an AWD dynamometer with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

7-3. Preparing to Drive

put You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy) and rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) are fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine m result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

NOTE

• Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.
• When towing a trailer, refer to "Trailer Hitch (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness - If Equipped)" P470.

7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

■ General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine

WARNING

• Never start the engine from outside the vehicle (except when using the remote engine start system). It may result in an accident.
• Do not leave the engine running in locations with poor ventilation such as a garage and indoors. The exhaust gas may enter the vehicle or indoors, and it may result in carbon monoxide poisoning.
• Do not start the engine near dry foliage, paper, or other flammable substances. The exhaust pipe and exhaust emissions can create a fire hazard at high temperatures.

CAUTION

• If the engine is stopped during driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn.
• When starting the engine, be sure to sit in the driver's seat (except when using the remote engine start system).

NOTE

- Avoid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine has started.

• After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high.
• On rare occasions, it may be difficult to start the engine depending on the fuel used and the driving condition (repeated short trips when the engine is not warmed up sufficiently). In such a case, it is recommended to switch to a different brand of fuel.
• On rare occasions, transient knocking may be heard from the engine when the accelerator is operated rapidly such as a rapid start-up and a rapid acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

- The engine starts more easily when the headlights, air conditioner and rear window defogger are turned

■ Starting Engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start operating the starter for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more before trying again.

NOTE

• It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle's self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the "position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
• Do not shift the select lever while starter is cranking.

off if you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the select lever into the "N" position. Do not attempt to place the select lever of a moving vehicle into the "P" position.

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the "P" or "N" position (preferably "P" position). The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the "P" or "N" position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" line position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to "Warning and Indicator Lights" P183.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. 6. N" If the engine does not start, perform the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is applied, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly (ap-

proximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the "LOCK" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the "START" position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the "LOCK" position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

1. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure that the select lever is at the "P" or "N" position and that the parking brake is applied.

■ Stopping the Engine

The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental activation of the "LOCK" position on ignition switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.

1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the "P" position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK/OFF" position.

The engine will stop, and the power will be switched off.

■ Steering Lock

After stopping the engine and the key is removed from ignition switch, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

▼ When the steering lock cannot be released

When you cannot unlock the steering wheel, perform the following steps.

1. Check that the parking brake is applied.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Check that the select lever is set in "P" position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it he depressed.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position while turning the steering wheel left and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel doing the steps, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

■ Safety Precautions

Refer to "Safety Precautions" P120.

■ Operating Range for Push-Button Start System

the Refer to "Operating Range for Push-Button Start System" P176.

■ Starting Engine

WARNING

• There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine" P361.
• If the indicator on the push-but-0 ton ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION

• When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashing in orange, there may malfunction with the vehicle. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing green after the engine has started, it means that the steel is still locked. While moving to steering wheel right and left, depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch.
• Do not continue pressing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing could cause a malfunction. If engine does not start, stop pr ing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the push button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to "OFF". Wait 10 seconds, and press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

NOTE

• When pressing the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal:
  be a - The engine starter operates for maximum of 10 seconds and starting the engine, the starter stops automatically.
• The engine can be started reg less of the power status.
• If the engine does not start, check the security indicator light. Then press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the bra pedal to switch the power to "O
• If the light had illuminated, try start the engine again.
• If the light had been off, pres push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal mo forcefully.
  The engine start procedures may function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle in such a case, refer to "Starting Engine" P503.
• If the vehicle battery is discharged then the steering cannot be unlocked. Charge the battery.
• After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high.
• It may be difficult to start the en

when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle's self-di-

after ^a agnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the “ON” position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine. • Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.

the 1 ENGINE START STOP 2 306052

1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the line driver's seat.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the select lever is in the position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the "N" position, however, for safety reasons, start in the "P" position.
3. Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the position, the indicator does not turn green.
4. While depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

• While pressing the select lever button in, the indicator on the push-button ignition switch will not turn green even when the select lever in the "P" position.

• In case the engine does not start the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the "P" position, and switch the power to "ACC". Depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.

• When the engine is not started, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In such
  "P" case, depress the brake pedal mo forcefully than usual. Check that t operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green, and press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

■ Stopping Engine

N1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the "P" position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch. The engine will stop, and the power will be switched off.

WARNING

• Do not touch the push-button is ignition switch during driving.
  When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, the engine will stop.
• The switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer.
• The switch is pressed briefly times or more in succession.
  When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required a on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.

- If the engine stops during driving, do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

• Do not stop the engine while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.
• If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position, the power will be in "ACC". If the vehicle is left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.

Push Two More to Stop

NOTE

• If you press the push-button ignition switch while driving, the emergency engine stop interrupt screen alerts the driver by messages on the combination meter display (color LCD) and beeps.
• Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.

■ Steering Lock

After stopping the engine and any door including the rear gate is opened, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. When the engine is restarted, the steering lock will be automatically released.

▼ When the steering lock cannot be released

1 ENGINE START STOP 2 306052

y.1 Operation indicator 2 Push-button ignition switch

▽ Operation indicator flashing in green

1. Check that the select lever is set in the "P" position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.
   ▽ Operation indicator flashing in orange

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock function. Immediately contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

■ When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

Refer to "Access Key Fob - If Access K Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P502.

When you cannot restart the engine due to the steering lock, check the status of operation indicator and perform the following steps.

7-6. Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

WARNING

• There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine" P361.
• Do not remote start a vehicle in enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). Prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of carbon monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the re-

mote engine start system.

NOTE

• The length of time for which it is acceptable to allow the engine to remain idling may be bound by laws and regulations. Check the local rules when using the remote engine start system.
• When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

■ Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob)

1

1 Fob button

▼ Starting the engine

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate) and the engine hood must be closed prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point will prevent starting or cause the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on your remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within operating range of the system and the start request is received, the following will occur.

• The fob flashes and beeps once.
• The horn sounds once.
- The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine start the following will occur.

• The fob flashes and beeps twice.
• The horn sounds once.
- The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remot engine start system, the following will occur.

• The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights remain illuminated.
• The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds.
• The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not s (or starts and stalls) the remote engine start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times. The system will not attempt to restart the engine if it determines a veh malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start request will be aborted.

▼ Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request not received (for example, if the user is far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

▼ Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.

• The total run-time has exceeded 20 minutes.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.
• A key is in the ignition switch.
• The engine hood is open.
• The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 cicle rpm.
  ● The security alarm is triggered.
• The select lever is not in the "P" position.

If the system detects any door (including the rear gate) open during operation, it prevent starting or stop the engine, and sound the horn and flash side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times

too addition to the items above, if the vehicle's engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE

- If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on using the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle.

- If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.

▼ Remote start operation - fob confirmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a bidirectional transceiver that can confirm will system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fob's LED-backlit button and internal piezo buzzer will indicate the status of the system using the following the flash and beep sequences, provided the fob is within operational range of the system.

Precondition	Fob Indication		Meaning
	Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed	Continuous while button is held down	— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fog button twice within 3 sec	1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
	2 flashes 2 beeps Engine	started successfully
	1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
	3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle	is in range but engine not started
Engine idling by remote engine start operation	1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
	3 flashes 3 beeps		Engine stopped by system time-out or for sa reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and holding fob button for at least 2 sec	3 flashes 3 beeps Engine	stopped by user request
	1 flash every 3 sec —		Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Alternate Operation Method for Models with "Keyless Acess with Push-Button Start System"

1 701405

Access key fob
1 Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the eng as follows.

▼ Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions.

• The select lever is in the "P" position.
• All doors including the rear gate are closed.

- The engine hood is closed.

The push-button ignition switch is in the "OFF" position.

▼ Starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine start system, briefly press the lock button twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashers then flash once again, and the keyless buzzer chirps once again
3. After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash three times, and the horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3 release the lock button. The engine then start successfully.

▼ Stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop engine with remote engine start system

▼ Remote start safety features

For detailed information, refer to "Remote start safety features" P368.

■ Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models without "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System")

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Alarm System" P146.

• Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the "ON" position.

• Press any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

• Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut down when any door or rear gate is he opened.

• Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the "START" position to restart the engine.

■ Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models with “Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System”)

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function and remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Alarm System P146.

• Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position.

• Press any button on the access key fob.

• Enter the vehicle. The engine will remain running provided the access key fob is present and detected by vehicle.

• Press the push-button ignition switch once while depressing the brake ped before driving your vehicle. The remote

It engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash and beep 3 times to indicate the remote start system has been sh down.
■ Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine Start Shutdown
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immediately following remote engine start shutdown.
in the
■ Pre-heating or Pre-cooling of the Interior of the Vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the temperature controls to the desired setting and operation. After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate and heat or cool the interior to your setting.
■ Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter Transceiver)
New transmitters can be programmed to the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, damaged or additional transmitters are desired (the system will accept up to ei

transmitters). New remote engine start at transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver's door (the driver's door must remain open throughout the entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to "ON" then
   e is "LOCK"/"OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", then back to "ON" again and leave the ignition "ON" throughout the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode.
5. Press and release the "O" button on the transmitter that you want to pro-gram.
6. The system will flash the side market lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn one time, indicating that the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time.

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters).

8. The system will exit the transmitter learn mode if the key is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the door is closed or after 2 minutes.

■ System Maintenance NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver: In the event that the vehicle's battery replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the vehicle minimum of one time using the key prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle electronic systems to re-synchronize.

▼ Changing the battery

CAUTION

• Do not let dust, oil or water get or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to allow children touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could swallow them.

• There is a danger of explosion if an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery.
• Battery should not be exposed to is excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

icle a For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

Perform the procedure described in "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" P562.

For remote engine starter transceiver: The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begins to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery

to

Line drawing of a car interior with a handle and lever, no text or symbols present

701910

1. Remove the small phillips screw located on the back side lower left corner of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start transmitter halves apart using a small flat-head screwdriver.

Line drawing of a device with internal components and a handle, no text or symbols present

CR-2450 701912

1. Remove the circuit board from the bottom half of the case and remove the battery and replace with new one. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on old battery before removing it to ens that the new battery is inserted properly (battery "+" should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on battery).
2. Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the phillips screw and test the remote engine start system.

■ Certification for Remote Engine Starter
▼ U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission

WARNING

Do not shift from the "P" or "N" position into the "D" or "R" posit while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to lurch forward or backward.

CAUTION

• Observe the following precautions. Failure to observe these precautions could cause damage to the transmission.
• Shift into the "P" or "R" position only after the vehicle has
• Do not shift from the "D" position into the "R" position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped.
• Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the "N" or "P" position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

• Never move the vehicle rearward by inertia with the select lever in a forward driving position or move the vehicle forward by inertia with the select lever set in the "R" position. Doing so r result in an unexpected accident or malfunction.
• When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever the "P" position. Do not park for long time with the select lever any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.

■ Continuously Variable Transmission Features

The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. It also has a manual mode

NOTE

- When the engine coolant temperature is still low, the transmission w shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve dri-

veability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up.
- Immediately after transmission fluid is replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
- When driving under continuous heavy load conditions such as towing a camper or climbing a long, steep hill, the engine speed, vehicle speed and air conditioning system cooling performance may automatically be reduced. This is not a malfunction. This phenomenon results from the de. engine control function maintaining the cooling performance of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed will return to a normal speed when wilthe engine is able to maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases. Driving in under a heavy load must be performed with extreme care. Do not try

to pass a vehicle in front when driving on an uphill slope while towing.

• The continuously variable transmission is a chain type system that provides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving conditions, a chain operating noise may be heard that is characteristic of this type of syste
• Place the shift boot to the original position after it is lifted. If the self lever is operated with the shift boot in the rolled up position, the shift boot may have tension and it may disturb the select lever operation.

■ Select Lever

n. lect ot 1 702327

1 Select lever button

graph TD
    P[" "] --> R[" "]
    R --> N[" "]
    N --> M-D["M - D"]
    M-D --> N
    N --> P
    style M-D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#cff,stroke:#333

→: With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in

→: Shift while pressing the select lever button in

→: Shift without pressing the select lever button

The select lever has four positions, "P", "R", "N", "D" and also has a manual gate for using the manual mode.

NOTE

- For some models, to protect the o engine while the select lever is in the "P" or "N" position, the engine controlled so that the engine speed may not become too high even if th accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

- When you change the select lever position, make sure to move the select lever firmly to the selected position.

▼ P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake, then shift into the "P" position. Do not hold the vehicle with or the mechanical friction of the transmission

To shift the select lever from the "P" to other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

▼ R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. shift from the "N" to "R" position, stop vehicle completely then move the lever of the "R" position while pressing the selected lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned to the "ACC" position, the movement of select lever from the "N" to "R" position only possible by depressing the brake pedal. For details, refer to "Shift Lock

Function" P377.

▼ N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position, the transmission neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is applied.

the Avoid coasting with the transmission in neutral. Engine braking has no effect in this condition.

WARNING

any Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the "N" (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the ris of an accident is consequently increased.

To

the ▼ D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The transmission shifts automatically and continuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration require. Also, while driving up and down fill, the transmission assists and controls the driving performance and engine braking while corresponding to the road gra

When more acceleration is required in "D" position, depress the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift. In this case, the transmission will operate like a conventional automatic transmission. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the "D" position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift to any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" P378. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission will switch from the manual mode back to the "D" position for normal driving.

While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes - the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeated upshifting and down-shifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is depressed to accelerate the vehicle again.

Shift Lock Function

The shift lock function helps prevent the improper operation of the select lever.

• The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and the brake peda depressed.
• The select lever cannot be moved from the "P" position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and the operate the select lever.
• Only the "P" position allows you to turn the key from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position and remove the key from the ignition key cylinder (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• Only the "P" position allows you to turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")
• If the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position while the select lever in the "N" position, the select lever

not be moved to the "P" position without the shift lock system or the vehicle depressing the brake pedal and press-control system.

ing the select lever button.

▼ Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, the ignition switch back to the "ON" position, then move the select lever to the "P" position with the select lever be pressed and the brake pedal depressed

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, check and confirm the following and release the shift lock accordingly.

- When the select lever cannot be shifted from "P" to "N":

Refer to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release portion" P377.

- When the select lever cannot be shifted from "N" to "R" or "P":

Place the ignition switch in the "ACC" position, then move the select lever to "P" position with the brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever still does not move, re to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release portion" P377.

If the shift lock cannot be released without using the shift lock release button in the above cases, there may be a malfunction

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

turn Shift lock release using the shift lock release portion

Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine.

e ft e 1 702329

1 Hole

eter Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.

Illustration of a screwdriver with a black arrow pointing to its tip (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the grip portion of the screw-driver.
   

Line drawing of a car interior showing a seatbelt and gear shift (no text or symbols)

1. While depressing the brake pedal, insert the screwdriver into the hole, press the shift lock release portion using the screwdriver, and then move

the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection soon as possible.

■ Selection of Manual Mode

Diagram of a mechanical gear shift mechanism with no visible text or symbols

With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the "D" position to the "M" position to select the manual mode.

as 1 2 3 702335

1 Upshift indicator
2 Downshift indicator
3 Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate. The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gearshift is possible. When the upshift indicator “△” is on, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator “▽” is on, downshifting is possible. When both indicators are on, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

702985

To upshift to the next higher gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “-” indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the "D" position from the "M" position.

While driving with the select lever in the “position, if you change gears by operating the shift paddle, the gear position indicator light illuminates and shows the current gear condition.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on shift paddles. Doing so may result accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points ca fully and bear them in mind when the manual mode.

- If you attempt to shift down when engine speed is too high, i.e., w downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red z on, beeps will be emitted to warn y d that the downshift is not possible

If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.

- You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the shift paddle twice in rap succession.

The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle or moving.

- If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the OIL TEMP" warning light will illustrate. Immediately stop the vehicle a safe place and let the engine

until the warning light turns off.

theDriving Tips IN NOTE

If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

using • On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you can pull away from a standstill safely and easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of the line, manual mode.

• Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the "D" or "R" position.

• Make sure to apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission. • Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the "D" position. Use the brake instead.

steps The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a "AT standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.

7-8. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) works to maximize engine performance, control and efficiency.

This system consists of two modes: Intelligent (I) and Sport Sharp (S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switch, the character of the power unit changes.

■ Intelligent (I) Mode

▼ For smooth, efficient performance driving

Simple line drawing of a mechanical or electrical component with two circular components and a labeled bracket [1] (no text or symbols beyond basic markings)

The linear acceleration characteristic of the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for norm driving usage.

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-balanced performance with greater fuel efficiency and smooth driveability without stress. Power delivery is moderate during acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and situations that do not require full power output. It provides better control in difficult driving conditions, such as slippery roads or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle response.

▼ For maximum performance driving

S# 702234

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating level of engine performance and control. The throttle becomes more responsive regardless of the engine speed. Delivering maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is ideal for tackling twisting roads and for merging or overtaking other vehicles on the freeway with confidence.

SI-DRIVE Switch

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

To select the intelligent (I) mode, press the "I" side of the switch. To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, press the "S#" side of the switch.

NOTE

• While the engine is cool, you cannot change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.

• The next time you turn on the engine, after you turned off the engine in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Intelligent (I) mode.

• While the engine is running, if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-function indicator light illuminates, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Intelligent (I) mode. In this case, it is not possible to change to another mode.

• If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink, the SI-DRIVE system may malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer.

7-9. Power Steering

is 702348

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the power steering warning light on the combination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is functioning properly. Then, if the engine started, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.

CAUTION

While the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

• The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during a parallel parking.
• The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power

- CONTINUED -

assist limitation to occur too frequent this may result in a malfunction of power steering control system.

10. Braking

■ Braking Tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads.

▼ When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the veh at a safe speed while lightly depressing brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

▼ Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To prevent this, shift into a lower gear to a stronger engine braking.

▼ Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal sudden when a tire is punctured. This could ca

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

■ Brake System

▼ Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake system. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.

Electronic Brake booster

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic brake booster to provide additional braking force. Do not turn off the ignition switch while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even help when the brake booster completely stops get functioning. If this happens, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than during normal braking, and the braking distance will increase.

NOTE

When the following operations are performed, an operating sound from the electronic brake boost control module may be heard. This is not malfunction.

• The brake pedal was operated.
- The driver's door was opened.
- The EyeSight function was activated.
- Several minutes have passed after the engine stopped.

▽ Supplemental booster function when pressure fails

If there is a malfunction in the braking system, the power for the braking will be stored by controlling the hydraulic pressure of the VDC system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while the supplemental booster function is operating, an operation sound and brake pe vibration may be generated.

▼ Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though these occur, they do not in cate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly.

- You might feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force. * You might hear the sound of ABS operating from the engine compartment.

■ Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal wiring and housing (no text or symbols)

The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heated from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

• The ABS does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe following distance from other vehicles.
• When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy road, over newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and leave an distance from other vehicles.
• When you feel the ABS operati you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking, braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may be a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

■ ABS Self-Check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating noise of the ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle is started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the A being carried out and does not indicate abnormal condition.

■ ABS Warning Light

Refer to "ABS Warning Light" P191.

7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System

The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicle's loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

EBD System Malfunctions

BRAKE / (!) ABS / (ABS) 702982

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the following warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

• Brake system warning light
• ABS warning light
  ● Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If all of the warning lights remain on even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

• Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If at all in doubt about whether t brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

• Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.
• Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an indication that the road being travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and und all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

• Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

• The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly

• All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further more, the amount of wear should be the same for all f tires.

• Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar.
• When replacing a flat tire, use only the specified temporary

spare tire. However, even with the specified temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be reduced.

• If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate correctly.
  In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engine's output and the wheels' respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.
• Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is indicated by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
• Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels' tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

NOTE

- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

• Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt.
• The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree.
• An operating noise from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine.
• The brake pedal seems to jolt when driving off after starting the engine.

- In the following circumstances, the vehicle may be less stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system malfunction.

• On gravel-covered or rutted roads
• On unfinished roads
• When the vehicle is towing a trailer (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

- When the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires

• Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slight different compared to that for normal conditions.
• It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner even if the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control.
• Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire as failure to do may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor

Refer to "Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator Light" P196 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light P197.

■ To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Setting

icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models). Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system temporarily may help to escape from the following situations. Turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when necessary.

- A standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface - Extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. You should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using con-

trol of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully based on the road surface condition.

NOTE

• When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted.
• When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle's running performance is comparable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely necessary.
• Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the

- CONTINUED -

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation 7-14. X-MODE (Outback/Indicator light flashes. Subaru Outback Wilderness)

WARNING

• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with X-MODE could easily lead to a serious accident.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with hill descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be especially careful, and depress the brake pedal if necessary when driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads. Failure to control the vehicle's speed may cause a loss of control and result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

- Even if your vehicle is equipped with X-MODE, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having X-MODE does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.

• Activate X-MODE when you encounter a very slippery surface at low speed. However, having X-MODE is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-MODE, the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.
• Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have the system inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

• Observe the following precautions in order to ensure that X-MODE is operating properly:

• All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further-more, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.

• Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the label attached to the vehicle's

door pillar.

- Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a full tire. With a normal temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of X-MODE is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.

- If the hill descent control function has operated continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake disc may increase and the hill descent control function may be temporarily disabled. In this case, the hill descent control indicator will disappear. When the hill descent control indicator disappears, the hill descent control function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamic Control system, etc. for driving with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can drive more comfortably even in slippery road conditions including uphill and downhill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

- Hill descent control function: If using the hill descent control function, you can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed of driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is likely to increase, the brake control system will be activated to adjust the vehicle speed.

- Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing ability and driving ability as well as enabling smooth application of torque for easier control of the steering wheel.

■ To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE

S 1 306189

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) 1 X-MODE indicator

u ed m 1 2 306190

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)

1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

To activate or deactivate X-MODE, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings icon" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

X-MODE control (models with 1 mode)

	Speed range
	Low-speed range (less than 25 mph (40 km/h))	Medium to high-speed range (25 mph (40 km/h) or higher)
Outback	X-MODE: Available	X-MODE: Not available*3

X-MODE control (models with 2 modes)

	Speed range
	Low-speed range (less than 25 mph (40 km/h))	Medium to high-speed range (25 mph (40 km/h) or higher)
Subaru Outback Wilderness	DEEP SNOW/MUD: Available*1*2
	SNOW/DIRT: Available	X-MODE: Not available*4
Outback	DEEP SNOW/MUD: Available
	SNOW/DIRT: Available

*1: When DEEP SNOW/MUD is operating, X-MODE is automatically switched to the low-speed range when the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) and to the high-speed range when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. However, it is not possible to switch to SNOW/DIRT while the vehicle is operating in the high-speed range. If you attempt this, the buzzer sounds twice.

*2: To switch DEEP SNOW/MUD off, operate the center information display. Refer car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models).
*3: If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be deactivated.
*4: If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be deactivated. X-MODE will automatically reactivate when the vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h).

NOTE

• Even if you try to activate X-MODE when the vehicle speed is 12 mph km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be activated. At this time, a buzzer wi sound twice.

• While the engine is running, if any the following conditions is met, X-MODE will be deactivated. In this case, it is not possible to activate X-MODE.

• The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates.

• The AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes.
• The ABS warning light illuminates.
• The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light illuminates.

- If the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it may not be possible to activate X-MODE. Even while X-MODE is activated, X-MODE will be deactivated when the engine coolant temperature increases. - The Auto Start Stop system will be stopped while X-MODE is activated.

Models with 2 modes:

• SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving on a snow-covered road where the n (20 points of contact between the tires and road surface are visible, or for will driving on an unpaved road.
• DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for driving on a road covered with deep snow where the points of contacts between the tires and road surface are not visible, or for driving on a muddy road.
• If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be deactivated. When you use the cruise control after X-MODE is automatically deactivated, X-MODE will not be automatically reactivated when the vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h).

■ Hill Descent Control Function

The hill descent control function will be in . standby mode when X-MODE is activated and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill descent control function may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

• Even while the hill descent control function is operating, you can vary the vehicle speed using the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
• During braking by the hill descent control function, the stop lights will illuminate.
  • The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradie of the road.

The hill descent control function may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

• An operating sound is heard briefly from the engine compartment while the hill descent control function is operating.
• The sensation of depressing the brake pedal is different, (harder than usual etc.) when the brake pedal is depressed during hill descent control function operation.

▼ Hill descent control indicator

701931

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in the standby

tmode. It flashes while the function is operating. It will disappear when the function is in the disabled mode. When this function is changed from operational to non-operational, it will disappear when the vehicle speed reaches more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

702350

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

- If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to the standard values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. Refer to "Tires and Wheels" P538. The tire pressure monitoring system does not function when the

vehicle is stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to "Flat Tires" P488.

- When a replacement tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

- When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if sealant residue is properly cleaned off. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any me parts under the driver's seat. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.

■eCertification for Tire Pressure Monitoring System

▼ U.S.-spec. models

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

TPMS Screen

35 33 [psi] 35 33

306204

This screen displays each tire pressure. Refer to "Basic Screens" P212.

7-16. Parking Your Vehicle

WARNING

• Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.
• Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they co near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
• Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

■ Electronic Parking Brake

1 2 3 4 702351

1 Parking brake switch

2 Indicator light

3 Release the electronic parking brake

4 Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

• Before exiting the vehicle, make me sure that you turn off the engine. Otherwise, the parking brake may be released and an accident may occur.
• If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer.

- If the electronic parking brake is operated under the following conditions, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash.

• The brake is overheated.
• The vehicle is on a steep slope.

In such cases, the vehicle may start to move which may lead to an accident. Always use the tire stops.

CAUTION

- When the electronic parking brake cannot be applied due to a malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your vehicle in such conditions, perform the following procedure.

• Stop your vehicle in a flat location.
• Shift the select lever in the "P" position. When the select lever cannot be shifted into the "P" position, you must release

shift lock. Refer to "Shift Function" P377.

- Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

• Never drive with the parking brake applied. Doing so will cause unnecessary brake pad wear. Before driving off, always make sure that the parking brake has been released and the brake system warning light has turned off.
• The braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when par ing on a steep slope while tow a trailer (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)).

PARK / (P) 702352

Electronic parking brake indicator light

When the parking brake is applied while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the following indicator lights illuminate.

The indicator light on the parking brake switch

• The electronic parking brake indicator light on the combination meter (for specific details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light" P193.)

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic parking brake. You can apply/release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake switch firmly while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the brake pedal is depressed.

NOTE

- The parking brake will not be released under the following conditions even if the parking brake switch is pressed.

- The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

- The brake pedal is not depressed.

• The electronic parking brake system uses motors to apply the parking brake. Therefore, operating sounds from the motors will be heard when applying or releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the motor sounds are heard when applying or releasing the parking brake.
• When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction or the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily, if the parking brake switch is operated, a chirp sound is heard and the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes.
• When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the parking brake.

• If the operation of the electronic parking brake switch is stopped midway or performed extremely slowly, the system may detect an error and turn on the brake system warning light. However, this does not indicate a malfunction if the warning light turns off after operating the switch.

• When the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long period of time, the electronic parking brake may operate automatically after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. This occurs due to checking the proper operation of the electronic parking brake and does not indicate a main function.

• If the electronic parking brake switch is malfunctioning and the electronic parking brake cannot be released, refer to the instructions described in "Automatic release function by accelerator pedal" P396.
• After activating the electronic parking brake, you may hear a short sound several minutes after the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the electronic parking brake switch illuminate as the system confirms prior engagement. This sound is different from the apply and release sound.

This can occur:

• If the brakes are extremely hot.
• If the car is parked on a steep incline.
• If the electronic parking brake

applied after the ignition switch period turned OFF. ke This is a normal operating sound under any of these conditions.

• The Auto Start Stop system is deactivated while the electronic parking brake is applied.
• If you operate the electronic parking brake switch while the Auto Start Stop system is activated, the Auto Start Stop system will be deactivated. The electronic parking brake will activate after the engine is restarted. After the electronic parking brake indicator light is illuminated, release your foot from the brake pedal.
• When starting the engine or restarting the engine using the Auto Stop system, if you operate the electronic parking brake switch, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash temporarily. However, this is not a malfunction if light turns off after the electronic parking brake is deactivated.

▼ Automatic release function by accelerator pedal

pThe electronic parking brake system has an automatic release function. The parking is brake will be automatically released by

dispressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does not operate under the following conditions.
- Any door (other than the trunk lid or rear ac-gate) is open.
The driver's seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automatically released, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch turn off.

^e NOTE

.Even if you have applied the parking brake, the parking brake will be automatically released when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Auto Vehicle Hold function The Auto Vehicle Hold function will automatically keep the vehicle stopped even after releasing the brake pedal when the vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at traffic signals.

WARNING

- Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function on a steep hill or slippery road. The vehicle may move even when using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, causing serious injury or accidents.

- Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function to park the vehicle. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents. Make sure to shift the select lever to the "P" position and apply the electronic parking brake in the following cases.

• When you are going to park your vehicle.
• When passengers are getting in or out of the vehicle.

• When you are loading or un- loading.

• When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, do not release the brake pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator illuminates. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.

• Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function in the following cases. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.

- When washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash

- When being towed

CAUTION

• When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function turned on, the electronic parking brake may be automatically applied. Then the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash. In such a case, depress a hold the brake pedal while stopping. Otherwise, the vehicle may move.
• When being towed, turn off the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto Vehicle Hold function when stopping on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle I function is turned off, the vehicle m roll backward when driving off.

∇ To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function

and (AVH) 702710

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P230

Hold (P1.6-inch display models) or "Car Settings may" P250 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned ON, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn on.

NOTE

- When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn

- CONTINUED -

off and the brake system warning light will turn on.

- Every time when starting the engine the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be set to off.

∇ To operate the Auto Vehicle function

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal when all of the following conditions are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold function will operate.

• Driver's door is closed.
• The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
• The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

(AVH) 702710

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

While the vehicle is kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto eVehicle Hold indicator light will flash.

∇ To release the Auto Vehicle function

perform any of the following operations release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal again.
• Apply the electronic parking brake.
• Shift the select lever to the "P" position with the brake pedal pressed.
• Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function operating with the center information display while depressing the brake pedal.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will change from flashing to illuminated.

Under any of the following conditions, the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be automatically released and the electronic parking brake will be automatically applied.

• The Auto Vehicle Hold function has been in operation for 10 minutes.
• The driver's seatbelt is unfastened.
• The ignition switch is turned to the

"LOCK"/"OFF" position.

• The vehicle is stopped on a steep slope.
  The Auto Vehicle Hold function is malfunctioning.

tion such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn off and the electronic parking brake indicator light will illuminate.

▼ Tips

- When the electronic parking brake is automatically applied with the vehicle kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, release the electronic parking brake by either of the following operations before starting off. Then make sure that the electronic parking brake indicator light is off.

• Depress the accelerator pedal with the driver's seatbelt fastened and with the doors closed.
• Press the electronic parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

- Under certain conditions, including a malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning message will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD). All warning messages should be strictly observed.

• On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal.
• When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the electronic parking brake may automatically applied after stopping, then the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while stopped. Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat surface, then apply the electronic parking brake.
• If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light does not illuminates even after touching "Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)" with the operating conditions met, the function may have a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
• You may hear a sound while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is keeping your vehicle stopped. This is normal, and does not represent a malfunction.
• When you depress the brake pedal to release the Auto Vehicle Hold function, an operation sound or vibration may be generated, or the brake pedal may return slowly. This is not a malfunction.
• While the vehicle is kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake

pedal may feel stiff. However, this is a malfunction.
When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, depress the brake pedal firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle may not operate.

Emergency brake

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used, the brake parts will wear down faster the brake may not work sufficiently due to brake overheating.

NOTE

• While using the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light of parking brake switch illuminate an a chirp sounds.
• While using the emergency brake, sound may be heard from the e compartment. This is the operating sound of the brake that is activa by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, and does not indicate a malfunction.

ribtthe foot brake has a malfunction, you car stop the vehicle by pulling the parking brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

▼ Electronic parking brake system warning

CAUTION

the if the brake system warning light or turns on, the electronic parking by brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in the nearest safe location and contact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system, the brake system on washing light turns on. Refer to "Electronic parking brake system warning" P193.

a Parking Tips

When parking your vehicle, always performed the following items.

- Apply the parking brake.

- Place the select lever in the "P" (Park) position.

Never rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

Top-down line drawing of a car parked in front and rear, with trees and a brick wall in the background (no text or symbols)

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel as described here. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the fr wheels should be turned away from the curb.

Top-down line drawing of a car with trees and a side view showing front and rear views (no text or symbols)

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

7-17. Auto Start Stop System

The Auto Start Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine when the vehicle is stationary for a short period of time (while waiting for a traffic light or in a traffic jam) after the engine has warmed up. The system operates in order to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and undesired idling noise.

■ System Operation

CAUTION

The Auto Start Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine for a short period of time during idling. Do not use the system when parking the vehicle normally.

So that it can be used safely and comfortably, in addition to driver operations, the Auto Start Stop system is designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment inside and outside the vehicle, in order to control stopping and restarting of the engine. After the vehicle has been completely stopped by depressing the brake pedal with the select lever in the "D" position, the

engine will be automatically stopped. If you release the brake pedal with the select lever kept in the "D" position, the engine will be automatically restarted. However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light illuminates, the engine will not restart.

701801

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) If the engine is temporarily stopped by system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) on the combination meter will illuminate in green. This indicator light turn off when the system restarts the engine.

NOTE

- After starting the engine, if the vehicle is left idling without being driven, the Auto Start Stop system

will not operate.

- Your vehicle is equipped with a special high-performance battery. When replacing the vehicle battery be sure to replace it with a ger SUBARU battery (or equivalent) designed specifically for use in a vehicle equipped with the Auto Stop system. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.

▼ Operational conditions

The engine can be automatically stopped by the Auto Start Stop system when all the following conditions are met.

• The engine is sufficiently warmed up.
  • The engine hood is closed.
• The driver's door is closed.
• The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
• The malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) is off.*

the The airflow mode selection is set to a ht mode other than" mode.

- The rear window defogger is not in use. - X-MODE has been turned off (if equipped).

After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will be automatically stopped when the following conditions are met.

- The steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.

- The steering wheel is not being operated.

,*1: Even if the malfunction indicator light
ine (CHECK ENGINE warning light) is illuminated, the Auto Start Stop system may operate when the system recovers from the
art malfunction.

NOTE

• After the vehicle is stopped, the engine may not automatically stop under the following conditions.
  of - The vehicle is stopped on a road with a steep slope.
• The vehicle is stopped by hard braking.
• After the vehicle is stopped, the engine may not automatically stop if the brake pedal is not fully depressed. Make sure to depress the brake pedal firmly when stopping the vehicle.
• In the following cases, it may take some time for the Auto Start Stop system to operate.
• When the battery is discharged because the vehicle has not been used for a long period of time, etc.
• The coolant temperature is low.
• When the battery terminals have

been reconnected after replacing the battery, etc.

▼ Non-operational conditions

In any of the following cases, the Auto Start Stop system will not operate.

- When the Auto Start Stop warning light Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light is illuminating.

- When the malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) is illuminating. ^*1

● The electronic parking brake is applied

- When the engine hood is opened.

- When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently warmed up.

- When the temperature of the CVT fluid is abnormally high.

- When the vehicle battery is not in good condition.

- When using the climate control system the temperature difference between the setting temperature and the temperature inside the vehicle is significant.

- When using the climate control system the amount of air flow is significant.

*1: Even if the malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) is illuminated, the Auto Start Stop system may operate when the system recovers from

malfunction.

NOTE

The Auto Start Stop system may not operate in the following cases:

- The malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) or other warning lights on the combination meter are illuminated.

- You are driving the vehicle in a elevation area.

▼ Engine restart operational conditions

In any one of the following cases, the engine will be automatically restarted even if the brake pedal is kept depressed.

- When slightly releasing the brake pedal on road with a steep slope and the vehicle begins rolling.

- When further depressing the brake pedal.

- When depressing the accelerator pedal.

- When you move the select lever to the "R" position.

- When turning the steering wheel.

- When operating the electronic parking brake switch.

- When activating X-MODE (if e equipped).

- When the air flow mode selection set to "###" mode.

- When the climate control system can t no longer maintain the set temperature.

- When unbuckling the driver's seatbelt.

- When opening the driver's door.

- When activating the rear window defogger.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is released, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" P396.

▼ Engine restart non-operational conditions

WARNING

Do not open the engine hood when the Auto Start Stop system is in operation. It may cause the vehicle to move while on a slope, the steering wheel operation may become heavy, or the brakes may not work well, which can create dangerous conditions.

To ensure safety, the engine will not be automatically restarted if the engine hood is opened when the Auto Start Stop system is in operation, even if the brake pedal is released. In this case, check the surrounding area and restart the engine by normal operation.

Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light blinks, the engine will not restart. ▼ Auto Start Stop warning light

NOTE

• When the Auto Start Stop system i in operation, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
• When the battery is discharged, the engine will be automatically re-started even if you keep the brake pedal depressed.

• In the following cases, the length of time that the engine is temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system may be shorter.

• When the climate control system is in operation.

• When the outside temperature is high, or when it is low (because the climate control system can longer maintain the set temperature).
• When consumption of electricity by electrical components is high

- When the engine is automatically restarted by the Auto Start Stop system, the power provided via the accessory power outlet will be reduced. Depending on the connected appliance, the power of the appliance may temporarily turn off.

Auto Start Stop warning light

S A 701801

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow) The Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate in yellow when initially turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position. light will turn off after the engine has started.

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light does not turn off after the engine started, the Auto Start Stop system may be malfunctioning. We recommend that you contact your authorized SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

▼ To turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system

A OFF 702361

Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light To turn the Auto Start Stop system on and off operate the center information display. Refer to "Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon" P221 (11.6-inch display models) or "Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon" P249 (dual 7.0-inch display models). When the Auto Start Stop system is turned OFF, the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.

While the engine is temporarily stopped by the system, if the Auto Start Stop system turns off, the engine will be restarted even if you do not release the brake pedal.

NOTE

• If the engine is restarted when the Auto Start Stop system is not optional and the ignition switch has been turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the Auto Start Stop syst will turn on again.
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch the "LOCK"/"OFF" position when leaving the vehicle. Failure to do could result in the battery discharging.
  ▼ Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator light

Pure diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with three circular components and a labeled symbol (no text or labels)

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator light

If the operational conditions are not met when the vehicle is stopped, the engine

will not stop and the Auto Start Stop Nostopped by the Auto Start Stop system. Activity Detected indicator light will illuminate. When this occurs, the buzzer will stop to drive.

■ Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status

Approximate indications of the time that the engine has been stopped by the Astart Stop system and/or the amount of fuel saved can be displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to "Basic Screens" P212.

■ System Warning

So that it can be used safely and comfortably, the Auto Start Stop system is designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment inside and outside the vehicle in addition to driver operations, and to provide various warnings to the driver via the warning light and/or indicator light illuminating and a buzzer sounding. For details about the warning light and indicator light, refer to "Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)" P204.

▼ Warning buzzer

The buzzer will sound when the engine hood is opened while the engine is

• The engine is restarted by normal operation. (Refer to "Preparing to Drive" P360.)
• The ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

▼ Display of warning messages

If a warning message is displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD) while driving, a malfunction may have occurred in the Auto Start Stop system. In this case, the Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

7-18. Front View Monitor (If Equipped)

Line drawing of a SUV front view with a close-up inset showing the camera lens (no text or symbols)

The image from the camera mounted inside the front grille is displayed in the center information display.

WARNING

- Never rely on only the Front ViewNOTE

Monitor when driving the vehicle. If there is a malfunction on the center image on the monitor screen, information display, refer to "Malfunc may be different from the actual situations of the Center Information Dissituation. If you drive the vehicle play" P505.

by viewing only the monitor image, a collision or an unexpected accident may occur. When driving the vehicle, always check the traffic around the vehicle directly

with your eyes and the mirrors

• Always operate the vehicle as you would without the Front View Monitor.

- Do not use the Front View Monitor in the following situations.

- You are driving on a dirt road or a road covered in snow. - The camera malfunctions (e.g. the lens or bracket is broken).

- If the outside temperature is low, the monitor screen may become dark or the image may become dim. In particular, the image of moving object may be distorted or disappear from the screen. You must always check the trat around the vehicle directly with your eyes when driving it.

wNOTE

■ How to Access the Front View Monitor

r 1 VIEW 602014

1 Front view monitor switch

To change over to the camera screen, make sure the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, then press the front view monitor switch under the following conditions.

- The vehicle speed is below 12 mph km/h).

The select lever is in except "R".

NOTE

The screen will change over to the area view image when the select lever is moved to "R". Refer to "Rear View Camera" P408.

■ How to Cancel the Front ViewRange of Image on Screen Monitor

▼ Manual cancellation

The Front View Monitor will be canceled either of the following operations.

• Press the front view monitor switch again.
• Touch car (car settings icon).
• Touch (HOME).
• Touch 🖱 (driver profiles icon).

▼ Automatic cancellation

If any of the following conditions are met the Front View Monitor is canceled automatically.

After accessing the Front View Monitor by pressing the front view monitor switch:

• Approximately 3 minutes have passed since the last operation.
• The vehicle speed becomes 13 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
• The select lever is shifted to the "P" position.
• Pulling up the parking brake switch v the brake pedal depressed to apply parking brake.

graph TD
    A["Car 1"] -->|2| B["Car 2"]
    B -->|1| A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

the A Traffic intersection with a poor visibility view
B Parking facing a wall
1 Range of displayed image
2 Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or other vehicles)

WARNING

Because the range of the image captured by the camera is limited, always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes when driving the vehicle.

NOTE

• The range of the displayed image may differ depending on the vehicle status or the road surface status.
• Because the Front View Monitor system uses a specially designed lens, the sense of distance in the displayed image is different from the actual distance.

• The camera image may be difficult to view in the following situations. This is not a malfunction.

• Dark place (at night)

• High or low temperature around the lens
• Water contacts lens or in high humidity (rainy weather)
• There is foreign materials (such as mud) around the camera

• Sunlight or headlight beam directly shines towards the camera lens

• Under an artificial light such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp or mercury lamp, the lighted portion may look like it is flickering (flicker phenomenon).

• While the display has cooled down, the image may leave traces or become darker than usual, causing a difficulty in viewing the screen. Always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes while driving the vehicle.
• The following incidents should not be deemed a malfunction.
• The camera lens may become foggy when the humidity is hi on a rainy day.
• The light from a vehicle or being located ahead may be reflected towards the camera image while driving at night.
• In a dark place or while driving night, the camera image may be adjusted to make noises less visible. Therefore, the image may look like a monochromatic image or the image colors may differ from the actual colors. The camera image may be deteriorated in regard to sharpness at the center and four corners of screen. This is not a malfunction

■ Guiding Line

ng le Check Surroundings Directly Around You 1 2 702386

1 Guiding lines
2 Warning message

The guiding lines that indicates the width and the front end of your vehicle are displayed on the display.

■Handling of Camera

CAUTION Observe the following instructions Otherwise, the system may malfunc- tion. • Do not apply any strong impact to the camera such as banging i hitting it with an object. The mounting angle may change.

• The camera unit is a waterproof structure. Do not attempt to remove, disassemble or modify the unit.
• Do not rub strongly or polish the camera lens with a hard brush or abrasive compounds. The lens may be scratched resulting in an adverse effect to the camera image.
• The camera lens is made of glass or plastic. Do not allow any organic solvent, body wax, oil film remover or glass coating agent to become attached on the lens surface. If any becomes attached, remove it immediately.
• Do not expose the camera lens to any sudden temperature change, for example, spraying hot water on it in cold weather.
• Do not apply the water jet of a high pressure washer to the camera or the surrounding area when cleaning the vehicle. The impact by the strong water pressure may cause the camera to come off. Also, water may enter inside the camera and cause a malfunction.
• If the camera is exposed to any impact, it may lead to malfunction

of the camera. Have the camera inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use a steam cleaner under any circumstances. Some types of steam cleaners inject hot steam.
• The camera surface may be damaged by a flying stone.

NOTE

If the camera lens is contaminated, sharp image is available. When the camera is contaminated with water drops, snow or mud, wash it with and wipe away any moisture with a cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash a neutral detergent.

7-19. Rear View Camera

Line drawing of a car front view with a magnified inset showing the camera lens (no text or symbols)

A rear view camera is attached to the trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness). When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the select lever is set to "R", the rear view camera automatically displays the rear view image behind the vehicle on the center information display.

WARNING

• Since the rear view camera uses wide-angle lens, the image on the monitor is different from the actual view in terms of distance
• Since the range of the image on the monitor is limited, always

check the rear view and the surrounding area with your eyes and mirrors, and move backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rear view image from the camera could cause an accident.

- Do not disassemble or modify the camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes out or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rear view camera immediately. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric nk shock.

elect

CAUTION

• When washing your vehicle with a high-pressure washer, do not allow water to touch the camera directly. Entry of water in the camera lens may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or electric shock.
• Since the camera is a precision device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, fire or electric shock may occur.
• If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must be very careful when removing it. Otherwise, damage to the camera may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

• Do not put a flame close to the camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.
• When replacing the fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the specified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction.
• If you use the rear view camera for a long time while the engine not operated, the battery may become completely discharged.

NOTE

• Do not wipe the camera with alcohol benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
• When waxing the vehicle, be careful view camera automatically displays the not to apply the wax to the camera. If view image from the vehicle. When
  When the select lever is set to "R", the view camera automatically displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When

it comes in contact with the came t. moisten a clean cloth with a dilut neutral detergent to remove the wa

• The camera lens has a hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or clearing the camera lens, be careful no scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rear view camera may deteriorate.
• Strong light shined on the camera lens may develop vertical lines around the light source. This is a malfunction.
• Under the fluorescent light, the display may flicker. However, this is a malfunction.
• The image of the rear view camera may be slightly different from the actual color of the objects.
• If there is a malfunction on the ce information display, refer to "Malol, functions of the Center Information, Display" P505.

How to Use the Rear View Camera

the lever is set to other positions, the dosage before setting to "R" is displayed. vax. Set the ignition switch to "ON".
ng. Set the select lever to "R".

NOTE

use The image of the rear view camera is horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle inside mirror or the outside mirror.
- When "Rear Camera Delay Control" is on, the rear view image will be displayed on the center information not display for a certain period of time after the select lever is shifted to a position other than the "P" position from "R". To turn the function on an off, refer to "General settings" or "P225 (11.6-inch display models)" or "General settings" or "P243 (ducing 7.0-inch display models).
ender may be difficult to see the image of the rear view camera in the following cases. This is not a malfunction of the camera.

• The vehicle is in a dark place (at night, in a tunnel, etc.).
• The vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place.

rear_ An object (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

- CONTINUED -

view of the rear view camera sticks to the lens of the camera. - Strong light is shining directly on the camera lens (occasionally, there are vertical lines on the screen).

■ Viewing Range on the Screen

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with the rear view camera is limited. Always be sure to check with your eyes when moving backward and proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

Side view diagram of a car on an inclined ramp with a vertical post and blocks, no text or symbols present

Range of view

a. on en 601499

Range of view

Pure technical diagram of a mechanical or structural component with no text, numbers, or symbols

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper can be viewed. Areas at both ends of a bumper and areas just under the bumper cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view camera looks shorter than the actual distance.

Diagram of a car collision with a moving platform and a warning signpost, no text or symbols present

Range of view

Pure technical diagram showing a cylindrical component inserted into a curved channel, with no text or symbols present.

The image from camera The area above the camera cannot be viewed. If there is an object that has a wide

projection on its upper part such as a pole behind the vehicle, the projection cannot be seen on the screen.

■ Help Lines

The help lines are a guide to help you realize the actual distance from the scree image.

NOTE

If you shift to the "R" range within several seconds after turning on the ignition switch, the warning message may not be displayed. Wait for seven seconds after turning on the ignition switch before shifting to the "R" ran. Then, the warning message will be displayed.

sign 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 702392

Help lines

1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) 2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper (e. (green horizontal line))
3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (gree horizontal line)
4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line)
5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizontal line)
6 Vehicle centerline
7 Dynamic guidelines

When the select lever is set to "R", the monitor screen displays the help lines together with the rear view image.

CAUTION

- When moving backward, always check the back with your eyes without relying on the help line

Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

• The actual position may be different from the indication of the help lines.
• Differences may occur due to the number of passengers or the loaded cargo.
• When the vehicle is on a slope or inclined against the road, the indication is different from the actual position.

NOTE

When "Steering Angle Lines" is off, the dynamic guidelines will be disappeared on the center information display. To turn the dynamic guidelines on and off, refer to "General settings" P225 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" P243 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

▼ Difference between screen image and actual road

The distance markers show the distance for a level road when the vehicle is not loaded. It may be different from the actual distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.

When there is an upward slope at When there is a downward slope Feature of distance marker the back at the back

601501

1 3 ft (1 m)

601502

1 3 ft (1 m)

2 1 601673

1 3 ft (1 m) line
2 10 ft (3 m) line

The distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance.

The distance on the screen looks neare than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance as in an upward slope.

The distance marker shows the distance on the road. If there is a car or another object close behind, distance cannot be correctly displayed.

7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions of BSD/RCTA are the systems that detect objects and vehicles the rear and draw attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle.

The system is designed to assist driver in changing lanes or reversing safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. However, you cannot rely on this syst alone in assuring the safety during lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could result an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may be delayed or the warning buzzer may be delayed or inoperative, even if there is a vehicle training in a neighboring lane or approaching your vehicle from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

■ System Features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following functions.

To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind Spot Detection)

• To detect a vehicle approaching from the the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses rear corner radars for following features.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by radio wave-related laws applicable in the U.S. and other FCC-compliant countries, including Canada.

When driving your vehicle in country other than the U.S. and Canada, you

must obtain certification for the country where you are driving the vehicle. For more information on certification in the U.S. and other FCC compliant countries, including Canada, refer to "Certification for the BSD/RCTA" P420.

^S ▼ Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

graph TD
    A["Top Vehicle"] --> B{Signal Path}
    B --> C["Left Vehicle"]
    B --> D["Right Vehicle"]
    C --> E["Target Vehicle 1"]
    D --> E
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

1 Operating range the The system notifies the driver of the presence of vehicles in its blind spot. - If the system detects a vehicle in its open blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach C- indicator light(s) on the outside mirror l. (s).

f the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/

- CONTINUED -

RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

▽ Lane Change Assist (LCA)

701406

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes.

• If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on t outside mirror(s).
• If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-

nating, the system warns the driver dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

▼ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

701460

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of the vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way.

• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
  • A warning buzzer sounds.

f● An icon appears on the center information display.

Limitations of the detectability of RCTA

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled parking.

A B 1 2 701818

Example 1

the The detection range of the rear corner radars
- 2 Area out of detection range of the rear corner radars

A Vehicle that may not be detected heB Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehicle (B). Always be sure to check surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

C 1 701819

Example 2

1 The detection range of the rear corner radars

C Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle (C) is passing in front of your vehicle. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing a vehicle.

■ System Operation

the ▼ Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of following conditions are met.

• The ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
• The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
• The vehicle is driven at speeds above mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
• The select lever is in the "R" position (RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations.

• The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears
• The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator does not appear (except when reversing).

NOTE

In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear.

- When a malfunction occurs in the system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

• If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, exercise proper caution. For details, refer to "BSD/RCTA theWarning Indicator" P419.
• In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will appear.

- When the rear corner radars become significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the rear corner radars is shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

• When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the rear corner radars
• When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no objects around (such as in a desert) for a prolonged period of time
• When the temperature around the rear corner radars increases excessively due to long driving on uphill grades in the summer, etc.
• When the temperature around the rear corner radars becomes ex-

tremely low
- When the vehicle battery voltage lowers
- When the vehicle voltage exceeds the battery voltage rating

The BSD/RCTA will resume operation once these conditions are corrected, and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears for a prolonged period of time have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

- The detectability of the rear corner radars is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection may be impaired and the system may not operate properly under the following conditions.

• When the rear bumper around th rear corner radars is distorted
• When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the rear corner radars
• When stickers, etc. are affixed or the areas of the rear corner radars on the rear bumper
• During adverse weather conditions such as rain, snow or fog
• When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads and through puddles

- The rear corner radars may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the following vehicles and objects.

• Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc.
• Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles with lower body height su as a trailer with no cargo and sports cars)
• Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or beside your vehicle when reversing) (The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the rear corner radars.)
• Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds
• Vehicles driving in parallel at almost the same speed as your vehicle for a prolonged time
• Oncoming vehicles
• Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane
• Vehicles travelling at a significantly lower speed that you are trying to overtake

- On a road with extremely narrow ct-lanes, the system may detect vehi-cles driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.

■ BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the following item(s) will operate to alert the driver:

● The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light (when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes).
- The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer (when a car vehicle is approaching from the left or right side while your vehicle is reversing)

▼ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

Diagram showing car interior components with directional arrows and a numeric identifier (701998), no readable text or symbols present.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted on each side of the outside mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is detected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the driver of dangers under the following conditions.

• While the indicator light is illuminating, the turn signal lever is operated to a the side in which this light turned on
• When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side

▽ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

- You may have difficulty seeing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light under the following conditions.

• When sunlight shines directly it
• When the headlight beams from vehicle traveling behind shines directly on it

While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced. For details ab the illumination brightness control dial, refer to "Illumination Brightness Control" P181.

^d BSD/RCTA approach warning buzzer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light to warn the driver of dangers. The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models).

▼ Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

• In the following cases, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.
  a - When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane

• When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades

• When going beyond a pass
• When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each lane.
• When several narrowly-spaced vehicles are approaching in a row
• In low radius bends (tight bends when making turns at an intersection)

• When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane

• Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by touching "Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)"

• Immediately after the select lever is shifted to the "R" position
• When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the trunk or cargo area

- During reversing, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.

• When backing out of an angled parking space
• When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.)
• When reversing on sloped roads
• When reversing at a high speed

S 702353

• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or roads (such as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
• When turning at an intersection in urban areas, or a multilane intersection, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash.
• If a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound.
• In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.

- When your vehicle drives on the near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle

- When the vehicle driving two lanes away drives on the near side of its lane from your vehicle

■ BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator

▼ System temporary stops

MPG 1 BSD/RCTA Disabled OFF OFF R 842.0 7452 mi 702219

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message 2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is used at extremely high or low temperatures or when abnormal voltage exists. Once these conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

▼ System temporary stops due to reduced radar sensitivity

MPG 1 BSD/RCTA Disabled Sensor Blocked OFF 2 OFF R 842.0 7452 mi 702220

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due to reduced radar sensitivity 2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectability of the rear corner radars is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

■ BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator

▼ System malfunction

MPG 1 2 BSD/RCTA Disabled Check 3 Owner's Manual 4 R 842.0 7452 mi 702221

1 BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2 At first, this message will appear
3 Then this message will appear
4 BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the system. Contact a SUBAR dealer and have the system inspected.

■ To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA

OFF 701821

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P230 (11.6-inch display models).

When the BSD/RCTA system is turned OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.

NOTE

- In the following cases, turn off the BSD/RCTA system. The system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves.

• When towing (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
• When a bicycle carrier or other

- CONTINUED -

item is fitted to the rear of the vehicle ■ Certification for the BSD/RCTA

• When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, et
• When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lifting up the vehicle

- If the ignition switch is turned to "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the last known status of the system is maintained. For example, if the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA remains deactivated the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

• The U.S. and other FCC compliant countries

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

the

CAUTION

inFCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Canada-spec. models

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

D01028

■ Handling of Rear Corner dars

Line drawing of a sedan car viewed from the side, showing front and rear views (no text or symbols)

Rear corner radars (Legacy)

Line drawing of a car rear view with no text or symbols

Rear corner radars (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Ra The rear corner radars, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

Line drawing of a sedan car viewed from rear angles, no text or symbols present

Line drawing of a car rear view showing roof, windshield, and side panels (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the following precautions.

● Always keep the bumper surface near the rear corner radars clea
- Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the rear corner radars. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
- Do not modify the bumper near the rear corner radars.
- Do not paint the bumper near the rear corner radars.
- Do not expose the bumper near the rear corner radars to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
- Do not disassemble the rear corner radars.

NOTE

If the rear corner radars require rep or replacement, or the bumper area around the rear corner radars require repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicle's brakes automatically.

WARNING

• Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is not a system intended to replace the driver's responsibility to check their surroundings for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.
• The driver is responsible for driving safely. Before reversing, be sure to first depress the brake pedal and visually check the surroundings.
• There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid collision, because the system operation has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate all even when an obstacle is present.

• Make sure to set the Automatic Braking function to OFF when the vehicle is on the free roller or the chassis dynamometer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and may cause an accident.
• Make sure to set the Automatic Braking function to OFF when towing a trailer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.
• The system is not designed to detect people (including children), animals or other moving objects.
• Depending on the vehicle condition or the surrounding environment, the sonar sensor's ability to detect objects may become unstable.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio

adata.

• Distance from the object
- Vehicle speed
- Accelerator pedal operation status
the Brake pedal operation status
on Select lever position
• Outside temperature
The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development. SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or pro the acquired data to any other third party except under the following conditions.

• The vehicle owner has given his/her consent.
• The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally enforceable request.
• Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate the following 2 functions using 4 sonar sensors.

- Sonar Audible Alarm function

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rearward and warns the driver by warning message on the center information display and warning beeps.

hi-Automatic Braking function

The Automatic Braking function detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and controls the braking to reduce damage.

graph TD
    A["1: Object Close Behind"] --> B["2: Apply Brake To Hold Position"]
    B --> C["3: 4: 4"]
    C --> D["4: 4"]

1 When reversing
2 When either strong automatic braking or torque control is applied to prevent collision (in this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)

3 When the vehicle is stopped by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain sounding)

4 Object (e.g., a wall)

▼ Detecting range

1 2 3 701721

1 Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
2 Range that the system cannot detect: Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the rear of the vehicle
3 Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-road crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and brake may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system. To

cancel the system, refer to "Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Operation" P431.

■ Operating Conditions

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate when all of the following conditions are met.

graph TD
    A["Camera"] --> B["RAB OFF"]
    A --> C["RAB"]
    A --> D["Eye Sight Off Check Manual"]
    A --> E["1 Eye Sight"]

1 EyeSight warning indicator
2 RAB warning indicator
3 RAB OFF indicator

• The ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
• The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
• The RAB warning indicator is off.
  • The RAB OFF indicator is off.
• The select lever is in the "R" position.

-Sonar Audible Alarm function

• The Sonar Audible Alarm is set to "ON"
• The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph to 15 km/h).

Automatic Braking function

• The Automatic Braking is set to "ON".
  The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

- In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

• The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated.
• The RAB warning indicator is illuminated.

- In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system cannot be operated.

- The (EyeSight Temporary Stop indicator: White) is illuminated, and the messages corresponding to the EyeSight temporary stop are displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

- The RAB OFF indicator is illuminated.

In the following cases, the functions may not be able to properly work. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

• A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
• The rear bumper is modified.
• The rear bumper has been removed and attached.
• The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicle's loading condition or modification.
• There is damage to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
• The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed.

- On a steep hill, the system's automatic braking ability will be reduced.

- The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicle's reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However, the system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation.

- If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the driver's operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not operate.

- The system may not be able to detect and apply the brake with the following objects.

- Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor.

- Objects that are too close to rear bumper when the select lever is set to the "R" positio

- Objects with a surface which not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence.

- Objects the system is not designed to detect and apply brake.

- Pedestrians.

- Moving objects including moving vehicles.

- Objects which absorbs sound waves such as cloth or snow.

- Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle.

- Objects that are low to the ground such as parking blocks.

- Objects that are high above the ground such as objects hanging

from above. - Objects that are out of range of the center of the vehicle in the horizontal direction.

- Objects that are not perpendicular to the ground.

- The surface of the object is uneven or wavy.

- When reversing the vehicle, the functions may not be able to work properly or may cause a system malfunction if the following conditions exist.

n. High frequency sound from other may sources are nearby:

- Horn sound from another vehicle.

- Engine sound from other vehicles.

- Sound of an air brake.

- Vehicle detection equipment or sonar from another vehicle.

- A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicle's system is transmitted near by.

- A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

- Extremely high or extremely low temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate.

- The sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensors are exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water.

- Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

- Air is moving rapidly such as when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor:

- Commercial electronic parts (fog light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trailer hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached.

- Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker, are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

- Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.

- The vehicle is significantly inclined.

- The ground clearance is significantly reduced due to the vehi-

cle's loading condition, etc.

- When the sonar sensor is mis-aligned due to a collision or an accident.

Surrounding environment:

• A cloth banner, flag, hanging branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direction.
• When reversing on a gravel or grassy area.
• When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or narrow garages.
• Wheel track or hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction.
• When reversing over a drainage cover (grating cover).

Diagram showing a car approaching a curved road with directional arrows, no text or symbols present

in c- 702036

• The path of the reversing direction is inclined such as on a uphill.
• When reversing downhill.

Simple line drawing of a car on a road with a right-pointing arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car on a road with a directional arrow indicating left motion (no text or symbols)

- - A curb or step is present in the steep reversing direction.

• Reversing in a garage with a low ceiling or a tunnel.

• There is a patch of snow rearward.

• There is a puddle of water.

• There is an obstacle that is not to an object.
• Going back along a wall.
• The area where the road starts touching dirt and snow
• When reversing on an uneven road.

- In circumstances such as the following, it may not be possible to avoid collision even when the system operates normally.

• Roads are slippery.
• The tire air pressure is not correct.
• The tires have become worn.
• Tire chains are installed.
• Tires which are not the designated size are installed.
• Emergency repairs were performed using a puncture repair kit.
• The suspension was modified.
• Vehicle driving is unstable due to accident or malfunction.
• The brake warning light is illuminated.

■ Sonar Audible Alarm Function

When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is in operation, an audible warning beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision.

NOTE

It may take time to display the wall and sound warning beeps after the object was recognized by the Sonar Audible Alarm.

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (object detected)	35 in (90 cm) or more	Green No warning sound
Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)	28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)	Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)	20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)	Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)	20 in (50 cm) or less Red		Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

▼ Obstacle detected and alert level

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701825

Long proximity alert (object detected)
1 35 in (90 cm) or more

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up Put ON 701826

Starting and Operating
1 Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)

- CONTINUED -

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701827

Short proximity alert (approaching the object closer)
1 Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

1 RAB Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701921

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)
1 Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the revealing direction, the range of detected ob will be shown on the center information display.

A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.

■ Automatic Braking Function Operation

▼ Object close behind warning

RAB Object Close Behind Pus 701828

Automatic braking warning
1 Warning message

If the system determine the risk of collision with the object. Short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong automatic braking or torque

-control will be applied to prevent collision. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

RAB ON Apply Brake To Hold Position Pin ON 701923

Depress brake pedal warning
1 Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the center information display and the continuous beep will remain sounding. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

NOTE

The Sonar Audible Alarm function an Automatic Braking function are different in operation conditions. Therefore there are cases in which only one of these functions will activate.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immediately after the system stops the vehicle by automatic braking. Depending on the conditions of the road surface and tires, the vehicle may not remain stopped, possibly leading to an accident.

▼ After the vehicle is stopped by and system

MPG RAB OFF R 图 842.0 7452 ml 702064

After the brake pedal is depressed, the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the system will temporarily stop operating. The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the select lever is shifted to a position of than the "R" position. The system will operate again the next time the select lever is shifted to the "R" position.

NOTE

- In the following cases, after the vehicle has been stopped by the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, brake control is released and the electronic parking brake operates. For details about releas

the parking brake, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" P394.

• When 2 minutes pass after the vehicle is stopped
• When any door is opened

- The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system may stop operating temporarily in the following cases and the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.

• Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor
• Objects are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is set to the "R" position
• The system detects sounds of a similar frequency to the RAB sonar

■ Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Operation

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be temporarily canceled by any of the following operation.

• While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the brake pedal is depressed.
• While the vehicle is stopped by the 19 operation of automatic braking, the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

• The accelerator pedal is depressed continuously (In this case, limited acceleration will be canceled and the vehicle will continue reversing.)
• The select lever is shifted to a position other than the "R" position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the object is no longer detected.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/OFF Setting

While the select lever is shifted to the position, the below functions of the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be set by operating the center information display.

graph TD
    A["1 RAB ON"] --> B["+"]
    C["2 RAB OFF"] --> B
    D["3 P### ON"] --> E["+"]
    F["4 P### OFF"] --> E
    B --> G["Check Surroundings Before Backing Up"]
    E --> G
    G --> H["701831"]

1 ON setting key of Automatic Braking function
2 OFF setting key of Automatic Braking function
R"3 ON setting key of the Sonar Audible Alarm function
4 OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible Alarm function

When the ON setting key is shown, the corresponding setting is ON.

Touch and hold the ON setting key to the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch and hold the OFF setting key to the setting ON.

When the Automatic Braking function is turned OFF, the following indicator(s) will illuminate.

MPG RAB OFF R 842.0 7452 mi 702064

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the corresponding function is turned ON.

NOTE

When the settings cannot be changed, the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed out.

Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the center information display.

• Warning Volume
• Sonar Audible Alarm

For details, refer to "Car settings" P230.

■ RAB Warning Indicator MPG ¹ RAB RAB Disabled R 842.0 7452 mi ² RAB 702686

1 RAB malfunction message
2 RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions, the above indicator illuminates on the combination meter. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Handling of the Sonar Sensors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the bumper. To ensure the proper operation the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, observe the following precautions.

Technical line drawings of three car rear profiles with numbered annotations (1, 2, 3), no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

rear Outback
of2 Subaru Outback Wilderness
3 Legacy
- Do not affix any stickers or other items on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface near the sonar sensors.

● Always keep the sonar sensor and the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean.
- Do not modify rear bumper.
- Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors.
- Do not apply high pressure water to the sonar sensors with a high pressure car-washing machine.
- Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversing direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
- Do not disassemble the sonar sensors

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the near bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-22. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped)

Driver Monitoring System is introduced DriverFocus in some countries.

The Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases when the driver is not paying attention to the forward direction, and also recognizes individual users.

This system warns the driver of inattentive drowsy driving, and can support safe and comfortable driving by automatically retrieving the following settings.

– Driver's position
– Climate control setting
- Meter setting
– Center information display setting

When a user is registered, various settings are automatically retrieved when the user enters the vehicle.

1 e/ 702359

1 Camera

CAUTION

• Always use the utmost care in driving
- Overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Driver Monitoring System could easily lead to a serious accident.
- This system cannot detect if the driver is feeling drowsy or is concentrating on safe driving.
- It cannot judge if the driver is awake or asleep, if their driving abilities have diminished, or if they are concentrating on safe

driving.

- In some circumstances, the system may not be able to correctly detect the driver state.

NOTE

• The user recognition camera does not save images, audio, or video.

• The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when sunlight is shining into the vehicle in the following ways.

• Sunlight is shining directly (or through glass) onto the user recognition camera.

• There are shadows on the driver's face caused by sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component).
• There are large momentary fluctuations in the strength of the sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component) shining on the face.

- Correct detection may not be possible when a device that includes an infrared light source (such as a commercially available Driver Monitoring System) is installed in the vehicle interior.

- The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly at the follow times when the driver is wearing glasses or sunglasses.

• The sunglasses do not allow the easy passage of infrared light.
• The surrounding scenery is reflected strongly in the lenses of the glasses or sunglasses.
• The eyes are hidden by the f of the glasses and the user recognition camera cannot detect the eyes.
• The light from an infrared light source (LED) is reflected in the lenses of the glasses or sun-glasses.
• The driver is wearing an eye-patch.

• The driver is wearing a hat set deeply over the eyes.

• Depending on the type of mask, correct detection of inattentive/drowsy driving may not be possible.

• Correct user recognition is not possible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is covered with a mask, muffler, sunglasses, or other item.
• The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when the eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth is hidden due to item that is between

the face and the system. vingf a thick cover is attached to the steering wheel, then depending on the position set for the tilt/telescopi he steering wheel, the cover may block the system's view of the face, and the system and the Driver Monitor- ing System may not operate cor- rectly.
Do not attach any stickers to the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED). If the user recognition camera or infrared light source (LED) is covered by an obstruction, it will not be possible to correctly monitor the driver.
- If an accessory is hung from the inside mirror, correct detection m not be possible.
Do not touch the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED) directly with your fingers. If there is dirt or a fingerprint on the parts, it will not be possible to correctly monitor the driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts either wipe them with a soft dry cloth, or wipe gently with a damp cloth after first firmly wringing the water out.
- If the surface of the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED) becomes scratched, correct

detection may not be possible. Be careful that hard objects do not contact these parts.

pict there is condensation on the user ck recognition camera or the infrared d light source (LED), correct detection r- may not be possible. If there is condensation on these parts, wipe it away with a soft dry cloth.
- When registering a user for user fra-recognition, avoid closing your eyes r as much as possible.
If the user recognition success rate is low, it is possible that the user is not correctly registered. Delete the registered data and perform registration again.
If a user frequently drives both with glasses and contact lenses, it is recommended that registration be performed both when wearing glasses and when wearing contact lenses.
- User recognition starts immediately after entering the vehicle, however if part the user looks downward or at the driver side mirror for a long time the user may not be recognized.
When one person among twins or another pair of persons with similar facial features is registered, the other person may be incorrectly recognized as the registered user

when entering the vehicle.
- If the person in the passenger's so leans into the driver's seat, or in other cases when there are two more faces near the driver's seat, system may not operate correctly.
- There are cases when the system concludes that the user's eyes are closed when the user is looking downward during driving, such as when checking instruments or the navigation screen. In such cases, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly.
- If the eyes are narrowed when laughing or when there is a dazzling outside light, the system may judge that the eyes are closed and the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly.
- The drowsy driving or asleep warning states are recognized from the length of time and percentage of time that the eyes are closed. The drowsy driving warning buzzer will not sound simply when the driver feels sleepy or yawns.
- Even when the driver does not feel sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or if he or she blinks frequently, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may
sound.
seatThe inattentive driving warning buz- zer may sound if the driver leans or forward or puts his or her head out of the window while driving.
- The inattentive driving warning buzzer will not sound when the vehicle is stopped or travelling at slow speed even if the driver is not looking ahead.
- The Driver Monitoring System collects and stores data regarding drivers' facial features. Facial recognition data is stored locally and does not leave the vehicle. It is not through-transmitted to or stored by SUBARU or anyone else. The Driver Monitoring System may be disabled and any stored driver data may be deleted by following the instructions below. If use the Driver Monitoring System is disabled, it will be unable to provide any of its safety or convenience functions.

The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System setting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functions

			Driver Monitoring System*
			ON OFF
User recognition function*2	ON	Inattentive/drowsy driving warning	Available Not available
		User recognition function	Available Not available
	OFF	Inattentive/drowsy driving warning	Available Not available
		User recognition function	Not available	Not available

Available function items

			Driver Monitoring System*
			ON OFF
User recognition function*2	ON	Register User Available Not available
		Delete User Available Not available
		Delete All Users	Available Not available
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Available Not available
		Delete Driver Position	Available Not available
	OFF	Register User Not available Not available
		Delete User Available Not available
		Delete All Users	Available Not available
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Not available Not available
		Delete Driver Position	Not available	Not available

*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer settings" P230.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization setti Refer to Car settings" P230.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is registered.

Available functions

	The user is registered.	The user is not registered.
User recognition function Available		Not available

■ User Recognition Function

WARNING

Perform registration, retrieving, or delete of the seat position and outside mirror angle before beginning driving. There is the risk of an accident if registration, retrieving, or delete is performed while driving.

When a user is registered, it is possible to retrieve the following settings.

▼ Driver position personalization

• Seat position and outside mirror angle Retrieves the registered seat position and outside mirror angle.
• Reverse tilt angle

Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle.

qs. Meter personalization

- Combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen

Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

▼ Center information display personalization

- Center information display basic screen

Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

- Fuel consumption screen

Displays the average fuel economy for past driving by that user.

▼ Climate control personalization

• Climate control settings

Retrieves the preferred setting temperature, airflow mode selection, and other settings which the user had selected at time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

NOTE

When a recognized user exits the vehicle while the Max A/C mode is on and the push engine switch is turned off, the system stores the setting configured before Max A/C mode was turned on.

▼ Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

▼ Changing the personalization settings

Item
Driver's position personalization	Seat position/outside mirror angle	Change the setting by using center information display customization function. Refer to "Car settings" P230.
	Reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle
Meter personalization*	Combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen	When the customization screen linked with the synchronized user function is selected and the setting is changed, it is automatically stored.
Center information display personalization*	Center information display basic screen
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store t conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the screen was selected and the setting was changed.

■ Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning

While driving, the Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases of driver inattention or drowsiness and warns the driver.

When the inattentive/drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears.

NOTE

• The inattentive/drowsy driving warning operates regardless of the status of the user recognition function.
• The inattentive driving warning does not activate when the turn signal is operating or when the select lever in the "R" position. When the system monitors that the driver may be inattentive, it warns the driver. When the inattentive driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt
• When the pre-collision brake system display appears on the combination meter OFF indicator is illuminated on the display (color LCD). combination meter display (color LCD), the inattentive driving warning activates at the same timing as usual, even when a vehicle ahead or obstacle is detected. For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system. When the EyeSight system has detected a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward action, the inattentive driving warning may activate at earlier timing than usual. Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
  702304
  When the system monitors that the driver may be inattentive, it warns the driver.
  When the inattentive driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt
  ndisplay appears on the combination meter edisplay (color LCD).
  When the EyeSight system has detected a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward situation, the inattentive driving warning -may activate at earlier timing than usual. Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
  Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

▼ Inattentive driving warning

Keep Eyes on Road

▼ Drowsy driving warning

Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer so an interrupt display appears.

	Combination meter display (color LCD)	Center information display	Warning chime
Drowsy driving			Beep, beep... (Continues until the driver's eyes open.)
Very drowsy			Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)
Slightly drowsy		— Beep
Not drowsy — —			—

■ Driver Monitoring System In- warning/Warning

1 2 3 4 OFF 305828

1 Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)
2 Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light
3 Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light
4 Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning indicates the status of the Driv Monitoring System on the combination meter display (color LCD).

NOTE

When the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illumi-

- CONTINUED -

nated, the Driver Monitoring System function cannot be used. In addition the following items cannot be select

• Register User
• Delete User
• Delete All Users
• Update Seat and Mirror Position
• Delete Driver Position
• Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

▼ Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is operating.

▼ Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light

This indicator illuminates when the user has turned off the Driver Monitoring System and the Driver Monitoring System is not operating.

▼ Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is temporarily stopped

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops temporarily in the following circumstances.

- When the temperature of the main unit of the Driver Monitoring System

is high or low.

- When the Driver Monitoring System ed. cannot monitor the driver's eye movement.

• When the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver's eyebrows, eyes, nose or mouth.
• When the camera and the infrared light source (LED) are covered and the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver correctly.

▼ Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)

This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the Driver Monitoring System. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

■ Using the Driver Monitoring System

▼ User recognition

When a user is registered with the user recognition function, the Driver Monitoring System performs the following.

Driver Monitoring System SCAN PROCESS 702400

1. When the door is opened and the push-button ignition switch is OFF, the user recognition screen appears and the Driver Monitoring system starts user recognition. The user recognition screen may not appear when the door is opened in some cases, such as when only a short time has passed after the push-button ignition switch was turned OFF. In such cases, user recognition starts when the door is closed however the user recognition screen does not appear.

Welcome,

702401

1. Sit in the driver's seat and face forward for a few moments.
2. When user recognition is completed, the Hello screen appears on the combination meter display (color LCD).

At this time, the seat position, outside mirror angle, climate control settings, combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen and center information display basic screen will all change based the user information.

NOTE

- When a center information display operation switch is pressed, the user recognition screen is canceled, however user recognition con-

tinues.

• When the select lever is not in the "P" position, the seat position will not change even when user recognition is completed.
• If user recognition fails, perform recognition again following the instructions, refer to "When a user not recognized" P443.
• User recognition is not performed while driving.
• If the seat position or outside mirror angle are in motion at the time wrd user recognition is completed, then it is not possible to retrieve the s position, outside mirror angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle.
• If any of the following operations is performed while retrieving of the seat position or outside mirror angle, retrieving of the seat position and outside mirror angle is canceled.

on - The power seat adjustment switch was operated.
- The outside mirror adjustment switch was operated.
- The "SET" button was pressed
- The "1" or "2" button was pressed.

- The select lever was moved to a position other than "P" position.

When a user is not recognized In the following case, user recognition may not be possible and "User recognition stopped" may be displayed.

isThere is an object blocking the camera.

Remove the obstacle and follow the reference procedure to perform user re-ognition again. Refer to "Driver MonitoringSystem" P237.

seat 1 702359

1 Camera

NOTE

- User recognition may not be possible when there is dirt or fingerprints on the user recognition camera. To

- CONTINUED -

clean, either wipe using a soft clo or else wipe gently using a moistened cloth that has been thorough wrung out.

- When the synchronized user function is turned OFF, manual repeat facial scan is not possible.

■ Registering and Deleting a User

Users can be registered in the Driver Monitoring System, and registered users can be deleted. For the user registration and delete procedures, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P237.

NOTE

- When the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated, the following items cannot be selected.

• Register User
• Delete User
• Delete All Users

- User information can also be deleted by resetting the center information display to the factory default settings. When the settings are reset to the factory default settings, all user information is deleted. The settings

both cannot be reset to the factory defect settings when the Driver Monitoring Highly System is OFF.

■ Registering and Deleting Driver Position Personalization

At the time when a user is registered, the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle are registered at the same time. To change the setting for the seat position, outside mirror angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P237.

NOTE

• Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted. Refer to "Power Seat" P32 or "Outside Mirrors" P299.
• If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down to outside mirror angle will not be saved.

When the user recognition setting is OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated, the following items cannot be selected.

• Update Seat and Mirror Position
• Delete Driver Position

- The driver position can be registered or deleted only when a registered user is sitting in the driver's seat and user recognition is completed.

■ Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings

NOTE

When the Driver Monitoring System is turned OFF after user recognition was completed, the user recognition function stores the Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF state.
- Even when the Driver Monitoring System is set to OFF, the Driver Monitoring System automatically turns ON once the driver's door is opened and closed while the vehicle is stopped. This only occurs when the user recognition setting is ON. The system then reverts automatically to the OFF state.

- After the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF, if the Driver Monitoring System is turned ON while the driver's door is open, user recognition may not occur correctly.

▼ To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring System

To turn the Driver Monitoring System on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P230. When the Driver Monitoring System is turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.

NOTE

Even when the Driver Monitoring System is turned off, the user recognition and automatically retract seat on entry functions do not switch on or off automatically.

▼ User recognition settings

The Driver Monitoring System User recognition function can be turned ON/OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" P230.

NOTE

- The user recognition function setting cannot be changed for each individual user.

- The default setting for the user recognition function is ON. - When the user recognition function is turned OFF, the following items y. cannot be selected.

- Repeat Facial Scan

- Register User

- Update Seat and Mirror Position

- Delete Driver Position

▼ Automatically retract seat on entry The automatically retract seat on entry which automatically slides back the driver's seat when the driver's door is unlocked and opened.

This function can be turned ON/OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" P230.

CAUTION

Sit in the seat after the power se movement backward has been com pleted. Not doing so could result injury.

NOTE

- If the seat position is not registered in the access key fob memory, the automatically retract seat on entry function can be used.

- Even when the automatically retract seat on entry setting is ON, the automatically retract seat on entry function automatically turns OFF when the user recognition function is OFF.

- Automatically retract seat on entry cannot be selected when the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated.

- This function will operate if the seat is in front of the center of the seat sliding mechanism.

■ How to Get the Source Code Using the Open Source

This product contains Free/Open Source Software (FOSS).

at The license information and/or the source - code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL.

http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0101/

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Driving Tips

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 448

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints 448

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)..... 448

8-4. Catalytic Converter.... 449

8-5. Periodic Inspections.... 450

8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries 450

8-7. Frequent Driving Prevents Vehicle Battery from Discharging 451

8-8. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles ....

8-9. On-Road and Off-Road Driving.... 452 Legacy .... 453 Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness .... 453

8-10. Winter Driving 456 Operation during Cold Weather 456 Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads 457

Corrosion Protection 458

Snow Tires 458

Tire Chains.... 459

Rocking the Vehicle 460

8-11. Loading Your Vehicle 460 Vehicle Capacity Weight 461

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)...... 461

Roof Molding and Crossbar (Legacy)...... 462

Roof Rails with Integrated Crossbars (Outback) 463

Roof Rails with Ladder Type (Subaru Outback Wilderness).... 467

Roof Tent (Subaru Outback Wilderness) 468

45β-12. Trailer Hitch (Outback/Subaru Outback 2 Wilderness – If Equipped) ....470

Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch..... 471

If Not Towing a Trailer 473

8-13. Trailer Towing (Legacy)......473

8-14. Trailer Towing (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)....473

Warranties and Maintenance.... 474

Maximum Load Limits 474

Connecting a Trailer 477

Trailer Towing Tips.... 478

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you hand and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):

• Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
• Do not drive at one constant engine of vehicle speed for a long time, either or slow.
• Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
• Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake pads are replaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints files

The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.

• Select the proper gear position for the e speed and road conditions.
• Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
• Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

• Keep the engine properly tuned.
• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label, which is located under the door latch on the driver's side. Lo pressure will increase tire wear and fu consumption.

• Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

• Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
• The indication of the ECO gauge shows a reference for saving fuel. For details, refer to "ECO gauge" P210.

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)

WARNING

• Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
  • Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
• Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

• Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
  ● Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

• If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open

• Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

8-4. Catalytic Converter

WARNING

• Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.
• Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Technical diagram of an automotive engine bay with internal components and no visible text or symbols

2.4 L models

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

a the d is 801223

2.5 L models

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

• Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic converter.
• Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
• Avoid racing the engine.
• Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving.
• Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and re-

- CONTINUED -

paired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

• Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
• Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

8-5. Periodic Inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet" performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries

When planning to use your vehicle in another country:

• Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. Refer to "Fuel Requirements" P354.
• Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.

8-7. Frequent Driving Prevents Vehicle Battery from Discharging

Vehicle batteries are a consumable item. If the battery charge is not maintained regularly, the battery will deteriorate and may require replacement sooner than expected. The battery is charged by running the engine. It is recommended to drive the car for a longer time occasionally to prevent the vehicle battery from becoming drained, especially if it is regularly driven only a short time daily (e.g. only 10 minutes) or if it is parked for 10 days or more. It may be possible to recover the state of charge and maintain the battery performance by driving for a longer time (e.g. more than 30 minutes). If you cannot drive enough, we recommend to charge the battery as needed. If no action is taken, the battery will become discharged. This is a normal characteristic of any battery.

8-8. Driving Tips for AWD hicles

WARNING

• Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
  • Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
  (e. When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

Ve- For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
  – Clearance between the body and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident

Driving

Tips

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

- CONTINUED -

Simple line drawing of a car with four wheels and arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking force during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind:

- An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.

• Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation pressure label, which is located on the door pillar on the drive side.

• Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such as steep hills or dusty roads will necessarily be more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

• Engine oil

• Brake fluid
  – Rear differential gear oil
• Continuously variable transmission fluid
• Front differential gear oil

There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to "Towing" P497.

8-9. On-Road and Off-Road Driving

WARNING

● Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
- Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. The driver and all passengers should fasten their seatbelts before starting to drive in order to minimize the chance of serious injury or death.
- Do not make sharp turns or quick maneuvers unless absolutely unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous, as you may lose control, possibly resulting in a rollover which could cause death or ser-

ious injury.

• Whenever strong crosswinds are present, slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehicle. Remember that your vehicle, with its higher profile and center of gravity, is more likely to be affected by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars.
• Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it stall. In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. Regardless of its depth, it can was away the ground from under you tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.

CAUTION

After driving on gravel roads or rough roads, check the undercarriage of the vehicle body for any damage, deformation, or paint removal. If you notice any irregulari

ties, contact a SUBARU dealer for inspection as soon as possible.

■ Legacy

Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain vehicle. It is a passenger car designed primarily for on-road use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situations in which the driving surface is relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If you do take your SUBARU off road, you should review the common sense precautions in the next section (applicable to the Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehicle's off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness.

■ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

CAUTION

Frequent driving of an AWD model under hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

• Engine oil
• Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. A utility vehicle features a high ground clearance and may be equipped with off-road tires (Subaru Outback Wilderness models only), which enable the vehicle to be used for a wider range of applications. Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, you can drive your SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road. It handles and maneuvers differ-

- CONTINUED -

ently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. Note, however, that your vehicle is not a conventional off-road vehicle or an all-terrain vehicle, and it should not be operated in one. A higher center of gravity in relation the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes vehicles of this type more likely to roll over. In reality, vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. The high ground clearance of this vehicle is real advantage, giving you a better view the road and allowing you to anticipate problems earlier. However, remember that your utility vehicle is not designed for his speed cornering comparable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle co roll over if you make a sharp turn at his speed. If you do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautions such as those in the following list should taken.

▼ Before driving

• Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.
• Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.

- Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle like and cause injury. Do not pile heavy ton to loads on the roof. Those loads raise their vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. - Utility Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this the manual.

a of During driving General precautions:

- Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- gh- sary risks by driving in dangerous area or over rough terrain. - Slow down and employ extra caution at gh all times. When driving off-road, you wi - not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and d behe like.

- Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep. - Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.

- Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead, drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim. - Do not drive or park over or near the flammable materials such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after the engine stops. This could create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under especially dangerous situations:

• When driving over bumps in the road, as drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
  willIf driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams:
• First, check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness.
• Next, ensure that the bed of the stream is flat.

• Then, drive slowly and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicle's undercarriage.

• If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race t engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

• Do not perform the following operations. Doing so may cause the transmission to overheat or malfunction.

• Depressing the accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the same time while the select lever is in a position other than "P" or "N".

• Depressing the accelerator to hold the vehicle in a stationary position while on a slope and while the select lever is in a position other than "P" of "N".

• Trying repeatedly to drive over a bump that the vehicle cannot climb over.

• When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" P378.

• Do not rotate the tires at a high speed the vehicle is stuck due to muddy, snowy, icy, or similar low-traction conditions, or if any tire is not touching ti

ground. Doing so may cause the tire burst or lead to an accident due to abnormal overheating or damage to drivetrain components.
On rough roads and roads with large undulations, have a leader guide you or check the road surface in advance select a road where the ground will come in contact with the undercarriage of the vehicle body.

Drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h less. If you hear any abnormal noise while driving, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

• Do not allow the vehicle tires to be submerged in deep sand, a river, or elect seawater. If you have to drive under

" otherwise conditions, thoroughly wash the vehicle after driving. If you hear any abnormal noise while driving, contact SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
- If the wheels are stuck, cutting the steering wheel at a sharp angle may cause the steering components to be deformed. If you hear any abnormal noise while driving or if you notice and if abnormalities due to rough running, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

Avoid driving over curbs. Tires, wheels, suspensions, and the mechanical components under the vehicle body may be unnoticeably damaged by the impact of striking a curb or driving on a rough road. If driving over a curb is unavoidable, ride over it slowly and at a right angle to the curb. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires are not pressed against the curb.
●Do not drive for a long time while the vehicle is tilted to the left or right.

▼ After driving

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
- Wash the vehicle's underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components

are particularly prone to dirt buildup, they need to be washed thoroughly.

8-10. Winter Driving

■ Operation during Cold Weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such as a window scraper, a bag of sand, fl a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine in very cold weather conditions. Use an engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, just hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of the vehicle.

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the windshield washer tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

• Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the windshield washer tank.
• State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blades or washer system.

▼ Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

▼ Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you part the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

CAUTION

- Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods

cold weather since it could fr in that position.

- When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.

- Under either of the following conditions, icing may develop on the brake system, which cause poor braking action.

- When the vehicle has been parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow

- When the vehicle has been parked during a snowstorm Check for snow or ice buildup the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following ups.

1. Place the select lever in the "P" position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

ze▼ Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

these of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an anti-freeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.

Left: If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.

■ Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads

or

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine's intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even

- CONTINUED -

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of y to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, poss leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle's braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For information about braking on slippery surfaces, refer to "ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)" P384 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control System" P385.

▼ Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure.

• To thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow selection in "and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper blade rubbers are completed thawed. Refer to "Climate Control" P307.
  If your vehicle is equipped with a wipe deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to "Defogger and Deicer" P275.
• To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, use the rear window defogger. Refer "Defogger and Deicer" P275.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow sta to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroste with the airflow selection in" and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it a using the windshield washer. Refer to "Windshield washer" P273.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents t wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road a safe place, then remove it. If you stop vehicle at road side, use the hazard Warning flasher to alert other drivers. Re to "Hazard Warning Flasher" P178.

We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades.

way

Corrosion Protection

Refer to "Corrosion Protection" P512.

he

■ Snow Tires

d to

the

WARNING

- When replacing or installing winter tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
• Clearance between the body and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident. - Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with "all season tires" which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire's and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

Tire Chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if used on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.

Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence be-

- CONTINUED -

cause you are using a traction device 8-11. Loading Your Vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

■ Rocking the Vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "F" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission 2nd than 1st.

For information on holding the transmission in 2nd position, refer to "Selection Manual Mode" P378.

"Never allow passengers to ride on folded rear seatback, in the trunk in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.

in of 100094

WARNING

• Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.
• When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
• Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
• Secure long items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.
• Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

- Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seatback (Legacy) or the extended cargo area cover (Outback - if equipped). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

■ Vehicle Capacity Weight

Line drawing of a car with two drivers inside, showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Tire inflation pressure label

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you carry in your vehicle is shown on the inflation pressure label attached to the driver's side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

■ GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and control panel (no text or symbols)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the driver's side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must can never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle,

- CONTINUED -

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, y should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

■ Roof Molding and Crossbar (Legacy)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical bracket or support structure (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

• For cargo carrying purposes, the roof molding must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a road has due to loss of cargo could res
• When using the roof crossbar kit make sure that the total weight the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

- Do not install a roof tent on the vehicle. Doing so may damage the vehicle and create a safety hazard. SUBARU warranties do not cover vehicle damage resulting from use of a roof tent.

Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and installing the appropriate carrying attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer's instructions.

When carrying cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments, never exceed the maximum load limit as explained below. You should also be careful that the vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information about loading cargo into or onto your vehicle, refer to "Loading Your Vehicle" P460. The maximum total load on the roof (including crossbars, carrying attachments and cargo) must not exceed 88 lbs (40 kg). Refer to the crossbar installation instructions for the maximum crossbar capacity. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, close to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

▼ Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachments such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc., follow the manufacturer's instructions for the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle's center gravity is altered with the weight of load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswise effects will be increased.

▼ Removal and installation of the crossbars

e g0 801050

Each of the two roof moldings has two mounting points for crossbars. Each mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use and screwdriver to open the covers. When installing the crossbars on the roof molding, follow the manufacturer's instructions.

■ Roof Rails with Integrated Crossbars (Outback)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled part '1' and reference number '801197' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1 Integrated crossbars

CAUTION

- For cargo carrying purposes, the crossbars must be extended across the roof and locked into the roof rails. Cargo must be attached to the crossbars using genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments. The crossbars must never be used independently to carry cargo on the roof. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

- CONTINUED -

• When loading cargo on the crossbars, using the genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments, make sure the total weight of the crossbar attachments, and loaded cargo, does not exceed the maximum load limit of 150 l (67.5 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety hazard.
• Be careful not to damage the vehicle body when passing the rope through the front and rear holes of the roof rails.
• Do not install a roof tent on the vehicle. Doing so may damage the vehicle and create a safety hazard. SUBARU warranties do not cover vehicle damage resulting from use of a roof tent.

The crossbars must be extended across the roof and locked into the roof rails to carry cargo on the roof. Cargo can only carried on the crossbars using the genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments.

When you carry cargo on the roof using crossbars and a carrying attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained in the following. You should all be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle refer to "Loading Your Vehicle" P460. The maximum load limit of the cargo and carrying attachment must not exceed the allowable load limit described in the Owner's Manual of a genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. Place the heaviest load the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

▼ Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachments such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc., follow the manufacturer's instructions of the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE

- Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus after the driving characteristics. Drive

carefully, avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Cross-wind effects will be increased.

- Restore the bars to the original le, position when the bars are not used as crossbars.

▼ How to use as crossbars

CAUTION

• Do not raise the bar higher than necessary. The base of the bar may be damaged.
• Be careful not to contact the bars while sliding them. Otherwise, the bars may be scratched or the latch portions may be damaged.
• Do not slide the bar more than necessary when sliding the bar. The base of the bar may be damaged.
• Do not allow the bar to fall on or contact the roof panel or the moonroof when sliding the bar. Otherwise the roof panel may be dented or the glass of the moonroof may be damaged.
• Be careful hands do not become tingpinched when operating the cross bar. Hands becoming

pinched could result in injury.

Diagram of a car interior showing a steering wheel and dashboard, with an inset view of the wheel handle (no text or symbols present)

1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from the roof rail holders by pulling up the covers.
   

Line drawing of a car's front wheel and roof structure (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the bars in the direction shown

the illustration.

Line drawing of a car's front dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Install the bars into the holders.
2. Make sure that the latches are fitted securely.

∇ How to change the position of crossbar

WARNING

Carefully read the warning label attached to the roof rail.

You can change the position of the rear crossbar. To change the position, perform the following procedure.

1. Take out the torque wrench from the under-floor storage compartment.

in

Diagram showing a mechanical component with a curved arrow indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

1. Remove the plastic plug of the roof rail holder by using the torque wrench.
   

the 801202

1. Remove the bolt of the crossbar by using the torque wrench and pull this side out.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with an inset showing a lever mechanism (no text or symbols present)

1. Pull out the other side of the crossbar from the roof rail holder by pulling up the cover.
2. Install both ends of the crossbar into the other holders.

Technical diagram illustrating a mechanical assembly process with labeled steps and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

1 Guide plate
2 Torque wrench

1. Using the torque wrench, tighten the crossbar bolts until the torque wrench hits the guide plate.

NOTE

The tightening torque is approximately 8.9 ± 2.2 lbf·ft ( 12 ± 3.0 N·m, 1.2 ± 0.3 kgf·m).

Diagram showing a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

1. Install the plastic plug by pushing it into the hole until it is fully seated.

▼ How to re-stow bars

CAUTION

Do not use the bars as roof rails when the bars are stowed.

Loading Your Vehicle

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component or tool with no visible text or symbols

1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed in the front side holder. If the rear crossbar is stowed in the rear side holder, move it back to the front side holder (original position).
   

holders by pulling up the covers. 801207

1. Slide the bars in the direction shown the illustration.

Diagram of a car headset with a hand holding a steering wheel, showing the angle and direction (no text or symbols)

1. Pull out the crossbars from the roof

Line drawing of a car's front and rearview components with arrows indicating top and side views (no text or symbols)

1. Install the bars into the holders.
2. Make sure that the latches are fitted all securely.

■ Roof Rails with Ladder Type (Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1 Roof rails

Cargo can be carried on the roof after securing the roof crossbars to the roof rails and installing the appropriate carrying attachments. When installing the roof crossbars and the carrying attachments, follow the manufacturer's instructions. The roof rail system is designed to carry loads (cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attachments) of no more than 220 lbs (100 kg). Be sure not to exceed your vehicle's GVWR and GAWR.

- When using the carrying attachments, make sure that the total

- CONTINUED -

carrying load of the cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attachments does not exceed 220 lbs (100 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle. Read the manufacturer's instructions and pay attention to not exceed the load limit of the parts.

- For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rails must be used together with the SUBARU recommended roof crossbars and any appropriate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rails must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint, or a dangerous ro hazard due to loss of cargo cou result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity is altered with the weight of t load on the roof, thus affecting driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

▼ Rope hooks (attached to the roof rails)

1 2 801353

1 Rope hooks a Covers

CAUTION

- When you use the rope hooks, always secure the rope at all hook points.

The maximum load capacity is 176 lbs (80 kg) per hook.

The cover cannot be removed.

- Do not tighten the rope excessively. Otherwise, it may lead to damage to the vehicle body or cargo.

• Check that the rope is not loose before driving the vehicle.
• When you use the rope hooks, never exceed the maximum load limit.

■ Roof Tent (Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Line drawing of a car front view with a roof-mounted cargo box (no text or symbols)

801494

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle's roof can adversely affect handling, braking, and rollover resistance. The vehicle must never be driven with a total roof rail load in excess of 220 lbs (100 kg).

CAUTION

• The roof rail load limit for stationary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg) applies only when the vehicle is parked and the load is evenly distributed left/right and front/rear and the roof crossbars and roof tent are tightly secured to the vehicle. If these conditions are not met, the load limit will lower.
• The maximum load limit of the roof crossbars must be obtained from the manufacturer or retailer of the roof rack. When driving a vehicle, the maximum roof rail load is 220 lbs (100 kg) or the crossbar load limit (whichever is lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain conditions at your own risk.

▼ When driving the vehicle

The total weight on the roof rails, including the roof crossbars and roof tent, must no exceed the vehicle's roof rail load of 220 lbs (100 kg), evenly distributed.

kg)) is
be

801173
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 220 lbs (100 kg)

▼ When the vehicle is parked on level ground

801174
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent

The total weight on the roof rails – including the roof crossbars, roof tent, and all occupants and contents in the roof tent – must not exceed either the vehicle's roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly distributed, or the load limit of the roof crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A). B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause damage to the vehicle or racking system. The vehicle must never be driven with occupants in the roof tent. Before the vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo must be removed from the roof tent and the roof rail load must be restored to within the roof rail load limit of 220 lbs (100 kg). Refer to the user manual that accompanied the roof tent for important safety information and instructions on the proper installation and use of the tent.

8-12. Trailer Hitch (Outback) Subaru Outback Wilderness (If Equipped)

WARNING

• Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation. For possible recommendations and limitations, refer to "Trailer Towing (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)" P473.
• Never drill the frame or underbody of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion

around the drilled hole.

• Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
• Use only a ball mount that is suitable for the trailer hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight distributing hitch.
• The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for purchase of a standard bumper beam if you do not have the original.
• If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook.

CAUTION

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.

When any of the tires are punctured, y can seal the tire temporarily. However, not tow a trailer when a sealed tire is We recommend that you consult the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table.

	Maximum gross trailer weight	Maximum gross tongue weight
2.4 L models	3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)	350 lbs (159 kg)
2.5 L models	2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)	270 lbs (122 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to "Trailer Towing (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)" P473.

ou ■ Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch

used 1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical bracket assembly with a tool and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the safety pin through the provided hole on the hitch pin securely.
2. Check the ball mount assembly by pulling on it to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.

1 2 801213

1 Hitch ball installation point
2 Hooks for safety chains

1. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount.
2. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
3. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other to the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not let them drag on the ground.

WARNING

• For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with safety chains.
• Do not connect safety chains to any part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.
• Be sure to check the hitch pin safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

Hitch harness connector

1. Connect the hitch wire harness's black four-pin wire connector to the towing trailer's wire harness.
   and Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer.

NOTE

• A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.
• Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.

■ If Not Towing a Trailer

CAUTION

The housing should be kept clean the points of contact. The surfaces only require cleaning with a cloth. Grease or other lubricants should never be used.

• Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube.
• Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch wire harness protect against possible damage.
• Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-13. Trailer Towing (Legac

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither designed intended to be used for trailer to ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that may res from trailer towing, from any trailer tow equipment or from any errors or omission in the instructions accompanying such equipment. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing.

β-14. Trailer Towing (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy and air conditioning system cooling performance. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and always consider the following conditions.

• Road conditions
• Weather conditions
• Vehicle load weight
• Trailer load weight

Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. Do not use towing equipment other than genuine SUBARU towing equipment. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installation and use provided by SUBARU.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

■ Warranties and Maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. Refer to "Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions" in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving. After approximately the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of towing all trailer hitch bolts should be re-tightened to the installation torque.

■ Maximum Load Limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs an tongue load. Make sure the load a its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

▼ Total trailer weight

Simple line drawing of a vehicle on a platform with a wall-mounted gauge (no text or symbols)

Total trailer weight The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum total trailer weight. The maximum total trailer weight is indicated in the following tables.

2.4 L models

Conditions Maximum	total trailer weight Maximum	tongue weight
When towing a trailer without brakes.	1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100	lbs (45 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.	3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)	350 lbs (159 kg)

2.5 L models

Conditions Maximum	total trailer weight Maximum	tongue weight
When towing a trailer without brakes.	1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100	lbs (45 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.	2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)	270 lbs (122 kg)

▼ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Diagram showing a car on a platform connected to a vehicle via a fuel pump, with a speedometer and time scale (no text or symbols)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by SUBARU is shown on the certification label located on the driver's door of your

- CONTINUED -

vehicle.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and control panel (no text or symbols)

Certification label

▼ Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

800369

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also shown on the certification label.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

▼ Tongue load

Simple line drawing of a vehicle with a speedometer and a stopwatch, no text or symbols present.

Tongue load

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer's axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value. For details about the trailer tongue load, refer to "Total trailer weight" or P474.

1 2 800370

1 Jack
2 Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the following illustration. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing coup at the height at which it would be during actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F 60% 40% 50% 50% 800216

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by pro distribution of the load in the trailer. Ne load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximately 60 of the trailer load should be in the front approximately 40% in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

■ Connecting a Trailer

▼ Trailer brakes

oler

WARNING

Do not directly connect your trailer hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicle's brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.

Check that your trailer's brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU's brake system is not designed to be tap into the trailer's hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailer's brake system

▼ Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the e.trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other to the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

▼ Side mirrors

Top-down diagram of a car with a vehicle under an arrowhead, showing no text or symbols.

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle's standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.

▼ Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction your vehicle's lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle road service representative or profes-electrical system requires modifications to sional to repair the flat tire.

the vehicle's lighting circuit to increase capacity and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals and the stop light each time you connect a trailer to your vehicle.

▼ Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated. Refer to "Tires" P572.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.

■ Trailer Towing Tips

CAUTION

• For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing, touch "Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)" to deactivate the system. The system may not operate properly due to the blocked radar waves. For details about how to turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer to "Car settings" P230.
• For models equipped with Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, consult your SUBARU dealer for additional information about towing a trailer.
• Towing a trailer in high temperatures, or on long or steep grades, pay attention to the following

gauge and indicator because the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating.

• Coolant temperature gauge. Refer to "Engine Overheating" P496.

• AT OIL TEMP warning light

• When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be different when compared to normal operation. You should never drive at excessive speeds but always employ extra caution when towing a trailer. You should also keep the following tips in mind.

• When parking on a steep slope with a trailer attached to your vehicle, the braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient since strong braking power is needed.

▼ Before starting out on a trip

- Check the towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles that vary by state/region. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or

may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations.

• Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.

• Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.

• Check that the tire pressures are correct.

• Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that

• The trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.

• The trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer's stop lights illuminate when the vehicle's brake pedal is pressed, and that trailer's turn signal lights flash wh the vehicle's turn signal lever is operated.
• The safety chains are connected properly.
• All cargo in the trailer is secured safely in position.
• The side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a

significant blind spot.

• Sufficient time should be taken to learn the "feel" of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.
• When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher to reduce the risk of engine overheat.

▼ Driving with a trailer

• You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.
• Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations.
• Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.

Slow down before turning. Make a larger than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
Slow down before turning. Make a larger than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
- Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due

to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and promptly begin decelerating your vehicle at a gradual pace.

• When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
• Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can be difficult and requires experience. Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Diagram illustrating car steering and steering wheel movement, showing hand positions and gear shift steps

To reverse around a corner, perform the following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the opposite direction to the way you want to turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direction.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line with the trailer, then straighten the steering again.
5. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

▼ Driving on grades

• Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicle's brakes. Do not make sudden down-shifts.
• When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.

• When driving uphill in hot weather, because the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating, pay attention to the following items.

• Engine coolant temperature gauge

• AT OIL TEMP warning light

• If any of the following conditions occur, 3. immediately turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. Refer to "If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency" P484 and "Engine Overheating" P496.

• Engine coolant temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer to "Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge" P181.
• AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates. Refer to "AT OIL TEMP Warning Light" P189.
• Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
• When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until safe the blocks absorb the load.
• Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
• Shift into "P" and shut off the engine.

▼ Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

In Case of Emergency

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ...

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire 484

9-3. Maintenance Tools 486

Legacy 486 Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness 487

9-4. Flat Tires 488

Changing a Flat Tire 488 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models) 492

TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) 493

9-5. Jump Starting 493 How to Jump Start 494

9-6. Engine Overheating.... 496 If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment.... 496 If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment.... 496

9-7. Towing 497 Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes 497

484 Using a Flat-Bed Truck 500 Towing with All Wheels on the Ground 501

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake - If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released .....502

9-9. Access Key Fob - If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ....502 Locking and Unlocking.... 502 Switching Power Status .... 503 Starting Engine .... 503

9-10. Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) - If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened 504

9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information Display 505

9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident...50 To Restart the Engine When Involved in an Accident.... 506 Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved in an Accident .... 587

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency NOTE When

Diagram of car interior with directional control buttons and a circular warning symbol, labeled 307076

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pressing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pressing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher are flashing, the corresponding turn signal indicator will also flash.

When the hazard warning flasher is the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire on,

WARNING

• Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident.
• U.S.-spec. models, when a replacement tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

CAUTION

• Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.
• Always conform to the following instructions when using the temporary spare tire. Otherwise, a seriously dangerous situation may occur.

The temporary spare tire is stored under the under-floor storage compartment.

Always conform to the following instructions when using the temporary spare tire.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. For the correct tire pressure, refer to "Tires" P572.

When using the temporary spare tire, not the following precautions.

• Drive with caution when the temporary spare tire is installed. Avoid hard acceleration and braking, or fast cornering, as control of the vehicle may lost.
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
• Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
• Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

1 2 900209

1 Tread wear indicator bar
2 Indicator location mark

When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.

- The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tir gets punctured, replace the wheel with be a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

9-3. Maintenance Tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools.

• Jack
• Jack handle
• Screwdriver
• Towing hook (eye bolt) (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
• Wheel nut wrench
• Torque wrench (Outback)

CAUTION

The torque wrench is designed to be used only when changing the position of the crossbar. Do not use the torque wrench in other cases. Otherwise, the torque wrench may be deformed.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or tool with a curved handle and lever, no text or symbols present.

NOTE

To use the jack handle, insert the handle into the hole of the wheel wrench.

Legacy

1 ack2 ut 3 4 5 901044

1 Under-floor storage compartment (Refer to "Under-Floor Storage Compartment" P349.)
2 Wheel nut wrench
3 Screwdriver
4 Jack handle

5 Jack

The maintenance tools are stored in the under-floor storage compartment. For the method to use the jack, refer to "Flat Tires" P488.

■ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

▼ Type A

1 2 3 4 6 7 5 901045

1 Under-floor storage compartment (Refer to "Under-Floor Storage Compartment" -P349.)

2 Torque wrench for roof rails
3 Wheel nut wrench
4 Towing hook (eye bolt)
5 Jack
6 Jack handle
7 Screwdriver

The maintenance tools are stored in the under-floor storage compartment.

For the method to use the jack, refer to "Flat Tires" P488.

▼ Type B

Technical diagram of a car interior with labeled parts and a directional arrow indicating flow or movement.

1 Torque wrench for roof rails (if equipped)
2 Wheel nut wrench
3 Jack
4 Jack handle
5 Towing hook (eye bolt)
6 Screwdriver

For the method to use the jack, refer "Flat Tires" P488.

9-4. Flat Tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

■ Changing a Flat Tire

WARNING

• Use only the jack and the jack handle provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never put any part of your body under the vehicle while the vehicle is being supported by the jack. Doing so could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in serious injury or death.

• Before jacking up the vehicle, be sure that there are no occupants or cargo on board.

• Do not jack up the vehicle with object on or underneath the jack. The jack can be unstable and can result in a severe accident.

• Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the grou using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come on the jacking point due to a jolt this can result in serious injury death.
• All passengers must exit the vehicle before you raise it with the jack. Raising the vehicle with someone inside of it could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not start the vehicle while it supported by the jack. Doing so could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rot backing plate when removing and installing the tire. A bent backing plate may scrape against the disc rotor and cause noise while the vehicle is in motion.

aNOTE

Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking up the vehicle using a garage jack. NO

1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the select lever in the "P" (Park) position
   3 of Turn on the hazard warning flasher and unload all occupants and luggage from or the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car with wheels and motion arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat 6. tire.
2. Take out the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area (Outback/Subaru

Outback Wilderness). Refer to "Maintenance Tools" P486.

NOTE

• Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.
- To take out the tools and spare tire, store the cargo area cover to the original position and open the under-floor storage. Refer to "Under-Floor Storage Compartment" P349.

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with a magnified inset showing a tool interacting with a central component (no text or symbols present)

Take out the under-floor storage compartment and turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.

NOTE

Carefully read "Temporary Spare Tire" P484 and strictly follow the instructions.

1 2 900383

1 Notch
2 Valve hole

1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on the opposite side of the valve hole and pry the wheel cover to remove it.

Diagram of a car wheel with a black arrow pointing to the center, no text or symbols present.

1. Loosen the wheel nuts using the w nut wrench but do not remove the

900635

1. Place the jack under the side sill at front or rear jack-up point closest to flat tire.

Mechanical linkage diagram with no visible text or symbols

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

Mechanical tool diagram showing a curved handle with a bracket and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the jack handle into the hole of the the wheel nut wrench.

Line drawing of a car tire being adjusted using a clamp (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack-screw, and turn the handle until the clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

Line drawing of a hand turning a brake disc with a car tire (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a hand pressing down on a circular mechanical component with bolt holes (no text or symbols)

1. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.
2. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the whe studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.

1. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

600192

In Case of Emergency

9

1. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer to "Tires" P572. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have

- CONTINUED -

the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

1 900781

1 Support holder

1. Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment. Install with the support holder facing upward and secure the flat tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.

NOTE

If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, turning the support holder upside down.

1. Store the jack, jack handle and whe nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools the proper place.

■ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

try 702350

Low tire pressure warning light The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

• If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
  (1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
  (2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
  (3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.
  If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to "F Tires" P488.

• When a replacement tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor a four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.
• When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if sealant residue is properly cleaned off.
  tire

If the light illuminates steadily

at after blinking for approximately ly. one minute, promptly contact a "FlatSUBARU dealer to have the sys tem inspected.

■ TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models)

35 33 [psi] 35 33

306204

This screen displays each tire pressure. d Refer to "Basic Screens" P212.

if if the

9-5. Jump Starting

WARNING

- Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children away from the battery.

• The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.
• Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
• Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable eye

- CONTINUED -

protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands other metal jewelry.

• Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.
• Do not jump start unless cables suitable condition are available.
• A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.
• Jump starting is dangerous if it is done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

■ How to Jump Start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles in touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

Diagram of automotive electrical panel connections with labeled components and wiring paths

A Booster battery

B Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.

1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery.
2. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-6. Engine Overheating

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until co the engine has been shut off and K fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.

CAUTION

If the engine overheats, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may be reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately.

■ If Steam Is Coming from Engine Compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone from the vehicle until it cools down.

■ If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment NOTE

For details about how to check the coolant level or how to add coolant refer to "Engine Coolant" P530.

Keep the engine running at idling speed.

1. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment. Refer to "Engine Hood" P523.
   Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact your authorized dealer for repair.
2. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine.
   If the temperature gauge stays in the overheated zone, turn off the engine
3. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve e tank.
   If the coolant level is below the "LOW" mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" mark.
4. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.

9-7. Towing

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This was cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.

Two identical line drawings of a flatbed truck and two parked cars on a road, with a diagonal no-shape overlay (no text or symbols)

If towing is necessary, SUBARU recommends it be done by your SUBARU de or a commercial towing service.

■ Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes

The towing hooks should be used only an emergency.

A towing hook is supplied with Outback, Subaru Outback Wilderness only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing hook (the towing hook can be purchased at a SUBARU dealer). On Legacy, the towing

from will access cover is on the rear bumper only. due SUBARU recommends towing be done of by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.

CAUTION

• Use only the specified towing hook and tie-down hooks/holes. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for to or tie-down purposes.
• Never use the tie-down hole closest to the muffler under the vehicle for towing purposes.

Front towing hook (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness):

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hooker wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the under-floor storage compartment.

Line drawing of a car front bumper with grille and grille grilles (no text or symbols)

1 Towing hook covers (Depending on the vehicle, there may be only one cover.)

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure on a patient's head (no text or symbols present)

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head screwdriver into the cutout of

- CONTINUED -

the cover and pry open the cover.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the towing hook into the threaded hole until the threads can longer be seen.

Illustration of a hand holding a tool with a curved arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

1. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper

WARNING

• Do not use the towing hook for purposes other than towing your vehicle.
• Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply an excessive load to the towing hook.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the under-floor storage compartment.

Line drawing of a car's rear bumper and side panel, no text or symbols present

1 Towing hook covers (Depending on the vehicle, there may be only one cover.)

Diagram of a tool interacting with a blade, showing motion and angle (no text or symbols)

Legacy

Diagram of a tool interacting with a surface, showing motion lines and a magnified view (no text or symbols)

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdrive with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook.

Line drawing of a hand holding a tool with a connector, next to a bracket device (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the towing hook into the threaded hole until its thread can not longer be seen.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a component, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

• Do not use the towing hook for purposes other than towing your vehicle.
• Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the fuel pump shut off function when the vehicle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

• To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, not apply an excessive load to the towing hook.
- For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing, touch "Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)" to deactivate the system. The system

may not operate properly due to the blocked radar waves. For details about how to turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer to "Car settings" P230.

Front tie-down hooks:

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with internal components and airflow indicators (no text or symbols)

The front tie-down hooks are located between each of the front tires and the front bumper.

Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying the vehicle. They are not for towing.

to Rear tie-down holes:

Technical diagram showing car interior and mechanical assembly with labeled components and reference number 901047

1 Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down h To use the rear tie-down holes, remove

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for downward anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction, cables may slip out of the holes, possibly causing a dangerous situation.

Using a Flat-Bed Truck

Line drawing of a flatbed truck with a car on top, no text or symbols present

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following procedures to ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the "P" pole. position.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

Transport by flat-bed truck may cause the headlights to become misaligned. In such a case, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer after transporting the vehicle by flat-bed truck.

■ Towing with All Wheels on Ground

900489

WARNING

• Never turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position while the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.
• Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.

the

• If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
• Sometime damaged vehicles cannot be towed because of their damaged condition. In that case use a flat-bed truck for transportation.
• The traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). greater speeds and distances,

transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

- Use a flat-bed truck if there are long distance downgrades or steep slopes. However, do not apply the brake pedal for a long time because the engine braking will not work while towing. Doing so could overheat the brake.

- Drive carefully and do not make an impact on the towing rope by suddenly starting.

- Use a specific towing rope for towing. If wire ropes and metal chains are needed to be used for towing, wrap the contact portion of the bumper with cloth to protect it from damage.

1. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the "ON" position while the vehicle is being towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.

For

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake 9-9. Access Key Fob - If A - If the Electronic Parking cess Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly Brake Cannot Be Released

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic sources and signal transmitters away from the area between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch. They may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable because of strong radio signals in the surrounding area or a low battery condition of the access key fob.

• Locking/unlocking doors including rear gate
• Switching power status
• Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following procedure. When the battery of the acc key fob is discharged, replace it with a one. Refer to "Replacing Battery of Acc Key Fob" P562.

■-Locking and Unlocking

1 2 202500

1 Release button
2 Emergency key

^e While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency on key.

Lock or unlock the driver's door with the emergency key in the procedure described in "Locking and Unlocking from the Outside" P142.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to attach the emergency key back to the access key fob.

■ Switching Power Status

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the "P" position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

1. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it. When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the status of the push-button ignition switch changes to either of the following.

2. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated: "ACC"

3. Under other conditions: "ON"

4. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated, press the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal released. The status of the push-button ignition switch then changes to "ON".

NOTE

If the power does not switch even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Starting Engine

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the "P" position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it. When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound At the same time, the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
2. After the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position, while depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-10. Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) - If the Rear Gate Cannot Opened

In the event that you cannot open the rear gate by pressing the rear gate opener button (all models) or using the power gate (if equipped), you can open it from inside the cargo area.

Interior view of a car with a highlighted interior area showing a coat and seat (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the access cover at the bottom-center of the rear gate trim using flat-head screwdriver.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate lock release lever with your fingers because doing so may cause an injury. Always use a flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool.

rear

1 901083

Models without power rear gate
1 Rear gate lock release lever

1 y. 901084

Models with power rear gate
1 Rear gate lock release lever
2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to the right position using a flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the rear gate will open.

9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information Display

If the following screens are displayed, temporary errors or malfunctions may occur in the center information display. If they are only temporary errors, the following procedure may help to eliminate them.

- + - 901090

Shutting down the screen

Pure black and white geometric shape with no text or symbols

Freezing the screen

Pure black and white geometric pattern with no text or symbols

Blacking out the screen

Diagram showing a cross symbol with plus sign and number 8, depicting a surface with curved lines and ground (no text or labels)

Error A

901094

Error B

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition switch once to the "LOCK/OFF" position, then start the engine.

- CONTINUED -

1 901095

1 Volume button (dual 7.0-inch display models)

1 901096

1 Volume button (11.6-inch display models)

1. If the center information display cannot be recovered even though the engine has been restarted, press and hold the

volume button for more than 10 seconds. The center information display will start up again.

1. If the center information display is not recovered by restarting it, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident

■ To Restart the Engine When Involved in an Accident

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an accident, be sure to inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that fuel has leaked on the ground, do not try to restart the engine. The fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Immediately contact the nearest automotive service facility. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off system. When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying the fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage. Perform the following procedures to restart the engine after the system is activated. Models without “keyless access with push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position.
2. Restart the engine.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch the "ACC" or "OFF" position.
2. Restart the engine.

■ Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved in an Accident

When the automatic door locking/unlocking function is ON, all the doors will be locked automatically while driving. For further details, refer to "Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking" P144.

When the vehicle sustains a strong impact which may trigger the airbags to deploy, the door locks may be unlocked automatically to enable emergency escape. Generally, an impact sustained from a rear collision does not trigger the airbags to deploy. However if the impact is strong enough to deploy the airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking function.

Under such circumstance, the automatic door locking/unlocking function will be suspended and the doors will remain unlocked.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings first and carry out the following to retrieve the automatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

to 1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ON" position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the impact, the emergency unlocking may not function.

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.

• The doors unlock automatically while driving.
• With all doors shut, the doors unlock when pressing the lock side of the power door locking switch.

- The automatic door locking/un-locking function does not operate.

be a

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Appearance Care

10-1. Exterior Care 510

Washing 510

Waxing and Polishing 511

Cleaning Alloy Wheels 512

Cleaning Tire (Vehicle with White Letter Tires) ..

10-2. Corrosion Protection 512

Most Common Causes of Corrosion.... 512

To Help Prevent Corrosion.... 513

10-3. Cleaning the Interior 513

Seat Fabric Material 513

Leather Seat Materials.... 514

Synthetic Leather Upholstery 514

512 Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches, Combination Meter, and Other Plastic Surface 514

Center Information Display 515

10-1. Exterior Care

■ Washing

CAUTION

• When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
• Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake or electrical parts, it will cause engine trouble or a malfunction of the power steering.
• When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers and protruding objects such as exhaust pipes and exhaust finishers, be careful to prevent injuries from contacting sharp ends.
• Do not use any organic solvents when washing the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a detergent with organic solvents is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be damaged.

• Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness: Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic car-wash operator not to the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine.
• If the climate control system is operating when you wash the vehicle, do not set the air inlet selection of the climate control outside air circulation mode. There is a risk that water may enter the vehicle through the air inlets.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in automatic car wash, make sure before hand that the car wash is of suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle's beauty is frequent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand brush when washing down underbody, inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt off.

▼ Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful

effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corrosion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or s roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and other parts when washing suspension components.
• Be careful not to flush the eng bottom for a long time. It may cause damage of some electric parts.

▼ Using a warm water washer

• Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 c or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle.
• Do not wash the same area continuously.
• If a stain will not come out easily, wa by hand. Some warm water washers

are of the high temperature, high pressure type, and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water to leak in the vehicle.

■ Waxing and Polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the manufacturer's instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or to cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained compound. Neve polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain

size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic solvents on the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a polish or wax with organic solvents is applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the cover surface may be damaged.

NOTE

• Be careful not to block the wind- ne shield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
  For Subaru Outback Wilderness models, if wax gets onto the hood decal when you are waxing your vehicle, this could enhance the reflective appearance of the hood decal and impair the anti-reflective function.

- CONTINUED -

■ Cleaning Alloy Wheels

▼ Vehicles without matte painted wheels

• Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is on too long, it may be difficult to close off.
• Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose to a high-speed washing device.
• Clean the vehicle (including the alloy wheels) with water as soon as poss when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

▼ Vehicles with matte painted wheels

CAUTION

Be sure to observe the following precautions as matte painted wheels can be damaged.

• Do not scrub or polish the wheels using a brush or dry cloth.
• Do not use any wheel coatings or abrasive detergents.

As matte painted wheels require different cleaning methods than conventional alloy wheels, be sure to observe the following. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer
- Remove dirt using water. If the wheels left are excessively dirty, use a sponge or an soft cloth dampened with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the dirt.

■ Cleaning Tire (Vehicle with White Letter Tires)

It is recommended to clean the white part on the side of the tire frequently because it easily gets dirty. When cleaning, use a neutral detergent and wash a sponge.

10-2. Corrosion Protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation.

■ Most Common Causes of Corrosion

letter The most common causes of corrosion are:

● The accumulation of moisture retaining with dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
- Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:

• It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution.

• It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing.

• Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.

• High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot quickly due to lack of proper ventilati

■ To Help Prevent Corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfaces.

• Roads that have been salted to preve them from freezing in winter
• Mud, sand, or gravel
• Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint soon as you find them.

dry check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mat because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle in the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the Interior

ase a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use organic solvents.)

■ Seat Fabric Material

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a commercially available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to

- CONTINUED -

deteriorate.

■ Leather Seat Materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which will retain distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on surface can cause leather to become brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain its resiliency, leather should be cleaned monthly or whenever it becomes soiled. Before cleaning leather upholstery, vacuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm water and mild soap, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. Use a gentle circular motion while cleaning the leather do not rub or apply extreme pressure. Wipe the leather again with another clear slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt spots may be treated with a commercial leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning solvents, leather oils, varnishes or polishes on your leather as it will dry out the leather finish.

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage.

You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles which is characteristic of genuine leather.

■Synthetic Leather Upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and w off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.

■ Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches, Combination Meter, and Other Plastic Surface

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

• Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.
• Do not use chemical solvents that contain silicone on the vehicle audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or any switches. If silicone adheres to these parts, it may cause damage to electrical components.

■ Center Information Display

To clean the center information display, wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent then carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

• Do not spray neutral detergent directly onto the display(s). Doing so could damage the rotor's components.
• Do not wipe the display(s) with hard cloth. Doing so could scratch the monitor.
• Do not use cleaning fluid that contains thinner, gasoline, or any other volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid could erase the lettering on the switches on the display(s).

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Maintenance and Service

11-1. Maintenance Schedule 519
11-2. Maintenance Precautions 519

Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment....520
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment....521
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment While the Engine Is Running
11-3. Maintenance Tips.... 521
Removing and Reinstalling Clips 521
11-4. Engine Hood.... 523
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview 525
2.5 L Models 525
2.4 L Models 526
11-6. Engine Oil 527
Engine Oil Consumption 527 Checking the Oil Level 527
Changing the Oil and Oil Filter.... 529
Recommended Grade and Viscosity.... 529
Synthetic Oil.... 529
11-7. Cooling System.... 530
Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections 530 Engine Coolant....530
11-8. Air Cleaner Element.... 532
Replacing the Air Cleaner Element.... 532
11-9. Spark Plugs 534
Recommended Spark Plugs 534
11-10. Drive Belts 535
11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid 535

11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil 535
Recommended Grade and Viscosity 535
11-13. Brake Fluid 536
Checking the Fluid Level 536
Recommended Brake Fluid 536
11-14. Brake Pedal 537
11-15. Replacement of Brake Pad ....537
11-16. Tires and Wheels ....538
Types of Tires 538
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models) 538
Tire Inspection 540
Tire Pressures and Wear 540
Wheel Balance 542
Wear Indicators 543
Rotational Direction of Tires.... 543
Tire Rotation 544
Tire Replacement 545
Wheel Replacement.... 546
11-17. Alloy Wheels 54¢
11-18. Windshield Washer Fluid 546
11-19. Replacement of Wiper Blades .....
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly 54
Window Wiper Blade Rubber 549
Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) 550
Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber (Outback/ Subaru Outback Wilderness) 550
11-20. Battery 552

Maintenance and Service

11-21. Fuses 553

11-22. Installation of Accessories.... 554

11-23. Replacing Bulbs.... 554

Headlights 555

Front Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light.....555

Rear Combination Lights 556

Backup Light 558

Door Step Light.... 560

Trunk Light (Legacy) 560

Other Bulbs 560

Adjusting Headlight Aim (Legacy/Outback) ..... 560

11-24. Replacing Battery 561

Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob.... 562

Replacing Battery of Transmitter 563

11-1. Maintenance Schedule

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". For details, read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Service Booklet". For details, read the separate "Warranty and Service Booklet".

Except for U.S. and Canada models Some items of your vehicle are required be serviced at scheduled intervals. For details about your maintenance schedule read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-2. Maintenance Precautions

When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage

WARNING

• Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
  • Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your

be by

vehicle.

● Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid.

- Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.

- Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained.

- Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use safety stands to support the vehicle.

- Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas.

- Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.

- Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.

• Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluid in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water
• Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
• Check the inside of the engine compartment to see if there are any cloths and tools left. If they are left inside, they may be a cause of malfunction and fire.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of non-SUBARU approved flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents which have not been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any part of the vehicle which is damaged adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those approved or recommended by SUBARU.

■ Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment

WARNING

● Always stop the engine and apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from moving.
- Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after engine is stopped.
- Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.

of* When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. If your body or clothes come into contact with a rotating fan, that could result in serious injury. To avoid risk of injury, perform the follow-

ing precautions.

by_ Models with push-button start system: Always turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position and confirm that the operation indicator on the switch is turned off. Then take the access key fob out from the vehicle.
- Models without push-button start system:
Always remove the key from the ignition switch.
- Before performing any servicing on a vehicle equipped with a remote engine start system temporarily place that system in the service mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine.

■ When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment

Mechanical engine component diagram showing engine shaft, valve, and housing (no text or labels)

CAUTION

- Do not contact the belt cover while checking the components in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause your hand to slip off the belt cover and result in an unexpected injury.

- Do not touch the oil filter until engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a or other injury. Note that the filter becomes very hot when engine is running and remains hot for some time after the e has stopped.

■ When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment While the Engine Is Running

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

1-3. Maintenance Tips

burn Some clips and fender linings must be removed before replacing the air cleaner elements or specific bulbs.

■ Removing and Reinstalling Clips

▼ Removing clips

There are several types of clips used for your vehicle.

▽ Type A and D clips

B01036

Type A clips

B01536

Type D clips

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using a flat-head screwdriver until the center portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head screwdriver using leverage.

▽ Type B clips

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with an upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip 1 using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to remove the entire body of the clip.

▽ Type C clips

B00798

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a n Phillips screwdriver until the center portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

▼ Reinstalling clips

Diagram showing a mechanical component with a downward arrow and a separate circular component, labeled B01024 (no text or symbols on the components themselves)

Type A clips

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with two views: top view showing a pin or knob, bottom view showing a circular base (no text or symbols)

Type B clips

Diagram showing two mechanical components with downward arrows indicating motion or assembly (no text or symbols)

Type C clips

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve with a downward arrow and a separate plate (no text or symbols)

Type D clips

Insert the clip without the center portion first and then push the center portion of the clip into the hole.

11-4. Engine Hood

CAUTION

• Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the engine hood.
• Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
• Be extremely careful opening the engine hood when the wind is strong. The engine hood could close suddenly, possibly causing injuries from slamming.
• Do not install accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the engine hood. If the engine hood becomes too heavy, the stay may not be able to supp holding it open.
• Check that the end of the hood stay is inserted into the slot. If it not inserted properly, the hood may drop and cause injury.

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, return them to their original positions.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional buttons (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.

Diagram of a car head with a highlighted component, showing engine and dashboard details (no text or symbols)

1. Release the secondary hood release by moving the lever between the front grille and the hood toward the left.

B02337

1 Grip

1. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the engine compartment. Hold the grip for handling the hood prop.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the engine compartment and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

11-5. Engine Compartment Overview

■ 2.5 L Models

1 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 B02241

1 Brake fluid reservoir (page 536)
2 Main fuse box (page 553)
3 Battery (page 552)
4 Windshield washer tank (page 546)
5 Engine oil filler cap (page 527)
6 Engine coolant reservoir (page 530)
7 Radiator cap (page 530)
8 Engine oil filter (page 529)
9 Engine oil level gauge (page 527)
10 Air cleaner case (page 532)

■ 2.4 L Models

1 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 B02242

1 Brake fluid reservoir (page 536)
2 Main fuse box (page 553)
3 Battery (page 552)
4 Windshield washer tank (page 546)
5 Engine oil filler cap (page 527)
6 Engine coolant reservoir (page 530)
7 Radiator cap (page 530)
8 Engine oil filter (page 529)
9 Engine oil level gauge (page 527)
10 Air cleaner case (page 532)

11-6. Engine Oil

CAUTION

• If the level gauge is not pulled easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.
• Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
• Be careful not to spill engine when adding it. If oil touches exhaust pipe, it may cause a smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

■ Engine Oil Consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while driving. The rate of consumption can be affected by such factors as transmission type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil consumption can be increased and thus require refilling between maintenance intervals:
- When the engine is new and within the break-in period

• When the engine oil is of lower quality
• When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
• When engine braking is employed (repeatedly)

When the engine is operated at high engine speeds (for extended periods time)

• When the engine is operated under heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
• When towing a trailer (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
• When the engine idles for extended periods of time

When the vehicle is operated in stop and go and/or heavy traffic situations

• When the vehicle is used under severe thermal conditions
• When the vehicle accelerates and decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you should check your oil at least every 2nd fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more frequently. Different drivers in the same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is greater than expected, contact your authorized SUBARU retailer who may perform a test under controlled conditions.

■ Checking the Oil Level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine. If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.

1 3 2 B01929

2.5 L models
1 Oil level gauge
2 Oil filler cap
3 Oil filter

1 2 3 B01928

2.4 L models

1 Oil level gauge
2 Oil filler cap
3 Oil filter

CAUTION

If the level gauge is not pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.

1. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
2. Be sure the level gauge is correctly inserted until it stops.

1 2 3 B01931

2.5 L models

1 Full level
2 Low level
3 Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt) from low level to full level

1 2 3 B01930

2.4 L models

1 Full level
2 Low level
3 Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt) from low level to full level

1. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
2. Check the oil level on both sides of the level gauge. The engine oil level must be judged by the lowest of the two levels. If the oil level is below the low level mark, add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

- Be careful not to touch the engine oil filter when removing the oil filler cap. Doing so may result in a burn, a pinched finger, or may

cause some other injury.

• Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
• Be careful not to spill engine when adding it. If oil touches exhaust pipe, it may cause a smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil filler cap and slowly pour engine oil through the filler neck. After pouring oil into the engine, you must use the level gauge to confirm that the oil level is correct.

NOTE

• To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the full level when the engine is
• After adding or changing the engine oil, warm up the engine and stop on a level surface, then start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute more. Confirm that the warning light has turned off after the engine has started. Refer to "Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light" P189.

■ Changing the Oil and Oil Change the oil and oil filter according the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

the bad Changing the engine oil and oil fi should be performed by a well-trained expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer for changing the engine oil and oil filter. Fully tra mechanics are on standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the spe tools, spare parts and recommended oil for this work, and al used oils are properly disposed c If performing oil replacement yourself, observe the local regulations and dispose of waste oil properly

Recommended Grade and cold Viscosity

it CAUTION brUse only engine oil with the rec ntmended grade and viscosity. s

Refer to "Engine Oil" P568.

FiNetE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the en-

■ Synthetic Oil

You should use synthetic engine oil that meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same classification, viscosity and grade shown in this Owner's Manual. Refer to "Engine Oil" P568. Also, you must follow the oil and filter changing intervals shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity noted in chapter 12 is the recommended engine oil for optimum engine performance. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-7. Cooling System

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

CAUTION

- Vehicles are filled at the factory with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT that does not require the first change for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 years/220,000 km). This coolant should not be mixed with any other brand or type of coolant during this period. Mixing with a different coolant will reduce the life of the coolant. When necessary to top off the coolant for any reason, use only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT.

If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT diluted with another brand or type, the maintenance interval

shortened to that of the mixing coolant.

- Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

of Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature.

H 1

306056

1 Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not open even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Refer to "Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge" P181.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant is necessary between vehicle service visits, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, damage, or looseness.

■ Engine Coolant

▼ Checking the coolant level

1 2 B01942

1 "FULL" level mark 2 "LOW" level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop

1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the "LOW" level mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and refill coolant up to just below the filler neck as shown in the following illustration.

B01979

1 Fill up to this level.

the

Mechanical component diagram showing a circular housing with flanges and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the cap and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
• Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

▼ Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant. Have the coolant changed by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-8. Air Cleaner Element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The cleaner element not only filters in-take air but also stops flames if engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air cleaner element. If it is not used, there is the possibility of causing negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a screen. When the element is perforated removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is unnecessary to clean or wash the element.

■ Replacing the Air Cleaner Element

Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

▼ 2.5 L models

1 B01943

filter or Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).

1. Open the air cleaner case and pull the cover rearward while lifting it up.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the air cleaner element.

CAUTION

If the inside of the air cleaner case is extremely soiled (for example, by sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and have the air cleaner case cleaned.

1. If you find large foreign objects such as leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove the foreign objects.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Install a new air cleaner element in the way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.
   

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with meshed components and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

1. To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on air cleaner case (front).
7. Install in the reverse order of removal

▼ 2.4 L models

e 1 B01947

1 Clips

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).
   the Open the air cleaner case and pull the cover rearward while lifting it up.
   

Diagram of a car air conditioner unit being installed, showing hand positioning and component placement (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the air cleaner element.

CAUTION

If the inside of the air cleaner case is extremely soiled (for example, by sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and have the air cleaner case cleaned.

1. If you find large foreign objects such as leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove the foreign objects.

Diagram of hands installing or adjusting a component on a vehicle chassis (no text or symbols visible)

1. Install a new air cleaner element in the way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.
   

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on air cleaner case (front).

1. Install the removed parts in the reve order of removal.

th¢1-9. Spark Plugs

^58 It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

■ Recommended Spark Plugs

Refer to "Electrical System" P571.

11-10. Drive Belts

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of the drive belt periodically because your engine is equipped with an automatic tension adjuster. However, replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement. If the belt is loose, cracked or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

of There is no fluid level gauge. It is un- necessary to check the continuously var able transmission fluid level. However, if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil

It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Recommended Grade and Viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. For details, refer to "Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil" P570.

CAUTION Using a differential gear oil other than the specified oil may cause a decline in vehicle performance.

11-13. Brake Fluid

■ Checking the Fluid Level

WARNING

• Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
• Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
• If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

• When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir.
• Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.

• Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the reservoir monthly on the even surface.

2 1 B02247

1 "MAX" level line
2 "MIN" level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level is below "MIN", top up brake fluid to "MAX". Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

■ Recommended Brake Fluid Refer to "Fluids" P570.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they are the same brand.

11-14. Brake Pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-15. Replacement of Brake Pad

CAUTION

• If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or replacement.
• It is recommended that you disconnect the vehicle battery before replacing the brake pad. However, it is dangerous to disconnect the vehicle battery. We recommend that you have your SUBARU dealer replace the brake pad.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal wiring (no text or symbols)

The disc brakes have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer is soon as possible.

11-16. Tires and Wheels

■ Types of Tires

You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle.

The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all season tires.

▼ All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However all season tires do not offer as much traction performance winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose sr or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by "ALL SEASON" and/or "M+S" (Mud & Snow) the tire sidewall.

▼ Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway driving und dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving slippery roads such as on snow-covered icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covere or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

▼ Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving o snow-covered and icy roads. However winter tires do not perform as well as summer tires and all season tires on road other than snow-covered and icy roads.

■ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mp (32 km/h). Also, this system may not reach immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a war garage and will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressure in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures higher than those shown on the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-

cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm) for every difference of 10^ F (5.6°C) between the temperature in the garage and the temperature outside. By way of example, the following table shows the required tire pressures that correspond to various outside temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 60^ F (15.6°C).

Example:

Tire size: 225/55R17 97V, 225/50R18 95V Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)

or-Outside temperature		Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
		Front	Rear
act	30°F (-1°C)	36 (250, 2.5)	35 (240, 2.4)
d	10°F (-12°C)	38 (265, 2.65)	37 (255, 2.55)
	-10°F (-23°C)	41 (280, 2.8)	39 (270, 2.7)

Example:

Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18 e100H, 225/65R17 102T

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kg/cm

Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)

Outside temperature	Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm)]
	Front Rear
30°F (-1°C)	38 (260, 2.65)	36 (250, 2.5)
10°F (-12°C)	40 (275, 2.8)	38 (265, 2.65)
-10°F (-23°C)	42 (290, 2.95)	41 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire pressures using the method described above. Then, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check see that the low tire pressure warning light goes off a few minutes later. If the low pressure warning light does not go off, the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In this event, go a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After illumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any increase in the tire pressures caused by increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warning light to go off.

It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow tires), use wheels that have the same pa number as the standard-equipment wheels. Without four operational TPMS valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS will not fully function and the warning light in the instrument panel will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned on or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.
If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to "Flat Tires" 488
When a replacement tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

▼ TPMS valve self-registration

When the wheels are replaced (such as when installing snow tires) or when a TPMS valve is mounted on a new insta wheel, you will need to perform TPMS valve self-registration. Refer to the following procedure to perform TPMS valve registration.

1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified value. For information about the specified value of the tire pressure, refer to "Tires" P572.
3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or un the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

NOTE

• When installing TPMS valves, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
• Registration of TPMS valves can also be done at a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer.

■ Tire Inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.

NOTE

- When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Not to drive over curbs, pot-holes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is unavoidable, keep the vehicle's speed down to a walking pace or and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb where you park the vehicle.

If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

Tire Pressures and Wear the Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires' service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire and the spare (if equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.

d less en ult 801310

Tire inflation pressure label

Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to che tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

• The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm) when the tire becomes warm.

• The tires are considered cold

when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours has been driven less than mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tir to adjust pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally.

- Correctly inflated tires (tread worn evenly)

Diagram of a container with a mesh pattern inside, no text or symbols present

B00050

Roadholding is good, and steering or responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower.

- Under inflated tires (tread worn at shoulders)

tires

Diagram of a container with a dashed line indicating internal structure, no text or symbols present

B00051

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.

• Over inflated tires (tread worn in center)

Diagram of a cylindrical container with internal crack pattern (no text or symbols)

B00052

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an accident.

■ Wheel Balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle's straight-line stability. It can also cause steering a suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

in Loss of correct wheel alignment causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the of vehicle's running stability.

Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.

,NOTE

The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering performance.

Wear Indicators

1 3 2 B00327

1 New tread
2 Worn tread
3 Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible.

Rotational Direction of Tires

1 ROTATION B00550

Example of rotational direction marked on the sidewall 1 Front

If the tires have specific rotational direction, refer to the arrow marked on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing forward direction when the wheels are fitted.

graph TD
    A["Top: Two parallel strips with wavy patterns"] -->|1| B["Crossing arrow"]
    C["Bottom: Two parallel strips with wavy patterns"] -->|1| D["Crossing arrow"]
    B --> E["Right"]
    D --> F["Right"]

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires 1 Front

graph TD
    A["Top Block"] --> B["Bottom Block"]
    B --> C["Step 1"]
    C --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

Vehicles equipped with unidi- rectional tires 1 Front

graph TD
    A["Rectangular Block 1"] --> B["Rectangular Block 2"]
    B --> C["Rectangular Block 3"]
    C --> D["Circle Component"]
    D --> E["Rectangular Block 4"]
    E --> F["Rectangular Block 5"]
    F --> G["Rectangular Block 6"]
    G --> H["Rectangular Block 7"]
    H --> I["Rectangular Block 8"]
    I --> J["Rectangular Block 9"]
    J --> K["Rectangular Block 10"]
    K --> L["Rectangular Block 11"]
    L --> M["Rectangular Block 12"]
    M --> N["Rectangular Block 13"]
    N --> O["Rectangular Block 14"]
    O --> P["Rectangular Block 15"]
    P --> Q["Rectangular Block 16"]
    Q --> R["Rectangular Block 17"]
    R --> S["Rectangular Block 18"]
    S --> T["Rectangular Block 19"]
    T --> U["Rectangular Block 20"]
    U --> V["Rectangular Block 21"]
    V --> W["Rectangular Block 22"]
    W --> X["Rectangular Block 23"]
    X --> Y["Rectangular Block 24"]
    Y --> Z["Rectangular Block 25"]
    Z --> AA["Rectangular Block 26"]
    AA --> AB["Rectangular Block 27"]
    AB --> AC["Rectangular Block 28"]
    AC --> AD["Rectangular Block 29"]
    AD --> AE["Rectangular Block 30"]
    AE --> AF["Rectangular Block 31"]
    AF --> AG["Rectangular Block 32"]
    AG --> AH["Rectangular Block 33"]
    AH --> AI["Rectangular Block 34"]
    AI --> AJ["Rectangular Block 35"]
    AJ --> AK["Rectangular Block 36"]
    AK --> AL["Rectangular Block 37"]
    AL --> AM["Rectangular Block 38"]
    AM --> AN["Rectangular Block 39"]
    AN --> AO["Rectangular Block 40"]
    AO --> AP["Rectangular Block 41"]
    AP --> AQ["Rectangular Block 42"]
    AQ --> AR["Rectangular Block 43"]
    AR --> AS["Rectangular Block 44"]
    AS --> AT["Rectangular Block 45"]
    AT --> AU["Rectangular Block 46"]
    AU --> AV["Rectangular Block 47"]
    AV --> AW["Rectangular Block 48"]
    AW --> AX["Rectangular Block 49"]
    AX --> AY["Rectangular Block 50"]

Models with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires 1 Front

NOTE

In prior to carrying out a tire rotation, check the side wall of the tires and confirm the following.

• All 5 tires are the same in brand and tread pattern.
  • The rotational directions and sizes match.

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. Tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the whee nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.

■ Tire Replacement

The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicle's design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire inflation pressure label. For more details about matching the speed rating and load index of your tires, refer to "Tires" P572.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle's ground clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires at the same time.

WARNING

When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver's door pillar.

of If all four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
• Clearance between the body and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident

- Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in an accident.

■ Wheel Replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to against the wheel well housing driving turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after dr approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). Any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.

11-17. Alloy Wheels

Alloy wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.

• When any of the wheels is removed an replaced for tire rotation or to change flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque
• Never apply oil to the threaded parts, b wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.
• Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
• When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alloy wheels.
• When stacking and storing removed tires, place shock-absorbing material between the tires to protect the wheels

drivingrom becoming scratched.

11-18. Windshield Washer Fluid

a B01704

Windshield washer fluid warning light

When there is only a small amount of washer fluid remaining, the windshield washer fluid warning light will appear. When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as follows.

1 B01952

1 "FULL" mark

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then add fluid until it reaches the "FULL" mark on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid.

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage.

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the windshield washer tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

• Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze the windshield washer tank.
• State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blade or washer system.

11-19. Replacement of Wiper Blades

of Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield and rear window using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, however, use detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade strongly, the black coating component will peel off, which will cause the wiper to a judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that the rubber has not come loose. After cleaning the window glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean water. Rinse the window until the water does not form beads on the glass. This indicates that the glass is clean.

CAUTION

- Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This

- CONTINUED -

will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.

• When you wish to raise the passenger-side wiper arm, first raise the driver-side wiper arm. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.
• Return the passenger-side wiper arm to its original position before returning the driver-side wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.
• When returning the raised wipers to the original positions, return the wipers slowly on the windshield by hand. Returning the wipers from the detached positions by the spring operation might change the shape of the wiper arm or scratch the windshield.
• While removing the wiper blades from the wiper arms, do not return the wiper arms to the original positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking ev after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following procedures.

■ Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly

NOTE

Do not lower the wiper arm while the wiper blade assembly is removed.

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield. First raise the driver's side wiper arm and then raise the front passenger's side wiper arm.

Line drawing of a car with a hand cleaning the dashboard area, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing the wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade, may result in blade deformation.

e 1 B01661

1 Lock knob
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by hand, push the lock knob to release the lock, and then pull out the wiper blade assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the lock knob. The lock knob may be scratched.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. When installing the wiper blade assembly, align it with the wiper arm connection part and then slide it in the opposite direction of removal to install. After installing the wiper blade assembly, check that the connection part is locked completely.
2. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

■ Window Wiper Blade Rubber

Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit on the underside of the wiper blade is in the removal position, as shown in the

illustration, so that it can be removed.

1. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber through the slit to remove it.
2. To install a new wiper blade rubber, perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. After installation, check that the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper blade rubber replacement. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement if necessary.

■ Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.

B00061

1. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.

Pure technical diagram showing intersecting lines and a black arrow, no text or symbols present

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm.

■ Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Diagram showing a curved arrow pointing to a textured rectangular object, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to unlock it from the plastic support.

Diagram showing a curved mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support.

Diagram showing a curved pipe with a black arrow indicating direction, labeled B00066 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the blade rubber assembly into place.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1 Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber

Line drawing of a mechanical component or bracket with no visible text or symbols

Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the near window glass.

1. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in and place.

2. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

11-20. Battery

WARNING

• Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.
• For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery.
• Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.

• To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and any thing connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
• Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
• Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life.

NOTE

To avoid battery drain, do not use electric power (e.g., lights, wipers, climate control, seat heaters, etc.) for longer than necessary when the engine is off. If using the radio, room lights or other electrical equipment with the engine off, even in the ignition switch is in the "ACC" position, the battery will drain.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water.

11-21. Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.

NOTE

Fuse rating and using circuit are described on each behind the fuse box cover.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

B01953

One is located under the instrument panel behind the fuse box cover on the driver's seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

B01955

1 Spare fuses 2 Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed it in

the engine compartment. Also, the spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in the box cover.

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller when removing it from the main fuse b

Two schematic diagrams of a mechanical component with internal channels and mounting holes, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1 Good 2 Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" fuse "OFF" position and turn off all electrical accessories.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown. Look at the back side of each fuse box cover.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller
2. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating.
3. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
   same
   for

11-22. Installation of Accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle. We recommend that you install only genuine SUBARU accessories on your vehicle.

11-23. Replacing Bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is the risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire. For the specified wattage of each bulb, refer to "Bulb Chart" P574. For replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Headlights

B01697

The LED headlight warning light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBA dealer as soon as possible.

■ Front Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with an arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

Right-hand side (Legacy/Outback)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Right-hand side (Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a gear shift mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Left-hand side (Legacy/Outback)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a rotating component with a tool inserted, no visible text or symbols

Left-hand side (Subaru Outback Wilderness)
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out.

1. Pull out the bulb from the socket and replace the bulb with a new one.

■ Rear Combination Lights

▼ Legacy

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with two arrows indicating features (no text or symbols present)

1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo the clips, refer to "Type C clips" P522.

bs. ils B01982

1. Remove the side cover.

B01983

1. Remove the upper and lower screws

Line drawing of a car front panel showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it from the vehicle.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components (no readable text or symbols)

1 Rear turn signal light

1. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning

it counterclockwise.

1. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder replace it with a new one.
2. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn clockwise until it locks.

Line drawing of a car front panel showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part of the combination light assembly securely to each holder of the vehicle side.

and it B01983

1. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
2. Reinstall the side cover.

▼ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing a door, seat, and window (no text or symbols)

1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo

the clips, refer to "Type C clips" P522.

Diagram of a car door handle with arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the side cover.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing valve and adjustment points (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the upper and lower screws.

Diagram of a car's front compartment showing the handle and seat area, with no visible text or symbols

1. Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove from the vehicle.
   

1 2 B01991

1 Rear turn signal light
2 Rear side marker light

1. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

1. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder replace it with a new one.
2. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn clockwise until it locks.

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle and seat assembly with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part of the combination light assembly securely to each holder of the vehicle side.

and

Diagram of a car interior showing valve positions and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
2. Reinstall the side cover.

■ Backup Light

▼ Legacy

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

1. Open the trunk.

Replacing Bulbs

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis frame with mounting holes and structural components (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the trunk trim lining by removing the clips indicated in the illustration

2. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.

3. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

▼ Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

Diagram of a car interior showing a hand holding a small object near the door, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the light cover or rear gate light (if equipped) as shown in the illustration and pry the light cover off from the gate trim.

Mechanical diagram showing a rotating component with directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwis and remove it.
   

ear 700075

1. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one.
2. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.

- CONTINUED -

Diagram of a car door handle with a switch and gear mechanism, showing no text or symbols

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one.

3. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

■ Door Step Light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Trunk Light (Legacy)

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Other Bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the bu We recommend that you have the bu replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

■ Adjusting Headlight Aim (Legacy/Outback)

a n 1 bs. 2 bbs B02254

1 Adjustment screw A

2 Adjustment screw B

▼ Before checking the headlight aiming

1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Sit in the driver's seat.
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

▼ Headlight aim adjustment

1 B02255

1 Adjustment direction mark

1. Turn screw A clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust it. Remember the direction of the rotation and number of rotations.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component 1, showing internal components and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

1 Adjustment direction mark

1. Turn screw B the same number of t and in the same direction as step 1

NOTE

• If the headlight aim cannot be adjusted, contact your SUBARU dealer.
  • To inspect the headlight aim position, consult a SUBARU dealer.

11-24. Replacing Battery

The access key fob/transmitter battery may be discharged under the following conditions.

• The operation of the keyless access function is unstable.
• The operating distance of the remote keyless entry system is unstable.
• The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

• Do not let dust, oil or water ge or in the access key fob/transfer when replacing battery.
• Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to allow children touch the battery and any removed parts; children could swallow them.
• There is a danger of an explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the battery.

- Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as bright sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

• Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
• Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
• Mount the battery in the correct orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be careful not to bend the terminals It may result in a malfunction.
• it is recommended that the battery should be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
• Use a new battery.
• After replacing the battery, confirm that the access key fob/transmitter functions properly.

to

■ Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob

CAUTION

• When removing or fitting the access key fob cover, make sure that the plastic part does not come off or become misaligned.
• Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or equivalent

1 2 202500

1 Release button
2 Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.
   

Line drawing of a handheld device with a handle and control panel (no text or symbols)

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with virtape or a cloth, and insert it in the to remove the cover.
   

B01546

1. Take out the battery using a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

Line drawing of a handheld device with control panel and buttons (no text or symbols)

y14. Insert a new battery with its positive (+) gap side facing upward as shown in the figure.

Technical line drawing of a device housing with two views showing internal components (no text or symbols)

d5. Attach the cover to the access key fob by fitting the projections and recesses together.

■ Replacing Battery of Transmitter

CAUTION

Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2025 or equivalent

Line drawing of a mechanical device with arrows indicating motion, no text or symbols present

1. Open the key head using a flat-head screwdriver.

Line drawing of a hand holding a key inserted into a car key (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the transmitter case from the key head.

Diagram of a mechanical device with directional arrows indicating movement, no readable text or symbols present

1. Open the transmitter case by releasing the hooks.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled part '1' and directional arrow (no text or symbols beyond label)

1 Negative (−) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new battery (type CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with the negative (-) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the remote keyless entry system's control unit. Press either the "or" button six times to synchronize the unit.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Specifications

12-1. Specifications 566

Dimensions 566

Engine.... 567

Fuel 567

Engine Oil 568

Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil...

Fluids 570

Engine Coolant.... 571

Electrical System.... 571

Tires.... 572

Brake Pedal 573

Brake Disc.... 573

Brake Pad 573

12-2. Bulb Chart....574

Safety Precautions 574

Bulb Chart 575

12-3. Vehicle Identification....578

\$7012-4. Function Settings 579

Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display 579

Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display 579

Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer 579

12-1. Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

■ Dimensions
in (mm)

Item		Legacy Outback Subaru		Outback Wilderness
		2.5 L 2.4 L	2.5 L 2.4 L
Drive system AWD
Transmission type CVT
Overall length 191.1 (4,855) 191.9 (4,875) 191.3 (4,860)
Overall width		72.4 (1,840)		74.2 (1,885)		74.6 (1,895)
Overall height		59.1 (1,500)		66.1 (1,680)		66.9 (1,700)
Wheelbase		108.3 (2,750)		108.1 (2,745)
Tread	Front	62.2 (1,580)		61.8 (1,570)		62.0 (1,575)
	Rear	63.4 (1,610)		62.8 (1,595)		63.0 (1,600)
Ground clearance ^		5.9 (150)		8.7 (220)		9.5 (241)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive

Engine

Engine model FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC,	non-turbo) FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type	Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke direct injection gasoline engine	Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498)	146 (2,387)
Bore × Stroke in (mm)	3.70 × 3.54 (94.0 × 90.0)	3.70 × 3.39 (94.0 × 86.0)
Compression ratio 12.0 : 1 10.6 : 1
Firing order 1 - 3 - 2 - 4		1 - 3 - 2 - 4

Fuel

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher	18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

■ Engine Oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to "Engine Oil" P527.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

▼ Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described in the following.

▼ Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

• Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.
• In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
• When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same ILSAC and API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.

Oil grade		SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature	Engine oil capacity
or40886	MC0293	0W-20 synthetic oil is the required for optimum engine performance and protection. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 5W-30 conventional oil may be used if you need to add oil. However, you should change to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.ZOM0926	2.5 L models- Adding the oil from low level to full level:1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)- Changing the oil and oil filter:4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)2.4 L models- Adding the oil from low level to full level:1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)- Changing the oil and oil filter:4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”, SN PLUS with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING” or SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”	ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-5 or GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade	SUBARU Extra MT*3API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*4		2.5 L models and 2.4 L for Outback: API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*32.4 L for Legacy/Subaru Outback Wilderness: SUBARU Extra MT*3 or API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*
Oil capacity*1	2.5 L models 1	4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)	0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
	2.4 L models 1	3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Remarks*2	“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” P535 Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” P535

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of differential gear oil.
*4: You may use this type of differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from fuel efficiency.

Fluids

Fluid Fluid type*	1	Fluid capacity ^2	Remarks ^*3
Continuously variable transmission fluid	Consult your SUBARU dealer.	2.5 L models:Legacy: 11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 Imp qt)Outback: 12.4 US qt (11.7 liters, 10.3 Imp qt)2.4 L models:Legacy: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness: 12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)	“Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid” ^4 P535
Brake fluid	FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid	—	“Brake Fluid” ^4 P536

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

■ Engine Coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity	Coolant type
2.5 L models 9.5 US qt (9.0 liters, 7.9 Imp	qt)	SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
2.4 L models	9.2 US qt (8.7 liters, 7.7 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, referencing System" P530.

■ Electrical System

Battery type LN2
Alternator		2.5 L models: 12 V-150 A2.4 L models: 12 V-190 A
Spark plugs	2.5 L models DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)
	2.4 L models	SILKFR8A6 (NGK)

Tires

Item Legacy Outback							SubaruOutbackWilderness
Tire size		225/55R1797V	225/50R1895V		225/65R17102H	225/60R18100H	225/65R17102T
Wheel size		17 × 7J 17 × 7 1/2J	18 × 7 1/2J		17 × 7J	18 × 7J	17 × 7J
Pressure	Front	33 psi (230 kPa,2.3 kgf/cm2)	33 psi (230 kPa,2.3 kgf/cm2)*4	36 psi (250 kPa,2.5 kgf/cm2)*4	35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
	Rear	32 psi (220 kPa,2.2 kgf/cm2)	32 psi (220 kPa,2.2 kgf/cm2)*4	35 psi (240 kPa,2.4 kgf/cm2)*4	33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Temporary spare tire/Conventional tire	Size T155/70	D17 110M			T155/80 D17 101M*225/60 R18 100H*		225/65 R17102T*3
	Pressure 60	psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm 2)			60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cmFront: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cmRear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
Wheel nut tightening torque		89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12.2 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to Changing a Flat Tire" P488.
*2: Models with temporary spare tire
*3: Models with conventional tire
*4: See the tire inflation pressure label located on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Brake Pedal
in (mm)

Pedal clearance 2.68 (68)*
Pedal free play	0.02 - 0.07 (0.4 - 1.8)

*: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

Brake Disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

Brake Pad
in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.06 (1.5)

12-2. Bulb Chart

■ Safety Precautions

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire.

Bulb Chart

A 1 B C 2 D E F G 3 H

I J K 4 L M 5 6 N

7 K I L 5 6 N O

C00531

NOTE

Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Wattage Bulb No.

1 Front turn signal lights 12 V-28 W 7444NA
Front position lights (Legacy/Outback) 12 V-8 W 7444NA
2 Vanity mirror lights 14 V-1.4 W HTU
3 Door step lights (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W
4 Rear side marker lights (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	12 V-5 W W5W
5 Backup lights 12 V-16 W W16W
6 Rear turn signal lights	12 V-21 W	WY21W
7 Trunk light (Legacy)	12 V-3.8 W	SAE #194
A Front position lights (Subaru Outback Wilderness)	—	—
B Map lights	—	—
C Dome light	—	—
D Low and high beam headlights	—	—
Daytime running lights (Legacy/Outback)	—	—
E Front fog lights (if equipped)	—	—
F Accessory lights (Legacy/Outback)	—	—
G Front side marker lights	—	—
H Side turn signal lights (if equipped)	—	—
I High-mounted stop light	—	—
J Cargo area light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	—	—
K Tail lights (if equipped)	—	—
L License plate lights	—	—

Wattage Bulb No.

M Rear gate light (if equipped) — —
N Tail and stop lights — —
O Rear side marker lights (Legacy) — —

12-3. Vehicle Identification

7 1 4 2 3 6 5 C00530

1 Emission control label
2 Certification and bar code label
3 Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle placard)
4 Vehicle identification number
5 Model number label
6 Fuel label
7 Air conditioner label

12-4. Function Settings

■ Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display

Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to "Center Information Display (CID)" P216.

■ Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings	Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system	Operation/Non-operation Operation 149
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation		139

■ Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer

Item	Function	Available settings	Factory default setting
Alarm system	Monitoring start delay time (after closing doors)	0 seconds/30 seconds	30 seconds
	Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light illumination (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	ON/OFF	OFF
Keyless access with push-button	Audible signal volume ^2	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
	Trunk open without key (Legacy)	ON/OFF	ON
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal volume ^*2	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
Remote trunk open/power rear gate open function ^*1	Operation of trunk opening/power rear gate opening by remote transmitter/access key fob	Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing and holding	Pressing and holding
Key lock-in prevention	Key lock-in prevention	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Item Function Available settings			Factory default setting
Auto dimmer cancel	Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer cancel	OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
High beam assist function*	High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper	Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation	Operation/Non-operation	U.S.-spec. models: Non-operationOther models: Operation

*1: If equipped
*2: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defec

13-1. For U.S.A. 582
13-2. Tire Information 582

Tire Labeling 582

Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure.... 584

Glossary of Tire Terminology 585

Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices .....

Vehicle Load Limit - How to Determine ....

Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle Load Capacities.... 593

Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading on Handling and Stopping and on Tires ....

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit...... 594

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards.....595

TREADWEAR 595

TRACTION AA, A, B, C 595

TEMPERATURE A, B, C 595

5903-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)....596

59013-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in Order to Report a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) 597

594

13-1. For U.S.A.

The following information has been compiled according to Code of Federal Regulations "Title 49, Part 575".

13-2. Tire Information

■ Tire Labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire.

▼ Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.

▽ P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire size.

Example:

P(1)

205/ (2)

60/ (3)

R(4)

16/ (5)

(1) P = Certain tire type used on / light duty vehicles such as passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷ section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction (5) Rim diameter in inches

▽ Load and Speed Rating Descriptions

The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size designation.

They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire's speed rating.

Example:

P	205 / 60	R	16	91	V
	Size designation			(6)	(7)

(6) Load Index: A numerical code which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum inflation pressure.
For example, "91" means 1,356 lbs (615 kg), "90" means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), "89" means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire's capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds.

For example, "V" means 149 mph (240 km/h)

- Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tire's rated speed. - The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment and tire designed loads and speeds.

▼ Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.

Type A

(9) DOT symbol*

(2) Manufacturer's Identification Mark

(3) Tire Size Code
(4) Tire Type Code
(5) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the week, starting with "01" to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Type B

DOT(1)

XXX(2)

XXXXXXXX(3)

XXXX(4)

(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Plant Code
(3) Manufacturer's Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represe the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.
*: The DOT symbol certifies that tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

▼ Other markings

The following makings are also placed on the sidewall.

▽ Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, "350 kPa (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS"

▽ Maximum load rating

"The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tin. For example, "MAX. LOAD 615 kg (1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS."

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.

▽ Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire. For example, "TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL"

Construction

The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, "PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-STER"

▽ Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

For details, refer to "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards" P595.

■ Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure

▼ Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

For the recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires, refer toTires” P572.

▼ Vehicle placard

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

The vehicle placard is affixed to driver's side B-pillar.

Example:

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY: TOTAL X° FRONT X° REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES: AVANT X° ARRÊRE X° The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 300kg or XXXlbs. Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais depasser 300kg ou 300lb. TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FRONT AVANT PXX0XXRXX XXXPA, XXPSI VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER PARER ARRIERE PXX0XXRXX XXXPA, XXPSI SPARE DE SECCOURS TXXX0XXX XXXPA, XXPSI POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS D00155

The vehicle placard shows original tire size, recommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.

▼ Adverse safety consequences of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

▼ Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology • Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radiation, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

- Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

- CONTINUED -

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped the rim.

- Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead.

- Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads a laid at alternate angles substantial less than 90 degrees to the centre line of the tread.

- Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.

- Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of t tread or sidewall.

• Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more.

- Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire.

- Cord separation

toThe parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds.

- Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material.

- Curb weight

reThe weight of a motor vehicle with lystandard equipment including the ermaximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine.

- Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard tire.

- Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs.

- Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

- Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass.

- Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounting on a vehicle.

• Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

- Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

• Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be infla

• Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

• Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight

• Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be infla

• Measuring rim
  The rim on which a tire is fitted physical dimension requirements.
  • Normal occupant weight
  150 lbs (68 kg) times the number occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that is append to the end of this section.
  • Occupant distribution
  Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column between adjacent plies.

of Table 1 that is appended to the Pneumatic tire

end of this section.

• Open splice
  Any parting at any junction of trea sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material.
• Outer diameter
  The overall diameter of an inflated new tire.
• Overall width
  The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.
  • Passenger car tire
  A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
  • Ply
  A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.
• Ply separation
  A parting of rubber compound

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.
• Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously and considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
- Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the plyety cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
- Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacture

- Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at high loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.

• Rim

A metal support for a tire or a ti and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

- Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead sea

- Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

- Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or cod

- Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges.

- Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

- Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead.

- Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compou from the cord material in the side wall.

Snow tire

eA tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136-93 Sta

Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single

Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and that is marked with an Alpine Symbol “” on at least one sidewall.

- Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted testing, and it may be any rim list as appropriate for use with that t

- Tread

That portion of a tire that comes contact with the road.

- Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.

- Tread separation

n'dulling away of the tread from the -tire carcass.

• Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

• Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity.

- Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.

toted Vehicle normal load on the tire re Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each inside its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for dance with Table 1 that is appended serious designated seating capacities

to the end of this section) and dividing by 2.

- Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing.

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2	2 in front.
5 through 10 3		2 in front, 1 in second seat.
11 through 15 5		2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.
16 through 22 7		2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.

■ Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices

• Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
• Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
• To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the

vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened. For information about the tightening torque and tightening sequence for the wheel nuts, refer to Flat Tires" P488.

■ Vehicle Load Limit – How Determine

-The load capacity of your vehicle -determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side B-pillar. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX for XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.

The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be calculated by the following method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit - (total weight of occupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load tof a trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and weight limits, refer to Trailer Towing (Outback/Subaru Outback of Wilderness)" P473.

▼ Calculating total and load ca-For example, if the vehicle has on examples 1B pacities varying seating con-occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) figurations plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250

Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples:

Example 1A

Line drawing of a car driver inside a semi-truck, showing interior compartments and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which indicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs".

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ \begin{array}{l} = 1 5 4 \text { lbs (70 kg) } + 5 5 1 \text { lbs (250 kg) } \ (\text { Occupant }) \quad (\text { Cargo }) \ = 7 0 5 \text { lbs (320 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).

Available Load Capacity

$$ \begin{array}{l} = 8 0 0 \text { lbs (363 kg) } - 7 0 5 \text { lbs (320 kg) } \ \begin{array}{c} \text {(Vehicle} \ \text {capacity weight)} \end{array} \ \end{array} $$

S = 95 lbs (43 kg)

1. The result of step 2 shows that further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Side-view line drawing of a car with two people inside, showing interior compartments and seat arrangement (no text or symbols)

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ = \frac {1 5 4 \text { lbs (70 kg) } + 1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{\text { (Occupant) }} $$

$$ + \frac {5 5 1 \text { lbs (250 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} $$

$$ = 8 8 1 \text { lbs (400 kg) } $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

Available Load Capacity

= 800 lbs (363 kg)(Vehicle capacity weight) - 881 lbs (400 kg)(Total weight)

=-81 lbs (-37 kg)

1. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 81 lbs kg), so the cargo weight must reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.

Example 2A (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness only)

CAUTION

Legacy: Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Side-view line drawing of a car with a driver inside and a vehicle connected to a trailer (no text or symbols)

(37

D00158

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which indicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs".

For example, the vehicle has one 3. occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

= 165 lbs (75 kg)(Occupant) + 265 lbs (120 kg)(Cargo) + 22 lbs (10 kg)(Trailer hitch) + 176 lbs (80 kg)(Tongue load) = 628 lbs (285 kg)

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

^3 Available Load Capacity

= 800 lbs (363 kg) - 628 lbs (285 kg) (Vehicle capacity weight) = 172 lbs (78 kg)

1. The result of step 2 shows that a further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 2B (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness only)

CAUTION

Legacy: Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Line drawing of a car with two people driving inside and connected to a vehicle via a plug (no text or symbols)

For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weigh 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs ( kg) is installed in the vehicle for child to use, the calculations are follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

erTotal weight

$$ = \frac {1 6 5 \text { lbs (75 kg) } + 1 4 3 \text { lbs (65 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} $$

$$ + \frac {4 0 \text { lbs (18 kg) }}{\text {(Occupant)}} $$

$$ + \frac {1 1 \text { lbs (5 kg) }}{\text {(Child restraint)}} + \frac {2 6 5 \text { lbs (120 kg) }}{\text {(Cargo)}} $$

$$ + \frac {2 2 \text { lbs (10 kg) }}{\text {(Trailer hitch)}} + \frac {1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{\text {(Tongue load)}} $$

$$ = 8 2 2 \text { lbs (373 kg) } $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

Available Load Capacity

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {8 0 0 \text { lbs (363 kg) }}{\text { (Vehicle }} - \frac {8 2 2 \text { lbs (373 kg) }}{\text { (Total weight) }} \ \text { ing } \quad \text { (Vehicle } \ \text { e } \quad \text { capacity weight) } \end{array} $$

$$ = - 2 2 \text { lbs } (- 1 0 \text { kg }) $$

1. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 22 lbs the kg), so the cargo weight must be as reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.

■ Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle Load Capacities

The sum of four tires' maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight ("GVWR"). In addition, sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axle's maximum loaded capacity ("GAWR"). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axle's maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each axle's GAWR are shown on the vehicle certification label affixed to the driver's door.

The GVWR and front and rear

- CONTINUED -

GAWRs are determined by not on the maximum load rating of tires also loaded capacities of the vehicle's suspension, axles and other parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tire's maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.

■ Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading on Handling and Stopping and on Tires

Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stopping distance, vehicle and tire as shown in the following. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury.

• Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
• Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could increase the risk of rollover.
• Stopping distance will increase.
• Brakes could overheat and fail.
• Suspension, bearings, axles and

ly other parts of the body could but break or experience accelerated - wear that will shorten vehicle life.

• Tires could fail.
• Tread separation could occur.
• Tire could separate from its rim.

■ Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX6. kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs).

1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consume in making an informed choice in purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found when applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1- m/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condition of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm -due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ TRACTION AA, A, B, C

sThe traction grades, from highest lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

of WARNING

The traction grade assigned this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

■ TEMPERATURE A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the entire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature

- CONTINUED -

can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test where than the minimum required by law

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in Order to Report a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada)

Transport Canada - ASFAD

330 Sparks Street

Ottawa, ON K1A 0N5

Telephone: [phone]

(Ottawa-Gatineau area or internationally)

Toll free: 1-800-333-0510 (in Canada)

Online:

http://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls

Transports Canada - ASFAD

330, rue Sparks

Ottawa (Ontario) K1A 0N5

Téléphone: 819-994-3328

Accessory power outlet P336

Activation of valet mode P259

Adjustable storage net..... P349

Air cleaner element P532

Air conditioner Automatic climate control.... P314 Manual climate control system .... P316

Air filtration system P322

Airflow mode selection.... P316

Alarm system P146 All season tires P538

All-Wheel Drive warning light..... P195

Alloy wheel P546 Cleaning P512

Antenna.... P326 Printed antenna .... P326 Roof antenna .... P326

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P384

Arming the system P147 Armrest P47

Ashtray P340

Assist grip P340

AT OIL TEMP warning light.... P189

Audio Antenna P326 Set P326

Auto dimmer cancel function.... P182

Auto on/off headlights P261 Sensor P263

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon.... P221, P249

Auto Start Stop system .... P400 Indicator light.... P205, P400 No Activity Detected indicator light .... P205, P404 OFF indicator light.... P204, P403 Warning light .... P204, P403

Auto Vehicle Hold P396 Indicator light P194

Auto Vehicle Hold function.... P396

Auto Vehicle Hold icon P222, P249

Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light.... P194 Auto-dimming mirror/compass.... P277

Automatic climate control operation P314

Automatic headlight beam leveler.... P269 Warning light .... P204

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) P48

B

Backup light P558

Battery P552 Drainage prevention function P145

Jump starting P493

Replacement (access key fob) P134, P562

Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ..... P372

Replacement (transmitter).... P140, P563

Vehicle battery..... P552

Blind Spot Detection (BSD).... P413

Booster cushion.... P70

Booster seat.... P70

Bottle holder.... P335

Brake

Assist P383

Disc P573

Fluid..... P536, P570

Pad P573

Parking.... P394

Pedal P537

Brake system P382

Warning light P192

Braking.... P382

Tips.... P382

BSD/RCTA.... P413

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer..... P416

OFF indicator P206, P418

Warning indicator P206, P419

Warning volume.... P417

Bulb

Chart..... P574

Replacement..... P554

C

Camera

Front view monitor.... P405

Rear view camera P408

Smart Rearview Mirror camera P290

Cargo area

Cover P343

Light P331

Tie-down hooks P348

Catalytic converter P449

Center console P333

Center information display (CID) P216

11.6-inch display models P218

Cleaning P515

Dual 7.0-inch display models P242

Changing

Coolant P531

Flat tire P488

Oil and oil filter P529

Charge warning light P189

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light P188

Checking

Coolant level P530

Fluid level (brake fluid).... P536

Fluid level (washer fluid) P546

Oil level (engine oil).... P527

Child restraint systems.... P61

Installation of a booster cushion.... P70

Installation of a booster seat.... P70

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt..... P66

Lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)..... P72

Top tether anchorages.... P77

Child safety..... P5

Locks P150

Chime

Key reminder.... P175

Light..... P260

Seatbelt P49, P183

Cleaning

Alloy wheels.... P512

Center information display P515

Interior..... P513

Ventilation grille P321

Climate control system P309

Automatic P314

Manual P316

Clock..... P256

Coat hook P341

Combination meter display (color LCD) P207

Compass P277, P285

Console

Center P333

Overhead..... P334

Continuously variable transmission (CVT).... P374

Fluid..... P535, P570

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ..... P189

Control switch light..... P260

Convenient tie-down hooks P348

Coolant..... P530, P571

Cooling system.... P530

Corrosion protection.... P512

Crossbars..... P463

Cup holder P334

Front passenger's P334

Rear passenger's.... P335

D

Daytime running light (DRL) system..... P267

Deactivation of valet mode P260

Defogger P275

Defrosting..... P320

Deicer P275

Differential gear oil

Front P535, P570

Rear P535, P570

Dimensions..... P566

Disarming the alarm system P148

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators P383

Display Off P223

Dome light P330

Door

Locks..... P142

Open indicator P194

Step light..... P560

Unlock selection function.... P128

Double trip meter P180

Drainage reduction functions.... P178

Drive belts P535

Driver Monitoring System P434

OFF indicator light.... P207

Operation indicator light P206

Temporary stop indicator light P207

Warning light P206

DriverFocus P434

Driving

All-Wheel Drive model..... P451

Drinking P7

Drugs P7

Foreign countries P450

Off road P452

Pets P9

Snowy and icy roads..... P457

Tips..... P379, P451

Tired or sleepy P8

Winter P456

Dual 7.0-inch display models..... P242

E

Electrical system.... P571

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system..... P384

Warning.... P193

Electronic parking brake P394

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P396

Indicator light P193

Switch P394

Warning..... P193, P399

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) P48

Engine P567

Compartment overview..... P525

Coolant..... P530, P571

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) P7, P448

Hood P523

Hood open warning light..... P195

Hood release knob P523

Low oil level warning indicator P189

Oil P527, P568

Overheating.... P496

Starting & stopping.... P361, P363

Event data recorder P11

Exterior care P510

F

Flat tires.... P488

Floor mat.... P342

Fluid

Fluid level P570

Fluid level

Brake P536

Continuously variable transmission.... P535

Fog light P269

Indicator light..... P204

Switch P269

Front

Differential gear oil P535, P570

Fog light P269

Fog light indicator light P204

Fog light switch..... P269

Passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators P187

Passenger's seatbelt warning light P183

Seatbelt pretensioners P57

Turn signal light P555

View monitor P405

View monitor switch P405

Front seats.... P28

Forward and backward adjustment P31

Head restraint adjustment P37

Manual seat P31

Memory function P34

Power seat.... P32

Reclining P31

Seat heater P39, P319

Seat height adjustment (Driver's seat) P31

Seat ventilation.... P40, P320

Fuel P354, P567

Consumption indicator.... P212

Economy hints..... P448

Filler lid and cap P355

Gauge P180

Requirements..... P354, P567

Tank capacity P567

Fuses P553

G

Gasoline P354

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) P461

Glove box P333

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)..... P461

H

Hands-free Power Rear Gate function P165

Hazard warning flasher.... P178, P484

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat P37

Rear seat.... P45

Headlight..... P261

Beam leveler P269

Control switch..... P260

Flasher P264

Indicator light P204

Welcome lighting function.... P262

Heated Steering Wheel system P303

High Beam Assist

Function P264

Indicator..... P203

High beam indicator light..... P203

High/low beam change (dimmer) P263

Hill descent control P391

Indicator..... P205

HomeLink® P277, P285

Hook

Coat P341

Convenient tie-down P348

Shopping bag P342

Towing and tie-down..... P497

Horn P304

Hose and connections.... P530

|

Icy road surface warning indicator P206

Ignition switch P174

Light P175

Illumination brightness control P181

Immobilizer P136

Indicator light

Auto Start Stop P205

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected.... P205

Auto Start Stop OFF P204

Auto Vehicle Hold P194

BSD/RCTA OFF P206, P418

Door open..... P194

Driver Monitoring System OFF P207

Driver Monitoring System operation P206

Driver Monitoring System temporary stop .... P207, P441

Electronic parking brake P193

Front fog light..... P204

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF..... P187

Headlight P204

High beam P203

High beam assist P203, P264

Hill descent control P205

Immobilizer P202

Intelligent (I) mode P203, P380

Malfunction P188

RAB OFF P206

Security P136, P202

Select lever/Gear position P203

SI-DRIVE..... P203

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF.... P207

Sport Sharp (S#) mode P203, P380

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF P204

Turn signal..... P203

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF.... P197

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation P196

X-MODE..... P205

Indicator/Indicator light

High Beam Assist P264

Inside mirror P277

Interior lights P330

Internal trunk lid release handle P154

J

Jack and jack handle P486

Jack-up point P488

Jump starting P493

K

Key..... P119

Number plate.... P119

Positions P174

Reminder chime P175

Replacement P136

Keyless access with push-button start system ...... P119

Disabling keyless access functions..... P131

Locking and unlocking doors P124

Opening trunk..... P128

Warning chimes and warning indicator..... P134, P197

When access key fob does not operate properly P134, P178, P366, P502

Keyless entry system P137

L

Lane Change Assist (LCA) P414

Lap belt pretensioner P59

Leather seat materials.... P514

LED headlight warning light P204, P555

LED headlights..... P555

Lifting Cargo Cover P343

Light

Backup P558

Cargo area P331

Control switch P260

Daytime running P267

Dome P330

Door step.... P560

Front fog..... P269

Front side marker P261

Ignition switch P175

Map P330

Rear combination.... P556

Rear gate P331

Rear side marker light P557

Rear turn signal..... P270, P556

Side turn signal P575

Trunk..... P560

Turn signal..... P270, P555

Vanity mirror..... P332

Loading your vehicle P460

Low tire pressure warning light P189

Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) ...... P72

Lower and top tether anchorage P72

M

Maintenance

Precautions.... P519

Schedule P519

Seatbelt P55

Tips..... P521

Tools P486

Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) P188

Manual

Climate control..... P316

Mode (continuously variable transmission) P378

Rear gate..... P156

Seat P31

Map light P330

Maximum load limits P474

Meters and gauges.... P179

Mirror defogger P275

Mirrors P277

Moonroof.... P167

Switch..... P167

N

New vehicle break-in driving P448

0

Odometer P179

Off road driving P452

Oil filter P529

Oil level

Engine P527

Front differential gear P535

Rear differential gear P535

Warning light P189

Oil pressure warning light P189

On-road and off-road driving P9, P452

One-touch lane changer P270

Outside

Mirror defogger.... P275

Mirrors..... P299

Overhead console.... P334

Overheating engine.... P496

P

Parking.... P394

Brake P394

Tips..... P399

Passenger seatbelt reminder.... P183

Periodic inspections P450

Petrol fuel P354

PIN Code Access P128

Power

Folding mirror switch P301

Outlets P336

Outside mirrors.... P300, P301

Rear gate P157

Seat P32

Steering.... P381

Steering warning light.... P195

Window switches P151

Windows.... P150

Precautions against vehicle modification..... P60, P113

Preparing to drive P360

Printed antenna P326

Push-button

Ignition switch P176

Starting and stopping engine.... P363

R

Rear

Combination lights.... P556

Differential gear oil P535, P570

Gate light P331

Turn signal light P556

View camera P408

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) P414

Rear gate P156, P504

Manual P156

Power P157

Rear Seat Reminder P60

Rear seatbelt warning light P185

Rear seats.... P41

Armrest.... P47

Folding down.... P42

Head restraint adjustment P45

Heater P39

Reclining.... P42

Rear view camera P408

Rear window

Defogger.... P275

Wiper and washer switch P274

Wiper blade rubber P550

Wiper blades P550

Recommended

Brake fluid P570

Continuously variable transmission fluid.... P570

Engine oil P568

Front differential gear oil P535, P570

Rear differential gear oil.... P535, P570

Spark plugs.... P571

Refueling P355

Remote control mirror switch..... P300

Remote engine start system.... P367

Remote keyless entry system.... P137

Replacing battery.... P140, P561

Replacement Access key fob battery P134, P562

Air cleaner element P532

Brake pad P537

Cabin air filter P323

Key P136

Remote engine start transmitter battery ...... P372

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ..... P140, P563

Tire P545

Wheel P546

Wiper blade rubber P547

Wiper blades.... P547

Replacing bulbs.... P554

Backup light P558

Door step light..... P560

Front turn signal light P555

Headlight P555

Rear combination light.... P556

Rear side marker light P557

Rear turn signal light P556

Trunk light P560

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

OFF indicator P206

ON/OFF setting P432

Warning indicator..... P206

Rocking the vehicle P460

Roof Antenna P326

Molding and crossbar P462

Rails with integrated crossbars P463

Roof tent P468

S

Safety Precautions when driving ...... P5

Symbol P4

Warnings.... P3

Seat Fabric P513

Front P28

Heater P39

Height adjustment P31

Manual P31

Memory function P34

Power P32

Rear P41

Ventilation P40

Seatbelt..... P5, P47

Extender P55

Fastening P49

Maintenance..... P55

Pretensioners P57

Safety tips P47

Warning light and chime.... P49, P183

Security Alarm system.... P146

Immobilizer P136

Indicator light..... P136, P202

Select lever.... P375

Position indicator P203

Shift lock function P377

Shift paddle.... P378

Shopping bag hook P342

Shoulder pretensioners..... P58

SI-DRIVE P380

Indicator light P203

Intelligent (I) mode indicator P203, P380

Mode P380

Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator ...... P203, P380

Switch P380

Smart Rearview Mirror P285

Snow tires.... P458, P538

Snowy and icy roads.... P457

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator.... P207

Sounding a panic alarm.... P140

Spark plugs.... P534, P571

Specifications P566

Speedometer.... P179

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag).... P5, P81

System monitors.... P111

System servicing P112

System warning light P90, P111, P186

Starting & stopping engine P361, P363

State emission testing (U.S. only) P359

Steering lock P363, P366

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) P267

OFF indicator light.... P204, P267

OFF switch..... P267

Warning light P204

Steering wheel

Heated Steering Wheel system.... P303

Heater P303

Lock P363, P366

Power P381

Tilt/telescopic P303

Warning light P195

Storage compartment.... P333

Summer tires P538

Sun visors P332

Sunshade P168

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).... P81

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) P81

Curtain airbag.... P104

Side airbag.... P104

Synthetic leather upholstery.... P514

T

Tachometer.... P179

Temperature gauge.... P181

Temperature warning light AT OIL TEMP P189

Temporary spare tire P484

Tether (child restraint system) P72, P77

Tie-down hooks.... P497

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel P303

Tire P538, P572

All season P538

Chains..... P459

Information..... P582

Inspection P540

Pressures and wear P540

Replacement P545

Rotation..... P544

Size and pressure.... P572

Summer.... P538

Types P538

Winter (snow) P538

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS).... P189, P392, P492, P538

Screen P393

Warning light P189

Tires and wheels P538

Tools P486

Top tether anchorages.... P72, P77

Towing.... P497

All wheels on the ground P501

Flat-bed truck P500

Hooks.... P497

Tie-down hooks P497

Weight P474

Trailer

Connecting P471

Hitch (Outback) P470

Towing (Legacy) P473

Towing (Outback) P473

Towing tips.... P478

Trip meter P180

Trunk lid P153

Opener button P154

Release handle..... P154

Trunk light P560

Turn signal Indicator lights P203 Lever P270

U

Under-floor storage compartment P349

USB power supply.... P338

V

Valet mode P149, P259

Vanity mirror P332

Light P332

Vehicle

Capacity weight P461

Identification P578

Symbols.... P5

Vehicle Dynamics Control icon P222

Vehicle Dynamics Control system.... P385

OFF indicator light..... P197

Operation indicator light P196

Warning light P196

Ventilator P308

W

Warning and indicator lights.... P183

Warning chimes

Driver Monitoring System P441

Keyless access with push-button start system ..... P197

Seatbelt P49, P183

Warning indicator

Access key P134, P197

BSD/RCTA P206

Engine low oil level P189

Icy road surface..... P206

Keyless access with push-button start system P134, P197

RAB P206, P433

Warning light

ABS P191

All-Wheel Drive.... P195

AT OIL TEMP P189

Auto Start Stop P204

Automatic headlight beam leveler P204

Brake system P192

Charge P189

CHECK ENGINE P188

Driver Monitoring System P206

Engine hood open P195

Front passenger's seatbelt P183

LED headlight P204

Low fuel.... P194

Low tire pressure P189

Oil pressure P189

Power steering P195

Rear seatbelt.... P185

Seatbelt P183

SRS airbag system P186

Steering Responsive Headlight..... P204

Vehicle Dynamics Control P196

Windshield washer fluid P195

Warranties P2

Warranties and maintenance P474

Washing P510

Waxing and polishing.... P511

Wear indicators P543

Welcome lighting function.... P262

Wheel

Alloy P546

Balance P542

Nut tightening torque P572

Replacement P546

Windows P150

Windshield

Washer fluid P546

Washer fluid warning light P195

Wiper and washer switches..... P272

Wiper blades P548

Wiper deicer P275

Winter

Driving P456

Tires P458, P538

Wiper and washer P271

Wiper deicer P275

X

X-MODE P388

Indicator..... P205

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-

-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI RON) or higher.

■ Fuel Octane Rating

▼ RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

▼ AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

■ Limit of Ethanol Content

No more than 15%

■ Fuel Tank Capacity

18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

■ Engine Oil

U90 only the following oils.

• API classification SN with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING", SN PLUS with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING" or SP with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING"
• or ILSAC GF-5 or GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to "Engine Oil" P568.

■ Engine Oil Capacity

2.5 L models: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
2.4 L models: 4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to "Engine Oil" P527.

Cold Tire Pressure

Refer to "Tires" P572.